加载中...
共找到 25,639 条相关资讯
U.S. stocks closed at new heights on Friday as cool inflation data spurred optimism among investors that the Federal Reserve can stay on its rate-cutting path, boosting the U.S. economy and justifying higher valuations for equities.
CNBC's Sharon Epperson reports on news regarding retirement.
Nick Timiraos, WSJ, joins 'Closing Bell' to discuss the Federal Reserve's upcoming meetings, the labor market and much more.
Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, thank you for standing by. Welcome, and thank you for participating in the joint Media Analyst and Investor Call regarding Porsche AG's Q3 2025 results. This call will be hosted by Dr. Jochen Breckner, member of the Executive Board for Finance and IT. [Operator Instructions] At this time, it's my pleasure to hand over to Dr. Sebastian Rudolph, Vice President, Communications, Sustainability and Politics. Please go ahead. Sebastian Rudolph: Yes. Thank you, and hello, everybody, and welcome to our joint media analysts and investors call. We're talking about the results of the first 9 months of 2025 of Porsche AG. And with me today are our CFO, Jochen Breckner; and Bjorn Scheib, our Head of Investor Relations. Jochen will give you a brief overview of our business performance year-to-date, then after a short break, we will hold two Q&A sessions: first, with analysts and investors, then with the media. As always, you can find the press release in the Porsche newsroom. The investors deck and the quarterly report are available in the Investors section of the Porsche website. And with this, I hand over to my colleague, Bjorn. Björn Scheib: Sebastian, thank you very much. Good evening also from my side. And before we begin, please note that any forward-looking statements during this call are subject to the risks and uncertainties outlined in the safe harbor statement which is included in our materials. This introduction is also governed by this disclaimer. With this, I hand over now to Jochen. Jochen Breckner: Bjorn and Sebastian, thank you very much. Also thanks, everyone, for joining this call. Good evening, everyone. Let me walk you through Porsche's performance in the first 9 months of 2025 and the strategic actions we have been taking. Let's start with the big picture. Porsche continues to build on a strong foundation, a loyal customer base, a compelling and completely refreshed product portfolio and one of the most iconic brands in the world. Keeping in mind the current gaps in our product portfolio, our unit sales are resonating well. As you've seen in our press release two weeks ago, Porsche reported robust delivery figures with 212,500 vehicles delivered to customers worldwide between Jan and September. Here, the share of electrified vehicles significantly grew to 35.2%. In Europe, the share even reached 56%. Our region overseas and emerging markets and the USA achieved a new all-time record. North America remains our largest region with 64,000 deliveries and a 5% increase. Now let's skip from deliveries to vehicle wholesales Here, Porsche sold 198,000 vehicles in the first 9 months. This is a year-on-year decline of 11% with a mixed picture across model lines and regions. The Macan showed strong momentum, becoming the best-selling model with 61,500 units. That's 10% increase year-over-year and includes 33,900 units of the new all-electric Macan. Sales of the Cayenne declined by 22% due to a prior year catch-up effect. The 911 saw a 6% drop linked to stack-up launches of the new generation. The 718 was impacted by limited model availability due to new EU cybersecurity regulations. North America, excluding Mexico, recorded a 6% decline in the first 9 months. This reflected temporarily lower imports after the summer break following high inventory levels at the end of Q2. China, including Hong Kong, saw a 25% drop. This was driven by ongoing market challenges in the luxury segment, intensified competition and a strategic focus on value-oriented sales. In contrast, our overseas and emerging markets grew by 3% to almost 40,000 units, which demonstrates resilience and growth potential. Porsche's Global sales remain well balanced across key regions. This underlines the strengths of the brand, the appeal of our product portfolio and the resilience of our diversified market presence. Despite adverse market conditions, incoming orders remain robust. This reflects strong brand desirability and a favorable product mix. Demand for individualization options remains unchanged on a very high level. In the first 9 months of this year, Porsche generated group revenues of EUR 26.9 billion. This is 6% below the prior year period. The under-proportional and moderate decline was primarily driven by positive pricing, along with higher revenues in the Financial Services segment. This performance underscores the strength and diversification of Porsche's business model even in a challenging market environment. Let's now take a closer look at our expense development in the first 9 months. Total expenses including cost of goods sold, distribution and administrative functions increased by EUR 2.3 billion year-over-year, reaching EUR 27 billion. Despite temporary relief from lower production volumes on cost of goods sold, Porsche's broad-based cost increases driven by several structural and external factors. These are the persistent inflationary pressure across the supply chain. A significant increase in R&D expenses, primarily due to reduced capitalization and higher depreciation and amortization, geopolitical challenges beyond our control, most notably the U.S. import tariffs and significant costs associated with our strategic transformation initiatives. To counterbalance these headwinds, our comprehensive profitability program Push-to-Pass delivered targeted efficiency improvements. This initiative reflects Porsche's disciplined execution and long-term commitment to innovation, regulatory preparedness and cost resilience in an inflationary environment. Nevertheless, group operating profit declined to EUR 40 million. This corresponds to an operating return on sales of 0.2%, a result that clearly falls short of our expectations. It is important to note, however, that this figure includes substantial extraordinary charges. Year-to-date, Porsche recognized approximately EUR 2.7 billion in extraordinary expenses related to its strategic realignment, portfolio adoptions and battery activities. In addition, tariff-related costs imposed a burden over EUR 500 million, which further impacted profitability. These charges also had a significant impact on the automotive segment, which reported a year-to-date operating loss of EUR 200 million. Let me emphasize, excluding the extraordinary effects from the strategic realignment and the U.S. import tariffs, the underlying performance of the automotive segment remains robust. This strength is driven by favorable pricing, the successful execution of our Push-to- Pass initiatives and a temporarily favorable foreign exchange and quality environment. Reflecting the operational strength of our ongoing business, Porsche's automotive net cash flow increased to EUR 1.3 billion by the end of the third quarter of this year, up from EUR 1.2 billion in the prior year period. This corresponds to a net cash flow margin of 5.6% compared to 4.8% a year earlier. This also highlights our continued focus on disciplined spending and effective working capital management. The strong cash flow performance in Q3 was supported by disciplined investment and spending practices as well as rigorous working capital management. Notably, based on our value-oriented production approach, we achieved a significant reduction in temporarily elevated inventories in the United States and China, which had built up by the end of Q2. Year-to-date, automotive net cash flow also reflects extraordinary outflows of approximately EUR 900 million. These are primarily related to our strategic realignment initiatives and tariff-related expenses. With that, let me turn to the outlook. We plan to continue our model offensive and customer-focused product strategy. Porsche remains well positioned from both a product and pricing perspective. Our core assumptions regarding unit sales, supply chain stability and cost trends remain unchanged. Recent news flows underline that global supply chains are expected to remain volatile. The supply bottlenecks at the Dutch chip manufacturer and Nexperia continue for the time being to have no impact on production at Porsche. The Dutch company, Nexperia is not a direct supplier of the Volkswagen Group. However, some Nexperia components are used in vehicle parts with which also Porsche is supplied by its direct suppliers. The Volkswagen Group is currently examining alternative sourcing options in order to minimize possible effects on the supply chain. The company is also in close contact with potential suppliers in this regard. Porsche has also set up a task force. In light of the EU, U.S. agreement on import tariffs, our forecast for the full year reflects the 15% U.S. import duty effective August 1. We are proactively implementing mitigation measures such as targeted pricing adjustments to preserve margin integrity. Without the product-related portfolio decisions made last month, Porsche would have reaffirmed its original group return on sales outlook from Q2 '25, despite persistent market headwinds. As a result we expect group revenue in the range of EUR 37 million to EUR 38 billion, unchanged from our previous guidance. At the lower end of the bandwidth, we anticipate a slightly positive group return on sales and an automotive net cash flow margin of 3%. At the upper end of the bandwidth, the group return on sales is expected to reach 2% and an automotive net cash flow margin of 5%. The latter remains well within the range of our initial guidance from the end of April. The Group's return on sales guidance for full year 2025 reflects approximately EUR 3.1 billion in extraordinary expenses, primarily related to strategic realignment efforts. These include the repositioning of Salesforce Group and adjustments due to recent product portfolio decisions. Also, the Group's return on sales guidance incorporates a high triple-digit million euro impact from U.S. import tariffs. For the full year, automotive net cash flow margin outlook, we anticipate outflows related to our strategic realignment initiatives alongside tariff-related payments of approximately EUR 1.2 billion. Our cash flow guidance of 3% to 5% for the fiscal year reflects a tariff agreement reached between the EU and U.S. authorities. Assuming reimbursement would be recognized post December 31 only, current expectations support maintaining the guidance unchanged. We continue to pursue a disciplined currency hedging strategy. For 2025, substantial exposure has already been secured with significant coverage beyond 2025. This approach supports planning reliability and safeguards margin integrity. Before concluding, let me briefly address our capital allocation strategy. Driven by the new product initiatives aligned with our strategic realignment, we anticipate R&D spending to peak in the current and upcoming fiscal year, followed by a decline. Porsche remains committed to delivering a reliable dividend to our long-term shareholders. Supported by our strong balance sheet and robust cash flow, the Executive Board currently intends to propose a dividend for fiscal year 2025 that deviates from the medium-term policy. In absolute numbers, the proposed dividend is expected to be significantly lower than last year's payout. But it still would clearly exceed the level implied by our medium-term framework of 50% payout ratio. Final approval remains subject to the relevant corporate bodies. Porsche reduced its asset base by more than EUR 1 billion in 2025 compared to previous year. This reflects a significantly lower capitalization rates and reduced CapEx year-over-year. Combined with higher depreciation, amortization and impairments. Looking ahead, our capital asset allocation strategy will increasingly emphasize partnerships and licensing over ownership and vertical integration. This shift will not safeguard but enhance our agility and strategic flexibility. With this, we strive to better seize opportunities in a fundamentally transformed market environment. With a clear focus on involving customer preferences, we are expanding our portfolio to include additional combustion engine and plug-in hybrid models. This strategic move complements our commitment to electrification and ensures a broader offering across key segments. We also continue to execute our successful Halo strategy, anchored by high-impact lighthouse projects that elevate brand desirability and attract high-value customers. Models such as the Cayenne Turbo GT and the 911 Dakar exemplify our unique blend of performance and lifestyle appeal. They reinforce Porsche's identity in the exclusive segment. The latest result of this strategy, the 911 Turbo S has received strong demand and highly positive feedback from both media and customers. This underscores the enduring strengths of the 911 brand. Starting in 2028, a more balanced drivetrain offering will further strengthen our market position and support sustainable long-term growth. We remain also committed to electromobility and view decarbonization as a core societal responsibility. We scale our operations and strengthen long-term resilience, we have already taken decisive steps to align our cost structures and strategic footprint with future market realities. We have initiated a comprehensive workforce transformation targeting both direct and indirect roads in order to ensure organizational agility and efficiency. We are accelerating cost efficiency initiatives across the organization to unlock sustainable savings. In China, we are executing targeting strategic adjustments, including streamlining our dealer network and reinforcing our presence in high-demand regions. Where long-term profitability is no longer viable, we will responsibly reduce our footprint. Originally, we anticipated reducing our dealer network from approximately 150 dealerships down to around 100 by 2027. This target has now been revised downward to around 80 dealerships, reflecting a more focused and profitability driven approach. Additional measures are currently under evaluation. Let me also briefly address the discussions on our future package. As you are aware, management and the workers council are currently engaged in constructive dialogue to jointly shape this initiative. Our shared objective is to enhance the company's resilience, flexibility and agility. Thereby reinforcing our long-term competitiveness in an increasingly dynamic market environment. Importantly, we do not anticipate any significant extraordinary burdens arising from these negotiations. While all these measures will temporarily impact our financials in 2025, they are strategically sound and essential for long-term success. We are confident that this approach will strengthen our position in a dynamic market and support sustainable value creation. Porsche has a proven track record of navigating complex environments, and we are currently managing through another period of macro industry by challenges with strategic clarity and operational discipline. With our strategic realignment, we are executing a clear plan designed to strengthen our brand and to sharpen our product offering. Our focus remains on enhancing product portfolio flexibility, strengthening product individuality, increasing exclusivity, and driving desirability across our portfolio. These efforts are aligned with our long-term ambition to position Porsche for sustained high margin growth and Brazilian profitability. We expect 2025 to represent the trough in the current cycle. From 2026 onwards, we anticipate a meaningful recovery in performance supported by positive momentum from our product portfolio and the profitability measures from Push-to- Pass. And with that, let's turn to your questions. After a short break. Thank you very much. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, we will now have a short break before starting the Q&A for analysts and investors. Please hold the line. [Break] Operator: Ladies and gentlemen at this time we will now begin the question and answer session for the analyst and investors. [Operator Instructions]. With that, I hand over again to Bjorn Scheib. Björn Scheib: Thank you very much. So we will start the Q&A session for analysts with Tim Rokossa of Deutsche Bank. And then next in the row will be Horst Schneider of Bank of America. Gentlemen, as said, this is a joint media and analyst call. As such, please limit yourself to one or [indiscernible] two questions. Thank you. Tim Rokossa: This is Tim from Deutsche Bank. I would have 1.5 questions then. So actually pretty good underlying margins and free cash flow numbers, the 12%-13% margin adjusted for one-offs and tariffs. Now tariffs will likely be the new normal, and that also feels like you still need to do some repositioning for the business, fine-tune here and there. Jochen, when can we expect the burden from one-offs to really go away and think about an underlying matching the stated figure? Is that '26 or already during Q4? And then when we think about Q4 and '26, is there any sound bias you can already give us? You sounded pretty confident in your statements. Can we assume that you can possibly improve as of today from the 5% to 7% EBIT margin range that we had previously? Is there any sort of major one-off still to be expected in Q4? Jochen Breckner: Tim, thank you very much. And as you said, we were really happy with our operational performance in this year for the first 9 months. And as discussed and just also elaborated on, we had various onetime effects that will go away in the future. As of now, we have posted EUR 2.7 billion until September. And this is expenditure. Your question was about cash, but let me start with that one. EUR 2.7 billion that we've already posted for the effects that you know strategic realignment that we committed at the beginning of the year, also organizational adjustments and then the latest decisions on the updated product portfolio. So these expenditures are already digested in Q3. We expect additional one-offs and special expenses in Q4 as we've guided for. So when we look at the full fiscal year 2025, we are very confident that we will reach the 0% to 2% profitability guidance corridor. For '26, no major one-off effects are expected. So the expenditures that we need for the strategic realignment for reorganization, the by far biggest part will be in the books in 2025. Now on the cash flow side, again, a very robust net cash flow by the end of Q3. We have optimized working capital. We have reduced CapEx spending as good as we could. And most of the additional expenditures we had for the one-off effects were not cash relevant until the end of September. Some of them are already gone as cash spending since we are talking about depreciation of capitalized R&D expenditures, for example, and other cash effects are expected to be an headwind in 2026. So again, by the end of this year, cash flow margin will be between 3% and 5% that we've guided for. And having said all that, for the end of 2025, we also will have first effects for the strategic realignment for 2026 pull forward into Q4. 2026, it's too early to guide that year, and we will do that as always, with the official forecast report with the annual press conference. But as I have communicated it earlier and also in this statement, we will be in a substantially better situation on reported numbers. 2025 will be the trough. But having said that, we do not expect on a return on sales level a double-digit performance in 2026. That is something that we will target for the years to come after 2026. Tim Rokossa: Would you confirm though, your previous statement that a high single-digit margin is possible with everything we know today, obviously, things can still change, right? Jochen Breckner: You're saying a high single-digit margin is possible for 2026. I would confirm that, yes. Björn Scheib: Next in the row is Horst of Bank of America, and he will be followed by Sam from Exane BNP. Horst Schneider: Yes, my first main question that is basically on the tariffs again. I think that's an item that surprised me the most on the upside in this release. So you say it was above EUR 500 million in year-to-date, which implies a burden of something like EUR 100 million, maybe EUR 150 million in Q3. I know the tariff came down, but it looks to me that the impact in Q2 was a little bit overstated. And in Q3, it was basically, there was a benefit from kind of tariff provision release maybe. So maybe you can explain that and also the magnitude of that? And is it right basically that the underlying tariff burden is something like EUR 250 million and not EUR 150 million a quarter? Jochen Breckner: Yes. Tariff situation was quite complex, Horst. So maybe just for everyone in this call to have everyone on the same sheet of paper. We are 27.5% as of April 3, then the reduction to 15% as of August 1. And on that assumption, we are also guiding the full fiscal year, so that tariffs will remain at 15%. Based on quarterly numbers, we communicated with the H1 numbers that we had effects from the U.S. tariffs around EUR 400 million. And by the end of Q3, cumulative numbers are a bit more than EUR 0.5 billion. And this is a complex math of the varying rates that we had, the 27.5% and the 15%. We did not have the 15% for the full third quarter. That's something that just kicked in by the end of July. So as August 1 and based on these assumptions and facts, by the way, in the actuals, we have made up the tariff numbers. For the full year, we expect a very high 3-digit number. You can do the math. I mean, having the number for the Q2 with the special effects also Q3, lower rate and first pricing mitigation numbers that we have there. So for the full year, we expect the tariff burden to be in the ballpark number, as I've communicated also in the last call. So this is something where we would see around about EUR 0.7 billion for the full fiscal year. Horst Schneider: Okay. That's great. Just a small follow-up. Would you be able to comment on price/mix in the third quarter? Because you raised prices, maybe you can give a wrap-up again overview by how much? And are any further price increases coming from here? Or you're basically done now with the tariff pricing? Jochen Breckner: Yes. We've increased pricing for the new model year 2026 across the board for all regions. So that's an effect that depending on the launch of these new cars already started to kick in, in Q3 and will further strengthen the pricing position throughout the year and then also for 2026. On top of that, we had an additional pricing hike in the United States for first compensation measure for the U.S. tariffs to keep our margins on a, say, decent level and coming through pricing as a mitigating effect on and measure on the tariffs, we are planning to have an additional price increase in the months to come. It's not communicated yet and not decided in full detail yet. So that's something you can watch out for, but we really plan to have a second step there. And the full effect of all these pricing measures will be seen in 2026. Horst Schneider: But just as I got it right on this tariff, you said EUR 0.7 billion for the full year, and you have not released provisions in the third quarter. Did I get that right? Or... Jochen Breckner: No, I said that for the full year, we expect EUR 0.7 billion as a tariff effect. And that includes and is based on the assumptions that we have paid the 27.5% until the end of July and that we have paid and will pay the 15% from August 1 through December 31. Björn Scheib: But to be clear, there is no release in any tariff provision or anything as such. Next in the row will be Sam, and he will be followed by Stephen from Bernstein. Samuel Perry: Building on Tim's question, frankly, around the reversal of one-offs into next year, which judging from your previous answer was that you basically expect them to fully reverse. What's the risk here that with the new CEO, we get further tilts in the strategy into next year and therefore, further one-offs? Or is the assumption that he's going to come in and then adopt the exact strategy that's already been laid out? That would be my first question. Then a quick question on China. Have you seen any impact of the luxury tax that's come in, in demand in August and September or any prebuy in July before it came in? Jochen Breckner: Yes. So on your first question, Sam, whether we would expect additional strategic realignment decisions with the new CEO coming to our company on January 1, Michael Leiters -- that's something that we will see when he is here. I mean he's not here yet. He's in a competitive situation with his former company, McLaren. So we have not started discussing professional issues and business issues as of now. Having said that, Michael is a well-known colleague. We've worked together in the past when he worked with Porsche, great collaboration, a great guy, and he knows Porsche very well. He knows our strategy, is from the automotive business. So of course, every time a new CEO joins the company, there will be a programmatic approach to that. But from today's perspective, would be early to expect more one-off expenses from my personal perspective. I think the major decisions have been made and are suitable and great decisions for the company. Second question was on China. The baseline for the luxury tax has been lowered to CNY 900,000, which affects our portfolio or some part of our portfolio. We have not seen prebuying effects because that new legislation was launched within 48 hours. So no customer had a chance to really run much into prebuying. So that effect was close to 0, I would say. After the effect, we have conserved prices and protected prices for the existing customers. So demand was on the level that we have seen. And looking forward, the increase of the luxury tax or the lowering of the baseline for the level when the luxury tax kicks in is something that we will monitor. We have looked at our portfolio, and we will come up with strategic decisions on how we can position the one or the other derivative to be in a more competitive situation. Björn Scheib: So next in the row will be Stephen of Bernstein, and he will be followed by Anthony of ODDO BHF. Stephen Reitman: My question is about the U.S. I asked on the last call about your the repeal of the IRA, which and the particular lease credit on your BEVs. Could you comment on what's been happening since then, in particular, the pricing and how you're pricing the leases of the Macan Electric and also the Taycan, which I noticed were some of the better performance in the third quarter, at least at the retail level, indulging by some of the data that we can see here. Jochen Breckner: Yes. You're referring to the $7,500 tax credit. The electric cars were to -- if they are not bought as cash buying -- this is brought on lease contracts. And of course, the deduction of that effect leads to higher lease rates on a monthly basis. And therefore, our products are getting more expensive than they have been. And there we see some minor effects on the demand side, but the effect is significantly lower than you might have expected that it could be given that USD [ 7,500 ] is a rather big number. But as of now, we are quite happy with how the demand developed also at the higher monthly payments that we have to communicate with our Porsche Financial Services offers we have. Stephen Reitman: And the second question, could you remind us as well what the time line is for the ending of production of the Macan ICE and also for the Cayman and the Boxster, please, ICE versions? Jochen Breckner: Yes. We still offer the ICE Macan in the regions out of Europe, out of the European Union. We will produce the car well into 2026, and that car will be on offer throughout 2026 and in some markets, even in 2027 based on final stocking that we will do, exact EOP, end of production date still to be decided and planned in the exact planning, but it will be more or less in the middle of 2026. But as I've said, customers will get their cars also throughout 2026 and some even in 2027. On the Boxster and the Cayman, the end of production is here to come. That will be in October. So we are producing the very last cars these days. And then it's the same situation as with the first Macan, the ICE Macan that customers will receive their products throughout the next month. Björn Scheib: Very good. So next then will be Anthony. And after Anthony, we have Michael. And please note in about 5 minutes, then we move over to the press. Anthony Dick: Yes. The first one is on just the general kind of margin environment for 2026. So it seems like there's quite a few tailwinds for you, of course, outside of the nonrecurring charges you had in 2025, but you might also be having lower tariff impacts based on that kind of EUR 150 million run rate and also some positive pricing and likely mix also. So I was just wondering what might be preventing you from reaching that double-digit margin in terms of what headwinds should we take into account for 2026? And then the second one is just a follow-up also on the free cash flow. So you mentioned EUR 1.2 billion of cash out this year for the restructuring and the tariffs. Could you actually maybe break that down between the restructuring and the tariffs? And also what remains in 2026 in terms of what cash out remains on the restructuring? And what kind of reimbursement should we expect for the tariffs? Jochen Breckner: Yes, a couple of questions. Let me answer it. So first, a question on why do we not expect double-digit return on sales performance in 2026, given the quite robust performance that we've seen if you do the reconciliation with all the one-off effects from 2025. In 2026, based on the substantial improvement that we will expect, we also have some headwinds that we have to take into account. First one is product offering. I've just commented on the ICE Macan and also on the runout of the 982, so the Boxster Cayman car, which will have [ last ] sales based on the production that we had so far. But from a portfolio perspective, we will have additional issues where we do not have supply. Second is we do not expect China to recover. So given the trend in China and also in some other markets, our assumption is that our sales will be -- unit sales will be lower in 2026 than expected for 2025. Also, from an FX perspective, as I've said, 2025, almost fully hedged. Also in the years to come, we have quite high and substantial hedging ratios, but there are some open positions and also in 2026, first effects will occur where our FX situation is a little bit weaker than it has been in 2025. And given these effects, we see a huge improvement, really a relevant one single-digit performance in return on sales, but it will take a bit more time to come back to the 2-digit performance. Net cash flow for Q3. So year-to-date Q3 outflows were about almost EUR 900 million. When it comes to U.S. tariffs, that's a bit more than EUR 500 million. And then we had additional spendings on the strategic activities and organizational realignment activities that gives you the number of almost EUR 900 million of special effects on the cash side for the one-offs and U.S. tariffs. Anthony Dick: For '26 remaining in terms of disbursements related to the realignment and reimbursements related to the tariffs? Jochen Breckner: But for 2026, we will have, from our perspective and based on our assumptions, a stable tariff situation of 15% import tariffs to the United States. So we will see that in the full year compared to 2.5% in the first quarter, 27.5% until July and then 15% from August through December. If you do the average for these different quarters in this year, for the next year, you will have a similar number that we expect for the next year. So tariffs, stable situation, 15%, more or less a burden as we have it in this year. And for the strategic realignment, the one-off expenses will be -- the really biggest part will be posted in 2025. So we do not expect material effects in 2026. Björn Scheib: Very good. So next then will be Michael, and then we will hand over to our colleagues of the media. And if we would have time at the end of this call, we will see if we can squeeze in the one or the other question. Unknown Analyst: A couple of quick ones, if I can. Just in regards to China, the work you're doing in China, can you talk about the cost of that? So shrinking from 150 dealers to 100 now to 80, what have you had to pay the dealers to have them walk away from the contracts that you've got with them? That's the first question. So China compensation, if you like. And then the second question is just around the tariff piece. If I remember rightly, you built inventory in the U.S. on your own books in the first half. Is that the reason why the tariff in the first half looks really high versus what looks to be a very low tariff in Q3 that you were actually burning off that inventory in Q3, which meant the actual tariff impact was smaller? Jochen Breckner: Yes. Thanks for the questions. On China and the restructuring work that we are doing in the dealer body from 150 to initially 100, and now we're targeting 80 dealers to set up a dealer network that is robust and financially viable and profitable. That's an activity that we are doing in really good cooperation and good talks together with our dealers because they have the same interest in coming up with a business model that works profitably in the Chinese markets as opposed to what we've seen during the last couple of months or years. That comes with the cost. That's clear. But these costs are not substantial compared to the other effects that we have communicated in terms of strategic realignment and restructuring of the company. If there would have been -- we would have incorporated that into our communication. So I'm not in a position to give you an exact number since we're also in negotiation position with our dealers. But as I said, very constructive talks, joint interest in adopting the -- and joint target in adopting the dealer network, the dealer body, and that's something that we can digest in our profitability in the current year and also in the next year when these actions will happen. On tariffs, of course, the cars imported by the end of Q2 had a 27.5%. We had to pay based on the import data that we have. And once you release these cars, of course, the tariffs are posted to the cost of goods sold when we reduce the working capital. So you have some effect there. But I think you should look at the tariff situation, as I commented on it on a yearly basis for the full year, EUR 0.7 billion, and that's also a good estimate for the year to come based on then 15% throughout the year. Björn Scheib: Before we hand over, may I only clarify one thing. When Jochen talked about lower unit sales next year, we are talking about unit sales to the degree of car sales, wholesales. This is no revenue guidance. This will all come next year, because I already got first questions if this is our revenue guidance. This is no revenue guidance. Jochen Breckner: Thanks, Bjorn. Sebastian Rudolph: Okay. colleagues, then we make a short break and then we're right back with the Q&A for the media. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, we will now have a short break before beginning the Q&A for the media. Please hold the line. [Break] Operator: Ladies and gentleman, we will now begin the questions and answer session for the media. [Operator Instructions]. With that, I hand again over to Dr. Sebastian Rudolph. Please go ahead. Sebastian Rudolph: Yes. Thank you very much, and welcome back colleagues to the Q&A session for the media. We have limited time. It would be great if you limit your questions to one, if possible. And with this, I would say we start with the Financial Times and Sebastian -- just unmute your mic and the floor is yours. Unknown Attendee: I wanted to ask with respect to the U.S. tariff resolution last week, which has bought somewhat of a tailwind for U.S. carmakers. How do you feel this impacts your position and the position of European car makers relative to other manufacturers with a manufacturing presence in North America. Jochen Breckner: Sebastian, thanks for the question. If we got you rightly, you're asking about the U.S. tariffs and changes that you were referring to. So commenting on that one, I'm not aware of any relevant changes, as I've just communicated in the other call. We are planning our assumptions on 15% as persisting and remaining tariffs for cars to be imported. I know that there are some political decisions on the truck business where trucks might be affected, but it's not relevant for us as passenger car manufacturers. So again, we are paying 15% since August 1, and that's our assumption for the end of this year and also for the next year. Sebastian Rudolph: The next question goes to Rachel Moore of [ Reuters ]. Please, Rachel. Unknown Attendee: I wanted to ask if there is an update on the measures that will be required as part of the restructuring. You have the second package of measures currently under negotiation. Can we expect more job cuts? And what's the time line on that? Jochen Breckner: Rachel, we have started the negotiation on the second package. We call it the future package because that's a package that will really improve the competitiveness of our business model and our sites in Germany. We do that internally. The discussions and negotiations with our workers' council. So we are not in a position yet to communicate anything detailed because it's not agreed and we're not do not want to discuss this in public. We do that on ICE level with the partners from the works council. But what I can say is that we are targeting significant measures, and you were talking about job positions on that one, I would like to comment that a major part of the future package is not about job positions, but rather on salary levels and additional perks and compensation elements that we have in our current baseline. Sebastian Rudolph: Question goes to Stephen Wilmot, Wall Street Journal, Stephen, please. Unknown Attendee: Question, I just wanted to ask, can you give us any -- beyond the second package that you just talked about, what are you doing internally to reflect the strategic realignment that you've provided for in your financial results. Can you give us any kind of indication of what -- what is going on internally in terms of kind of teams being allocated to hybrids or other kind of projects that reflects the strategic realignment? Jochen Breckner: Yes. I mean we -- when it comes to our R&D work and our product portfolio work, we have a multi project planning approach and we are staffing the projects along our cycle plan and strategy as the projects come along and needs to be developed. And based on the later decisions that we -- that we would push out the new electric platform and the car projects, the heads, as we call them, that were planned to be on that platform. Of course, we've updated our multi-project planning approach and have redistributed, if I may say so, our colleagues and experts in R&D, but also in other areas of the company from that platform and that car projects into the other ones that we will develop to put our portfolio in a more flexible position starting as of '28. So that's a bit of a process of change, but it's nothing special in general. We do that regularly because projects come, projects go, projects are finalized. So engineers and all the other colleagues and experts need to be allocated to various tasks. And in with the latest decisions, it has been a little bit bigger than a task to execute it. But in general, that's a daily business, and we are executing that, yes, in a very stringent way, and colleagues are already working on the new cars on the ICE and plug-in hybrid drivetrains that we communicated. Maybe if I may add one thing. This has nothing to do with the second package. So this is, as I said, a daily work, reallocating experts, engineers resources the second package, the future package we're talking about is more about structural changes. Sebastian Rudolph: We have one more question on our list. That's why I repeat. [Operator Instructions]. So with this, Monica, Bloomberg, the floor is yours. Unknown Attendee: We've heard quite a bit from Mr. Blume already in previous calls about Porsche's intention to expand the [indiscernible] program, and that individualization and sort of higher-margin vehicles will play an important role in Porsche's future strategy. I was wondering if we could hear a bit more color or details on what structural changes or concrete measures are being taken to expand that program? And what would need to be offset for that expansion, specifically in Zuffenhausen physically, if facilities need to be expanded if more people need to be onboarded, et cetera? Jochen Breckner: Yes, Monica, thanks for that question. The exclusive and [indiscernible] manufacturer, as we call it, business is really key to our strategy is one key pillar for the brand, but also in that part of the business for highly profitable margins. We will expand that business as communicated earlier, and we will do that step-by-step in a very cautious way because in that area of our business model, it's really key that we keep scarcity and keep it as a luxury part of the business. So this is a step-by-step approach year-by-year. We have already increased significantly the capacity and also the output in that area throughout the last years and over the next 2, 3, 5 years until the end of this decade, substantial increases in terms of output will be organized in our operational model. This will come with additional capacity in that area of our business model, but we are not planning for a substantial additional hires to organize that one. That is something where we -- as I just said in the answer to the other question, our multi-project planning, given the staff and the workforce we have we will organize the increase in capacity in the [ Zonda bunch ] and exclusive manufacturer program. When it comes to assets, buildings, machinery, et cetera, again, our plant in Zuffenhausen is big enough to -- yes, to implement the increases in the Zonda bunch exclusive manufacturers. So there are no significant CapEx expenditures planned to organize that part of the business on the growth path that we've entered. Sebastian Rudolph: I would take 2 last questions. The first goes to [ Stuttgarter Zeitung ] then we finish with Dow Jones. So Matthias Schmidt, you go first, Stuttgarter Zeitung -- second, please. Unknown Attendee: Just one short question. Is the new CEO already involved in the negotiations on the second package? Jochen Breckner: I just repeat because it was acoustically hard to. It's the upcoming CEO already involved in the negotiations. We're talking about the [indiscernible] package. Yes. No, he's not. Michael Leiters will join the company on January 1. He's not with the company yet. Decisions have been made that he will join the company. We are looking forward to welcoming and a portion working together with him. But given the situation, competitive situation with also the other company that you used to work for, we are not in discussions in any direct work with him yet. We will start that as of January 1. And given the fact that he's been with Porsche for quite some years. And then afterwards, is a highly respected expert in the automotive industry, we really expect to have a fast start and the kick start in Jan 2026, but no actions so far. Sebastian Rudolph: Then we have the last question for today, Markus Klausen, Dow Jones. Unknown Attendee: One question regarding the analyst call. You said Mr. Breckner, to be 100% sure that next year, Porsche will reach high single-digit return. And then year ahead, 2027, a double-digit return is possible. And is it reasonable to assume that Porsche will once again achieve a return of 80% at some point in the future? Or is it no longer within reach? Jochen Breckner: Yes. So first, let me confirm that we are expecting high single-digit return on sales next year. That's correct. Second, we've communicated that our ambition is a 10% to 15% profitability, margin and range in the midterm. And whether the midterm starts in 2027 or maybe a bit later, that's something that we still have to see that's 2 years from now, so do not give exact guidance on that one. I can't comment on 2026 -- sorry, on 2027 more precisely. But I think the most important information is high one single-digit margin in 2026, not double digit, and then we take it from there. And as of 2028, the positive effects from our strategic realignment will start to kick in. Unknown Attendee: Okay. And 18% is within reach in some point in the future? Or is it no longer reachable? Jochen Breckner: Yes. I mean I just said that we communicated that our ambition is to have a return on sales in the midterm between 10% to 15%. That's a way to go. We have taken the decisions to get there and higher margins would have been even higher than the 10% to 15%. So from today's perspective, I would not confirm a target of 18%. That's why we communicated a range of 10% to 15%. Unknown Executive: And as a surprising factor, Jose, you had been quite tenacious patient and weighted in the queue right to the end. This is a sports company that is incentivizing this passion. So that was last in a row is Jose of JPMorgan Jochen Breckner: Jose, great to hear you, looking forward to your question. Jose Asumendi: Thank you so much and thank you very much for the opportunity, and apologies to yes, coming the last one here. Simple question, please. As we think about the next 6 months, 12 months, medium term, but a bit more like in '26. I'm sure you're launching new vehicles, right? So which vehicles do you think will drive the momentum in '26? When do you expect Cayenne electric to start helping a bit P&L in that sense. Jochen Breckner: Yes. From a model availability perspective, Jose, I've already commented on the fact that the 982, the Boxster Cayman is in the runout phase, also the H1 ICE car is still available in some markets out of the -- outside of the European Union in 2026, but that car is also starting its runout phase, but that will take a bit longer than with the Boxster and Cayman. A positive momentum we can expect from the completely newly developed full electric Cayenne, what we call internally the Cayenne E4 that car is about to be launched in 2026. And that's in addition to the existing Cayenne lineup. So we expect that we will gain some market share in the Cayenne segment then given the fact that we have the ICE plug-in hybrids and also electric cars. On top of that, we've just launched the very important derivative, the icon in the icon model line. I'm talking about the 911 Turbo S in the 911 model line in the Munich Auto Fair,and that car will be available by the end of this year and, therefore, will give us tailwinds, especially when it comes to margin and also brand and company positioning in 2026. And given all these effects, maybe also combined with a weaker demand in China that we expect will put us in a position to reach the 1-digit profitability margin I've just talked about. And Yes, that's how we look at 2026 from portfolio and also sales unit perspective. Sebastian Rudolph: And with this -- both of us say thank you to Bjorn. And for myself, I say thank you to Bjorn as well. And for your colleagues from the media and also analysts and investors for the joint call. Have a good weekend, and see you. Bye-bye. Jochen Breckner: Thank you, everyone, for joining. Thanks for your questions. Talk soon. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, the conference has now concluded, and you may disconnect. Thank you for joining, and have a pleasant day. Goodbye.
Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, thank you for standing by. My name is Colby, and I will be your conference operator today. At this time, I would like to welcome you to the WSFS Financial Corporation Third Quarter Earnings Call. [Operator Instructions] I'd now like to turn the call over to your host today to Mr. David Burg, Chief Financial Officer. Sir, you may begin. David Burg: Great. Thank you very much, and good afternoon, everyone, and thank you for joining our third quarter 2025 earnings call. Our earnings release and earnings release supplement, which we will refer to on today's call, can be found in the Investor Relations section of our company website. With me on this call are Rodger Levenson, Chairman, President and CEO; and Art Bacci, Chief Operating Officer. Prior to reviewing our financial results, I would like to read our safe harbor statement. Our discussion today will include information about our management's view of future expectations, plans and prospects that constitute forward-looking statements. Actual results may differ materially from historical results or those indicated by these forward-looking statements due to risks and uncertainties, including, but not limited to, the risk factors included in the annual report on Form 10-K and our most recent quarterly reports on Form 10-Q as well as other documents we periodically file with the SEC. All comments made during today's call are subject to the safe harbor statement. I will now turn to our financial results. During the third quarter, WSFS continued to demonstrate the strength of our franchise and diverse business model. The company delivered a core EPS of $1.40, core return on assets of 1.48% and core return on tangible common equity of 18.7%, which are all up versus the second quarter. On a year-over-year basis, core net income increased 21%, core PPNR grew 6% and core earnings per share increased 30%. In addition, our tangible book value per share increased by 12%. Net interest margin expanded 2 basis points to 3.91% quarter-over-quarter. This reflects a reduction in total funding cost of 2 basis points with a deposit beta of 37%. Given the September rate cut, our exit beta for September is 43%, which reflects the repricing actions taken after the rate cut. Net interest margin for the quarter benefited from an interest recovery from a previously nonperforming loan, which added about 4 basis points. Core fee revenue was flat quarter-over-quarter as our results were impacted by 2 previously announced strategic exits in Wealth and Trust as well as the Spring EQ earn-out from last quarter. Excluding these items, core fee revenue grew 5% quarter-over-quarter, primarily driven by Capital Markets and Cash Connect. Our Wealth and Trust business continues to perform very well and grew 13% year-over-year. Total client deposits increased 1% linked quarter, driven by commercial business. On a year-over-year basis, client deposits grew 5%, driven by growth across consumer, commercial, wealth and trust. Importantly, noninterest deposits grew 12% year-over-year and continue to represent over 30% of our total client deposits. Loans were down 1% linked quarter, driven by the previously announced sale of the Upstart loan portfolio and continued runoff in our Spring EQ portfolio. Excluding these items, loans were generally flat this quarter, but we saw solid momentum in several areas. Our residential mortgage and WSFS originated consumer loan portfolios, both delivered strong growth with linked quarter increases of 5% and 3%, respectively. These results reflect the momentum of our home lending business as well as the learnings obtained from our partnership with Spring EQ. In commercial, new fundings this quarter were offset by lower line utilization and the payoff of problem loans, which supported improvements in our asset quality. Importantly, our commercial pipeline remains strong across both C&I and commercial real estate, increasing to approximately $300 million. We saw a meaningful improvement across our asset quality metrics during the quarter. Total net credit costs were $8.4 million this quarter, down $5.9 million compared to the prior quarter. Net charge-offs were 30 basis points for the quarter and 21 basis points when excluding NewLane. Importantly, we saw a decline in problem assets, delinquencies and nonperforming assets this quarter. NPAs declined by over 30% to 35 basis points, driven by 2 large payoffs with no additional losses, while delinquencies declined by 34%. In each of these areas, we are now at or below the lowest level in the past year. During the third quarter, WSFS returned $56.3 million of capital including buybacks of $46.8 million or 1.5% of our outstanding shares. Year-to-date, we have repurchased 5.8% of our outstanding shares. Despite these higher levels of repurchase, our capital position remains very strong with a CET1 of 14.39%, well in excess of our medium-term operating target of 12%. We intend to maintain an elevated level of buybacks in line with our previously communicated glide path towards our capital target of 12%. While retaining discretion to adjust the pace of these buybacks based on the macro environment, our business performance and potential investment opportunities. These results position us well to meet our previously announced full year outlook, even with an additional October rate cut, which was not previously included in our assumptions. While the half and timing of future rate cuts remains uncertain. It's important to note that the impact of additional rate cuts on our financial results will not be linear as we continue to manage our margins through deposit repricing our hedge program and securities portfolio strategy. As we have done in the past, we will provide a full year '26 outlook in January with the release of our fourth quarter 2025 financial results. We remain excited about the future and committed to continue to deliver high performance. Thank you, and we'll now open the line for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Your first question comes from the line of Russell Gunther from Stephens Inc. Russell Elliott Gunther: I wanted to start kind of with the bigger picture question, David, and you kind of touched on it towards the end of your prepared remarks. But that medium-term target on CET1 challenging to hit, given just how much money you guys make. So it would be helpful to get a sense just kind of big picture in your mind, what's your base case scenario to achieving that target? And sort of what does that assume for organic growth rates over the next couple of years, acquisitive growth, be it depositories or fee verticals? And then you mentioned potentially flexing the buyback at a more accelerated clip. Just your base case to get there would be helpful to start. David Burg: Yes. Yes, absolutely, Russell. So yes, look, as you've seen this year, we are buying back at a clip that's significantly ahead of both the last couple of years. We're buying back approximately 100% of our net income. Given some of the balance sheet dynamics, the sale of the Upstart portfolio, for example, the runoff in some of the partnership portfolios our RWA has not increased, and therefore, our capital levels, despite these buybacks, our capital levels are still very high and actually increased since the beginning of the year. So that's the dynamic. And as well as the profitability levels that you mentioned, we do generate a lot of capital. So I think that if you look forward, even with a robust growth rate on our balance sheet, we still have a lot of dry powder to execute the buybacks at or above the level of 100% of our net income for a couple of years, for 2 to 3 years. And so that's really the strategic intention that we have. And depending on what happens with the balance sheet, we may accelerate that path. So I can completely see us leaning in more and doing even in excess of our net income on the buyback side. And obviously, as you said, we look at -- we continuously evaluate different investment opportunities. The first priority and the preference is always to invest the capital in the business where those accretive opportunities exist. But after that, we would look to return. Russell Elliott Gunther: Okay. Got it. And then just second question for me. So asset quality resolution and trends were really constructive this quarter. You guys have a healthy reserve and we just talked about the healthy CET1 for that matter. So I guess how are you thinking about reserve levels here amid what is still a somewhat volatile macro? And then could you share particular sectors of your loan portfolio where you continue to keep closer incremental eye? David Burg: Yes. I think on asset quality, generally, as you've seen in our numbers, we have good momentum and good progress. I think -- I would say a couple of things. I think, first and foremost, with respect to asset quality, one of the things that we try to do, obviously, is disciplined originations. It starts there, and we try to have recourse for most of our lending, vast majority of it and those type of actions to make sure we have good underwriting. And then we also try to be proactive around engagement with clients should things -- should there be unexpected bumps and bruises. We try -- we have a very kind of long forward-looking pipeline. We stress our portfolio for higher rates and with our issues -- where we think there are issues at maturity, we try to engage very early and proactively with our clients. And that's been the key to working through our pipeline and some of the migration that you've seen and the favorable trends that you've seen. And so I think commercial is always going to be lumpy and there may be 1 or 2 uneven situations. But generally, we feel good about our portfolio, and we feel good about continuing to make progress on resolving and working through the remaining NPAs. The consumer asset quality has been very strong, both within our home lending business and within the Spring portfolio. So we feel good about the trends, and we feel good about continuing to make progress. In terms of our reserve, I would say that we -- it's -- when you look at the pure -- when you look at the pure macro data that goes into the model, it would suggest that we have the capacity to release some reserves. But we have conservatively made some qualitative offsets where we see still potential volatility in the macro economy to keep that reserve where it is. So I think that's purely a function of all the volatility that we see with rates, potential inflation, some of the labor weakness and us being an erring more on the conservative side. So hopefully, that covers the question, but please let me know if I missed something. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Kelly Motta from KBW. Your next question comes from the line of Christopher Marinac from Janney Montgomery Scott. Christopher Marinac: I wanted to dig in further to the Wealth and Trust business lines and just understand a little bit more about the future growth in terms of new accounts being opened versus just doing more business with existing accounts. I know you called a little bit of that out on the Bryn Mawr Trust, but I wanted to do more on the other pieces. David Burg: Sure. Chris, thanks for the question. So as you know, our wealth business is a pretty diverse business. And there are really 3 business lines within that business. There's the institutional services, there's the Bryn Mawr Trust of Delaware and then the private wealth management. And also about 60% of the revenue in that business is really not AUM-based revenue, not tied to AUM, but really tied to new accounts and tied to transaction activity. And so we've seen the places where we've seen a lot of new activity growth, new clients, new accounts have been both on the institutional services side and the BMT of Delaware side. When you look at year-over-year, institutional services is up about 30% this quarter, when you -- and BMT of Delaware is up about 20% this quarter. And so we're seeing growth in new accounts and transactions with existing clients. We're seeing a lot of activity there. Arthur Bacci: Chris, this is Art. I would tell you on a few things. I mean, the institutional services team just came back from the ABS East conference in Miami this week, and they're jazzed. I mean our reputation and our quality of service is really being recognized in the marketplace. There's been comments about deterioration in service with some other trustees. And so we are continuing to see a very robust pipeline with new clients and actually becoming the preferred provider for many clients. On the BMT of Delaware side, similar thing. We've seen a recent bank acquisition that one of the subsidiaries was a Delaware Trust, and we're seeing clients starting to leave that and coming to us. We're seeing opportunities on the international side of that business. So that team is really continuing to look to grow its business. And then on the private wealth management side, we've kind of got past the Commonwealth divestiture, if you will. And the last 2 months have been net client cash flow positive, and we're starting to see very good referrals from commercial. We're also really honing in on COIs and really trying to focus on getting more business from some of our COIs. So I think all in all, we have a really positive outlook going into 2026 with our Wealth and Trust businesses. Christopher Marinac: Great. And I guess, just to extend one more thought. You have operating leverage on all ends of the company, but is the operating leverage greater in the wealth space where you can create more earnings from that versus the bank operation? David Burg: Yes. I think the -- one of the things that goes to the diversity of the business model, when you look at our profit margins in the wealth business, I would say they're higher than the traditional profit margins that you may see in other wealth businesses. And it's really -- it really goes to that model. We do have a lot of operating leverage and a lot of opportunity for scale there for sure, particularly institutional services in BMT of Delaware. So I definitely would echo that comment. Arthur Bacci: And I think you can see it in our deposit base that comes out of the trust business because that's large deposits. They're not using our branch network. They're not using ATMs. It's a very scalable business for us. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Janet Lee from TD Bank. Sun Young Lee: On Cash Connect business, as rates -- if rates were to come down, I would expect the revenue to get compressed, but then I believe that the funding side of it could offset. In terms of the NII benefit coming from the Cash Connect, how do you guys forecast in terms of the potential financial benefit coming from Cash Connect increasing? Or is it more compressed? David Burg: Yes. Yes, Janet, Happy to answer that. So I would say a couple of things on Cash Connect. One, I think the way you described it is exactly right. The Cash Connect revenue, the pricing is tied to interest rates. And so as interest rates come down, we would expect a reduction in our fee revenue in Cash Connect, but that will be more than offset in a reduction in expenses. And so basically, from a profitability perspective, we do benefit from rates coming down. And you can think of it as roughly for every 25 basis points, about a $300,000 kind of pretax profitability benefit. So that's -- as we've seen that play out over the last couple of cuts. And as we have the cuts, September is really not in the numbers yet, but as we have September, potentially the cut next week in December, all of those will flow in into the beginning of next year. I would say that's one dynamic with Cash Connect and we'll drive towards increasing profitability. The other thing which is if you look at our segment reporting and Cash Connect, one of the things we've been talking about is increasing the profit margins in that business in general. And that's not just because of rates but also because of pricing leverage that we think we have in the market, given our market share, that's also on the expense and efficiency side. So there are a few different levers to that. And that's been playing out nicely so far. If you look at year-over-year, the profit margin in that business was about a little bit under 6%. And this year, we're over 10%. Last quarter, it's important to note that there was an insurance recovery last quarter, which -- so the margins look a bit elevated. But if you normalize for that, last quarter was about 8%. So we went from kind of 6% to 8% to 10% on that trajectory that we were looking for, and that's -- so we're executing against that strategy. Arthur Bacci: And Janet, just as a reminder, the way we account for the bailment business, the benefit that David is talking about won't necessarily flow through NII. It's a combination of fee income and noninterest expense. Sun Young Lee: And just on -- so you maintain your low single digit, all guidance including the low single-digit commercial loan growth for the year. So that includes the problem loan payoff that you experienced in the quarter? And also, could you help us size the -- or size the pace of the payoffs coming from the consumer partnership going forward? Should it decelerate from the current like $140 million levels? How should I think about the total impact of the payments and the trajectory there? David Burg: Yes, yes. So Janet, let me take the consumer first and then I'll circle back around to the commercial question. On the consumer side, we had 2 things happened this quarter, and it's important to separate them. One was we closed the sale of the Upstart portfolio. And that was about $85 million that came off our balance sheet at the beginning of the quarter. As you know, that was a nonstrategic portfolio that was in runoff it had some elevated net charge-offs. And so we made the strategic decision to exit that portfolio, and we're also able to release some reserves based on that transaction. So that's the Upstart portfolio. Beyond that, the remaining runoff that you see is really in the Spring EQ portfolio, and that runoff for the quarter was about $50 million. And so that's the pace more or less that we would expect comes somewhere in the $15 million to $17 million per month is what we would expect in that runoff of Spring EQ. So we expect that to continue. However, we -- one of the -- I think one of the areas where we've been leaning into and we think we have -- we've had good momentum and we think we have continued momentum is in our Home Lending business, which is our mortgage business and our WSFS originated consumer loans, which are primarily HELOC, lines of credit and installment loans. And we've had really annualized double-digit growth for a few quarters there. And that's really more than offsetting kind of the Spring EQ runoff that you see. So we think we have -- we think positively about that growth continuing. We think we have some differentiated origination capabilities in that mortgage business, we've been growing our origination officers. And so we feel good about leaning in to that area. So that's on the residential side, on the consumer side, rather. On the commercial side, this quarter, as you said, this quarter was really impacted by a couple of things. One was the work, the payoff of the problem loans which obviously is a good thing. We like to see that, and that supports our asset quality improvement. We also saw line utilization being down this quarter. That's kind of a bit of a volatile number. That moves up and down. There's some of the economic uncertainty plays into that. But generally, that's just a function of kind of business activity. But generally, if you kind of separate that. We feel -- we continue to feel good about our pipeline altogether across the board, including C&I. I would say we're focused on definitely making accretive and profitable originations. There's a lot of competition in C&I. We don't want to be the low -- we're not the low price point in the market. We want to be very thoughtful around profitability. We want to be very thoughtful about underwriting. But having said that, we feel very good about our pipeline. Our pipeline now is at a higher level than it's been in a number of quarters at about $300 million in total. So we feel good about our pipeline. And I would also add that we are continuing to win talent in the market, which gives us a lot of confidence. For example, we had -- we recently announced a new Philadelphia Market President who was the Market President for one of the major super regional banks in the area for Philadelphia. And so I think winning talent like that gives us confidence, and I think demonstrates the confidence that others have in the franchise as well. So yes, we feel good about -- it's hard to predict quarter-over-quarter, but we feel good about being able to grow that business and continue to lean in to C&I, and that's really the relationship engine that we want to anchor to. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Kelly Motta from KBW. Kelly Motta: Sorry about the technical difficulties -- maybe just piggybacking where you left off last. You noted recruitment of [ Philadelphia ] Market President. Clearly, organic growth is a focus. Where -- are there other areas where you're looking to add talent where you think there's room to bolster up either in terms of product line, wealth or the core bank or parts of the geography that look like attractive growth opportunities and places where you could add some folks? David Burg: Yes. The answer is yes. So we're -- just like I mentioned, the commercial example. We have other relationship managers joining the commercial team. That continues to be an area that we're looking to continue to increase. And so that is an area of focus as well as the wealth business. That's been an area of focus all along. We've had some very successful lift-outs of teams in the last 12 to 18 months there that are really starting to bear fruit and play out the thesis, but that's another area where we're continuously looking at talent, both from a lift-out perspective as well as we look at potential RA acquisitions that we've done in the past. And so we continuously evaluate talent across our footprint. And we think we have a lot of opportunity there. And Art mentioned earlier the referrals, but that's something that we really think is -- there's a significant amount of opportunity in the referral pipelines across our businesses. That's between wealth and commercial, it's between small business. It's between our home lending business and each of those. So there's really a lot of untapped potential there as well. Kelly Motta: Got it. That's helpful. And then maybe turning back to the margin. I apologize if I missed this, but you guys have done a really great job managing the margin, keeping an overall relatively level -- high level of margin and neutralizing some asset sensitivity. You get a couple of cuts here again this quarter. Do you think you have enough flex in the deposit base to absorb some of that? Or could there be some near-term pressure in that margin ahead? David Burg: Yes, Kelly, happy to go and to work through that a little bit. So I think there's -- I'll give you a short-term answer and a longer-term answer. From a shorter-term answer, we do have sensitivity in our net interest margin, as you mentioned. I would characterize that as about 3 basis points per 25 basis point rate cut. So that's really the near-term impact. So when you think about the net interest margin this quarter, we were at 3.91%. We had the one interest recovery. If you kind of normalize for that, we're in the high 3.80% and so with a couple of a few rate cuts that go into the fourth quarter, we would tick down to maybe about 3.80% around kind of in that ballpark. But the, I would say, the longer-term answer is that we have a number of tools that we use to offset that sensitivity after the initial impact in. The best evidence that I can give you of that is if you look at what's happened over the last year, where we've had 125 basis points of rate cuts, but our margins are up year-over-year over 10 basis points. And so that sensitivity that I mentioned of about 3 basis points per cut, will go to 1 to 2 basis points as we are able to take the actions that we take. And those actions are -- one is the deposit repricing that you mentioned. We continue to -- our exit beta for the quarter, the cut obviously happened at the end of September. But if you look at the exit beta at the end of the month, it was about 43% in the low 40s. We're going to run a similar playbook for the other cuts, and we think that we can be kind of in that low 40% beta for each of the upcoming cuts. That's #1. Two is we have, as you know, the hedging program, where we have floor options that mitigate and neutralize some of the asset sensitivity. We have about $850 million of those that are in the money right now. And with the next rate cut, another $250 million would come in the money. And if we have 3 more cuts you would have the entire $1.5 billion program actually in the money. So that would neutralize essentially $1.5 billion of variable rate loans and essentially neutralize that to look like fixed. So that's something that we continue to deploy. We're going to continue to utilize that program. throughout '26. We're thoughtful about maturities there and making sure that, that full $1.5 billion is going to be deployed. And the third thing, I would say that the third tool -- actually, 2 more things. The third tool that we've been using is obviously new to the extent that we've been growing new deposits, and we're able to reinvest it and you think about a steeper yield curve going forward, and you were able to originate those deposits and the low-cost deposits that we've been able to have and then reinvest them at the higher yields. That, of course, takes some time to play out, but that's a big supporter of the net interest margin. And the last thing that I will call out is our securities portfolio. As you know, our securities portfolio yields south of 2.5%. And it rolls off -- we have about $500 million of cash flow every year that comes off that securities portfolio that then we reinvest either into loans or potentially other securities. We reinvested and we pick up a lot of yield. There's 4 to 5 basis points of annual yield pickup from that rollover. So the combination of all of those things, that's what allowed us to really mitigate the impact more than what the kind of the paper math would suggest, and we'll continue to lean in and deploy those tools. Kelly Motta: Great. I really appreciate all the color on that. That's really helpful and it will be helpful to go back to just one point of tying up loose ends of clarification. Just can you remind me how much floating rate loans you have and maybe index deposits just to help manage our margin with that component? David Burg: Yes. So our floating rate loans -- our floating rate loans are a little bit over 50%. And so our loan beta is about 50%. But when you incorporate the hedges, the loan beta drops to a little bit over 40% -- so -- and that's really -- and so when you think about our deposit beta in that range as well, that's really -- that's how we try to neutralize the portfolio. That's how we think about it. So -- and on the deposit side, we -- as you know, we have the CD book, which is the time maturities that -- most of that CD book is in kind of the 6 months with a little bit of 11 months. And so that kind of matures on its cycle. The other deposits are mostly non-indexed. We have about $700 million to $800 million of kind of indexed deposits. Operator: And with no further questions in queue, I would like to turn the conference back over to David Burg. David Burg: Okay. Thank you very much, everyone, for joining the call today. If you have any specific follow-up questions, please feel free to reach out to Investor Relations or me. Have a great day. Operator: This concludes today's conference call. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good day, everyone, and welcome to Kimberly-Clark de México Third Quarter 2025 Results. [Operator Instructions] Please note this call is being recorded, and I will be standing by. It is now my pleasure to turn the conference over to CEO, Pablo González. Please go ahead. Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Hello, everyone. I hope you're doing well, and thanks for participating on the call. We'll go straight to results, and then we'll make some brief comments about the quarter and our expectations going forward. Xavier? Xavier Cortés Lascurain: Thank you. Good morning, everyone. Results for the quarter were better, with net sales growing and gross and operating profits recovering. During the quarter, our sales were MXN 13.4 billion, a 2% increase versus last year. Hard rolled sales impacted total volume, which was flat and price/mix was up 2%. Consumer Products grew 5%, 1% volume and 4% price/mix, while Away from Home remained flat. Exports were down 15%, impacted by a 32% decrease in hard rolled sales, while finished products grew 7%. Cost of goods sold increased 3%. Against last year, SAM, resins and virgin fibers were favorable. Recycled fibers were mixed, while fluff compared negatively. The FX was slightly lower, averaging 1% less. During the quarter, our cost of goods sold reflected the higher prices of raw materials from prior months and very significantly, the much higher FX, including the hedges as those trickled down the inventory layers. Our cost reduction program once again had very good results and yielded approximately MXN 500 million of savings in the quarter. These savings are mainly at the cost of goods sold level and are generated by sourcing, materials improvement and process efficiencies. Gross profit was flat and margin was 38.7% for the quarter. SG&A expenses were 4% higher year-over-year and as a percentage of sales, were up 30 basis points as we continue to invest behind our brands. Operating profit decreased 4% and the operating margin was 21.3%. We generated MXN 3.4 billion of EBITDA, a 3% decrease, but within our long-term margin range at 25%. As mentioned, the benefits of better raw material prices and a stronger peso take time to show up on the actual cost of goods sold, due not only to inventories, but also to contract transit time and particularly in this case, the currency hedges. Having said that, our gross margin did improve 50 basis points sequentially from the second quarter to the third quarter. That improvement does not go down to the operating profit or EBITDA level because the SG&A remained constant and was, therefore, higher as a percentage of sales because the third quarter sales are traditionally lower than the second quarter sales. Cost of financing was MXN 404 million in the third quarter compared to MXN 287 million in the same period last year. Net interest expense was higher at MXN 401 million versus MXN 290 million last year, despite our lower gross debt because we earned less on our cash investments. During the quarter, we had a MXN 3 million FX loss, which compares to a MXN 4 million gain last year. Net income for the quarter was MXN 1.7 billion with earnings per share of [ MXN 0.56. ] We maintain a very strong and healthy balance sheet. Cash position as of September 30 was MXN 11 billion. We have no debt maturing for the rest of the year and maturities for the coming years are very comfortable. Net debt-to-EBITDA ratio is 1x and EBITDA to net interest coverage is 10x. Over the last 12 months, we have repurchased close to 50 million shares, around 1.5% of shares outstanding, which brings the total payout to shareholders to approximately 7%. And with that, I turn it back to Pablo. Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: So we continue to operate against a soft consumer backdrop, but we managed to increase sales and post EBITDA margin within the target range. Growth in Consumer Products was significantly better supported by innovations and commercial initiatives, together with a strategic decision to reduce spending during the heavy summer promotional season to protect the value of our brands as well as reduce the negative price effects. Volume was slightly ahead of last year, an important improvement, but consumers remain stretched and cautious given the increased uncertainty, job growth deceleration, remittances slowdown and overall lack of economic growth. We see no significant catalyst for this to change in the short term and are strengthening strategies accordingly. Still more relevant and differentiated innovation, more effective engagement with consumers efficient execution hand-in-hand with our clients, and importantly, relentless focus on our most important opportunities by category, channel and brands will guide all our actions. In a market that's not growing much, gaining share and playing in areas where we haven't participated at least not aggressively, will be key to accelerate our growth. We look forward to sharing more details on the strategies as we get into 2026. The same holds true for Away from Home business, and we expect exports of finished products to continue to grow and accelerate in the coming years, behind a concerted effort with our partner, Kimberly-Clark Corporation. With respect to costs, we have yet to see the full effect of lower input prices on results and lower sequential volumes typical of the third quarter meant we had weaker operating leverage. Despite these headwinds, margins remain strong. As we get into the final stretch of the year and particularly into next year, we will see lower costs reflected in our numbers. We expect lower pulp prices, stable recycled fibers, lower resins and superabsorbent materials plus a stronger peso to be tailwinds going forward. In summary, our results continue to improve. And despite an expected continued weak consumer environment, we're executing strategies that will translate into stronger results in 2026 and the years to come. With that, let's turn to your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We'll take our first question from Ben Theurer with Barclays. Benjamin Theurer: Congrats on the results despite the challenging environment. So I wanted to follow up a little bit on just the consumer sentiment and what you've been seeing across the different categories. So maybe help us understand and kind of like getting a bit closer into that 4% price/mix change. How are you able to kind of like implement that and at the same time, actually get about a 1% volume growth, just given the consumer is weak, but it felt like a very good execution on price mix with volume growth. So that would be my first question. Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Sure, thanks for the question. Look, as I mentioned, we see a stretched consumer. And this is [ not news of ] uncertainty. And as I mentioned, job growth has decelerated, remittances have slowed down. I mean overall, the economy is pretty slow and consumers' sentiment is not at its best, if you will. So consumers are being very careful in how they are spending. We do see a fork, if you will, with consumers that continue to spend on premium products, but there are those who are trending down from value to economy products, not at a very marked rate, but there's certainly something happening there given the -- how the consumer is stretched. So the way we were able to put all of this together -- and let me say, by the way, the growth in our categories is pretty muted. Some of them, the categories that don't have such high penetration like kitchen towels and others are growing at higher rates. But even those the rates have slowed down a little bit. And the more, if you will, mature categories are flat or slightly growing when it comes to volume. So what we did is, one, Remember, we decided not to play as aggressively on the summer promotional season. Because what we were seeing over the past couple of years is that when you did that, the price would take a hit not only within the promotional season, but then beyond that, because consumers ended up with some inventory on their hands. So then it was a little harder to move volumes forth. So we were very careful on how we manage that, and I think we were successful in doing so. Plus the fact that we are through our revenue management -- revenue growth management capabilities found certain instances where we could adjust pricing and move forth. So that's how we were able to keep prices going and then volume really helped because of innovation and all of our commercial activities during the third quarter. So it was really a combination of executing on price and innovations that allowed us to put together both growth in price and for the first quarter in the year, growth in volume. Benjamin Theurer: Okay. And then just one quick follow-up. You've called out the softer hard roll sales volume. Was there a technical issue? Is it a demand issue on the export side? What's been driving that? Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Really, I think what's happening there is that there's a lot of supply of hard rolls in the U.S., a combination of companies with excess capacity sending it to the U.S. and then maybe a little bit of companies buying before some of the tariffs came into effect. So there's paper out there that I think the system is going through. And hopefully, that will become more normalized, if you will, in the fourth quarter, certainly, I think by the first quarter of next year. But overall, just oversupply in the market of hard rolls in the U.S. Operator: We will move next with Bob Ford with Bank of America. Robert Ford: Pablo, I also was impressed by the growth in consumer given your intent to stay away from some of the summer promotions. Can you give some examples maybe of some of the more successful innovation and execution of efforts that are enabling you to improve pricing and take share? And with respect to the export mix between hard rolls and finished products, can you give us a sense both in volume and value in terms of the breakdown of those exports? And then how should we think about current capacity utilization rates for both pulp and finished product? Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Thanks, Bob. Thanks for your question. Yes. Look, I mean, when it comes to innovation, as I mentioned earlier in the year, we have strong innovations for all of our categories throughout the year. And by the way, we have a very, very strong pipeline for the coming years. So we're very excited about that. And a couple of particular examples are on the diaper front, where we pretty much improved on every single tier of our offerings. And when you take a look at our shares, we're -- even though the categories, as I said, pretty flat, we're gaining share in pretty much all of the channels given the -- all of the channels and all of the tiers, given the innovations that we were able to put into the market. And again, those have to do with better observancy core, better fit, better stretch, better softness. So depending on the tier, again, we improved every single one of them, and that's a category where we see our shares improving nicely. Also, for example, in bathroom tissue in the premium tier, where we've introduced a couple of new features and new sub-brands under Kleenex, Cottonelle, and we're absolutely convinced we have the best product in market and products that can compete with products anywhere in the world. and they've been very, very well received by consumers. And as well, we also made some innovations to our economic product, particularly Vogue in the -- or [ Vogue ] in the wholesale channel, and we've been able to gain ground with that product consistently and significantly. So again, innovation at the core of everything we do and very, very excited with what we see for the coming years when it comes to innovation. With respect to the breakdown of our exports, I mean, hard roll sales represent 46% of the sales and finished product, 54%. And hard rolls, as I mentioned, hopefully, volumes will stabilize here in the coming quarters, and we expect that to continue to be -- hopefully, be a tailwind and if not, certainly not a headwind going forward. And on the finished product, we're excited. I mean we've had a couple of meetings with our partner, and we're looking at opportunities in the coming years to further integrate our supply chain. We've done a good job here in the past couple of years, but many more things that we can do, and we're working very closely together to make that happen, and we're excited with the opportunities we see for it. And as we move and are able to turn more of our capacity into finished product, then certainly, our hard roll sales will decline accordingly because, as you know, what we do is our excess capacity is what we turn into hard rolled sales and sell outside. So as this plans with our partner materialize, a little by little, we'll start to see lower hard roll sales, but finished product sales increase hopefully significantly. Robert Ford: And that was actually the idea behind the question on capacity utilization is we agree. We see this massive opportunity in exports of finished product. And as a result, we're a little curious in terms of where you are right now in terms of capacity utilization, both for pulp? And then how should we think about where you are today on finished product and we can make some estimates in terms of what you need to add. Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Yes. And it's a great question, Bob, and we -- let me put it this way. We have enough capacity to grow on finished products aggressively together with our partner in the coming years. And not only what we're producing right now, but we're putting plans together so that we can get more throughput through our equipment or through our machines. So we will be able to support growth with them. And I think we will still continue to be able to put a decent amount of hard roll sales out there in the U.S. So I think the combination over the coming years will certainly be a support our growth and support our margins going forward. Operator: Our next question comes from Alejandro Fuchs with Itau. Alejandro Fuchs: I have 2 very quick ones. Pablo, maybe I want to see if you can discuss a little bit about competition, right? How do you see competition today in Mexico, given the increase in price and sales mix, are maybe the competitors following? Are they being more aggressive promotionally? And if you can also discuss maybe your expectations into next year, hopefully, with a better consumer environment in the country. Maybe you can talk us about what do you expect going forward? Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Sure, Alejandro. Look, when it comes to competition, I mean, you know our categories have always been very competitive. And we maybe are seeing a little bit more from some participants, not all when it comes to their promotional aggressiveness. I wouldn't say it's something that it's radically different, but a little bit more as, again, the pie is not growing, some are losing share. So they're trying to recoup some of that and are being a little bit more aggressive on it. But not -- again, not something that it's too surprising or too different from other instances. And the fact also that our retailers are, one, continuing to keep inventories and overall working capital under control, they're putting a lot of pressure on that. And two, trying to keep prices, it seems to me a little bit more consistent. I mean that helps in terms of the aggressiveness of promotions not being even more so that it could have been in other instances when the economy is not growing. So a little bit more, but really nothing marked, if you will. Coming into next year, I mean, we hope that a lot of the -- or at least some of the uncertainty that is hanging over the economy can be resolved or at least we get a clear direction as to where it's going. Certainly, the uncertainty that's coming from the USMCA revision or renegotiation and what will happen with that. I mean, you've heard -- we've heard that in a couple of weeks, we'll be hearing from our government as to some of the agreements they've come to with the U.S. administration. So hopefully, that will start to settle down, and we'll know a little bit better where it heads. Hopefully, as we get into the first -- or the workings of the judicial reform, we start to see how it how it works, and we start to see some decisions that support, again, giving more certainty to investment. And again, just hopefully, some of this uncertainties start to play out and we start to get a better sense of what's going on. We know then what to expect. And if that happens, I think the economy will be able to start growing again at a faster clip, maybe come back to what we were doing before all of this uncertainty, about a 1.5%, 2% rate, which at this stands would be pretty good. Not what we need certainly as a country. I mean, we really should be working hard to take all of the obstacles away from investments so that we can start growing at 3% or higher rates, but that's going to take some time and uncertainty is key for that certainty. So that will hopefully play out by '27, but at least by '26, if we can get some uncertainty out, we'll see greater economic growth and then we might see a consumer that feels a little bit better about things and then domestic consumption can start to pick up again. That's our expectation. But let's see how quickly we can -- how quickly it unravels and happens. Operator: Our next question comes from Renata Cabral with Citibank. Renata Fonseca Cabral Sturani: Congrats on the results. So my first question is still about the consumption environment, but specifically to understand if consumers are making the trade downs and if you see a bigger penetration of private label in the categories that the company has? And the second question is related to cost. In the initial remarks, I understood that the company expects that the raw material prices should maintain for the upcoming months. I would like just to confirm if that's the view. And for the fourth quarter, if the company has any hedges or the effects? Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: I hope I can answer your questions. You were not coming through too clearly, but if I don't, please let me know. Again, when it comes to consumers, we're seeing a divergence. Those that buy premium products continue to do so. Those consumers that are used to buy either value or economy products, we see a little bit of trade down to the economy segment. not a big trade down, but a little bit of trade down given how stretched they are. And tied to that, we are also seeing growth in penetration of private labels in the country. And it's a combination of the economic situation and retailers being a little bit more aggressive when it comes to pushing their private label. When it comes to costs, again, we already have seen in our purchases lower costs of most of our raw materials, excluding fluff. And that's just taking a little bit of time to reflect on our cost of goods sold, but we expect that to continue to -- start to happen certainly in the fourth quarter. And no doubt early in 2026. And our expectations for costs in the 2026 is that we will come in with, again, most of them on a downward trend and that will certainly be tailwinds for our cost together with the exchange rate, which will compare very favorably in the first half of the year. So that should be very, very helpful going forward. And when it comes to hedges, no, we have no more hedges during this quarter, and we don't expect to hedge going forward. Operator: We will move next with Antonio Hernandez with Actinver. Antonio Hernandez: Just following up on [ Renata's ] question, should we expect given that because of the tailwinds from FX and maybe raw materials and so on, that maybe EBITDA margin, at least in the short term has already hit rock bottom. Is that like you see basically upside on going forward? Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Yes, absolutely. And it's interesting how you put it rock bottom when it's 25%, and it's still one of the best EBITDA margins out there for any Consumer Products company in the world. But yes, we probably have hit rock bottom. And going forward, we should expect better margins, no doubt. Antonio Hernandez: Exactly. Yes. I mean, rock bottom considering the 25% to 27%. Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: I understand. I just -- quite frankly, I just used it to make a point, sorry. Antonio Hernandez: Exactly. It's all relative in the end, but yes, pretty good margins. Just a quick follow-up. In terms of innovation and how you're also treating these consumers that are willing to buy these premium products. Maybe if you could provide any color on how much do they represent or innovation in terms of sales? Anything like that would be helpful. Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Look, I think most of our growth really is coming from products that -- where we've innovated. And again, we're very, very excited with what we've done, but even more so with what we have coming. And early in 2026, we hope to share a little bit more of our strategies when it comes to areas -- main areas of focus and opportunities by category, channel and brands and also the -- what we see would be some of the very exciting innovations that we're going to be putting into the market. So let's hold on that until the first quarter of '26, and we'll be able to provide you more insight and details into what it's done and how we expect it to contribute to our growth going forward. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We will move next with Jeronimo de Guzman with INCA Investments. Jeronimo de Guzman: Start with a follow-up on the cost side. You mentioned that there's no hedges impacting the fourth quarter, but I just wanted to understand how much did the FX hedges impact the third quarter? Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: I would probably say they did impact about 50% of our purchases for the second quarter and for the first part of the third quarter. So assuming that what we saw on the third quarter was mostly based on those purchases. You could say that approximately 50% of our dollar-denominated purchases were impacted by those hedges in the quarter. I don't know if that made sense. Jeronimo de Guzman: But only half -- but only for half of the third quarter... Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Yes, because of the -- no, I would say for the full quarter, about 50% of our U.S. dollar purchases, which are about 50% of our costs were hedged. Jeronimo de Guzman: Got it. Okay. And what was the average FX for those hedges? Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: [ 20 70 ] something. Jeronimo de Guzman: That will be a big improvement. And then just want to understand, given the much better cost outlook and the fact that these hedges are less of a headwind going forward or not a headwind going forward, how are you thinking about pricing going forward? Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Look, we continue to take a very close look at each category and each tier and each channel to see where there are opportunities for pricing because, yes, we see tailwinds when it comes to costs of raw materials. We see headwinds in other costs, for example, on labor costs, which have been increasing in Mexico for quite some years. And when you compound their impact over the years, it's becoming a little bit more impactful, if you will, and some other issues. And plus we want to continue to generate important margins and profit so that we can further invest behind our brands. So pricing will not be as maybe in the past where you would just [indiscernible] we're going to increase 4% in the diaper category in March and period. It's going to be more of a strategic analysis, again by tier, by channel, et cetera, to determine where the opportunities are together with a very important push behind mix for our brands given the innovation we have. And so we will continue to look for opportunities to price and opportunities to improve our mix going forward. Jeronimo de Guzman: Okay. Yes, that's helpful. So the 4% that you had this quarter year-on-year, how much of that was mix versus actual price changes? Or was it just less promotions versus a year ago, I guess, which is kind of a... Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: It was about half and half. It was about 2% price, 2% mix. Jeronimo de Guzman: Okay. Got it. Great. And just one other question on the competitive environment. I wanted to get your sense on market share trends in general, kind of where -- in what areas are you seeing maybe more pressure on the market share side and where you're seeing more more of the market share gains that you're having? Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Overall, I think we have a very stable market shares, maybe except on diapers, as I mentioned, we see that share growing. When you take a look at bathroom tissue, we're fairly stable. Napkins, we're growing share. kitchen towels, we're growing share. Wipes, we're growing a little bit on value, not on volume. But that's a category where we have lost a little bit of ground to not only private label, but a whole bunch of offerings coming from Asia and other parts of the world at very cheap prices. So we've got plans to attack there and recoup some of the share. And I would say about that, I mean, facial tissue is is flat at about 92%. I mean, our shares are pretty stable overall. Jeronimo de Guzman: Okay. Sorry, one more question on the new JV, the penetration, any updates on that? Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: On what, sorry? Jeronimo de Guzman: The new business, the pet, animal [indiscernible] Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Pet business. No, thanks for the question. Yes, we continue to make inroads. I mean we're getting cataloged in more retail chains and improving our reach within them. So getting more SKUs in there and getting into more stores. And again, the consumer reaction so far has been very, very good. The retail reaction has also been good. So right on track where we wanted to be, and hopefully, that will accelerate in 2026. Again, this is a long-term play, but we should be this -- we absolutely should see this business accelerate in 2026. Operator: We will move next with [ Miguel Ulloa ] with BBVA. Miguel Ulloa Suárez: It could be regarding the CapEx for next year and any changes in the repurchase program. Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Miguel, CapEx will remain very likely in the $120 million range. Could be a little bit more if some of the opportunities for exports capitalize, but nothing that would change significantly the capital allocation. For buybacks, this year, we will complete our EUR 1.5 billion program. Still too early to talk about next year. We will definitely have retained earnings from the net income this year to grow the dividend. And as usual, whatever we have left, we will devote to to buybacks. So that we'll have to see after we end the year. Miguel Ulloa Suárez: That's helpful. And just one, if I may, is regarding further investments or big investments in line for capacity in coming years? Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Right now, it doesn't look like we need to do anything beyond that 120 average CapEx. Again, if we see more opportunity, we could see a couple of years of ramp-up. And even if at some point, we need a tissue capacity, which at this point, it doesn't look like, but hopefully, that changes, then we would see a couple of years of 150, maybe somewhere around that. Again, nothing that should change significantly the capital allocation. Operator: And this concludes our Q&A session. I will now turn the call over to Pablo González closing remarks. Pablo Roberto González Guajardo: Thank you. Nothing else to say just thanks for participating in the call. I hope you all have a terrific weekend. And since this is our last call before the year-end, I know it's early, but I hope you all have happy holidays and a terrific New Year's and look forward to talking to you early in 2026. Thank you. Operator: And this does conclude today's program. Thank you for your participation. You may disconnect at any time.
Operator: Good day, everyone, and welcome to today's Fibra Danhos' Third Quarter 2025 Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note, this call is being recorded, and I'll be standing by should you need assistance. Now I'll turn the call over to your host, Rodrigo Martínez. Please go ahead. Rodrigo Chavez: Thank you very much, Alvis. Hello, everyone. I am Rodrigo Martinez, and I run Investor Relations for the company. At this time, I'd like to welcome everyone to Fibra Danhos' 2025 Third Quarter Conference Call. We issued our quarterly report yesterday. If you did not receive a copy, please do not hesitate and contact us. Please be aware that they are also available on our website and in Mexico Stock Exchange website. Before we begin the call today, I would like to remind you that forward-looking statements made during today's call do not account for future economic circumstances, industry conditions and company performance or financial results. These statements are subject to a number of risks and uncertainties. All figures included herein were prepared in according to IFRS standards and are stated in nominal Mexican pesos, unless otherwise noted. Joining us today from Fibra Danhos in Mexico City is Mr. Jorge Serrano, CFO of Fibra Danhos; and Mr. Elias Mizrahi. Now I will turn the call to Jorge Serrano for opening remarks and financial and operating indicators. Jorge, please go ahead. Jorge Esponda: Good morning, everyone. Thanks for joining us today. Let me share some initial remarks on Fibra Danhos' third quarter results. It has been only 2 years since we announced our interest in industrial assets and Danhos is already a reference player in the CTT logistics corridors that services Mexico City. We have been recognized for our execution capabilities and high-quality construction standards. We have not only delivered our commitments on time and within budget, but we are also working in new opportunities that will translate into profitable growth. During the quarter, we signed build-to-suit lease agreements for more than 300,000 square meters on 3 additional industrial parks with best-in-class tenants that will generate cash flow by the end of next year. This is very relevant. Not only because it will translate into profitable adjusted risk returns, but also because it reinforces our strategy of diversification in industrial real estate and complements our traditional growth strategy on mixed uses and high-quality real estate developments. Our CapEx pipeline is additionally confirmed by Parque Oaxaca and Ritz-Carlton Cancún Punta Nizuc project, which are under construction and up and running. Sound financial results were supported by strong fundamentals. Total revenues of MXN 1.9 billion were 14% higher against last year, explained by increased occupation levels, positive lease spreads, higher overage, parking adjusted revenues and contribution of industrial assets. Total expenses increased 10%, keeping control on operating and maintenance expenses and dealing with labor-intensive services that have posted major increases. NOI reached MXN 1.5 billion, an increase of almost 15% year-on-year with a 78.6% margin that is 75 basis points higher than last year's. AFFO reached MXN 1.1 billion that accounted for MXN 0.69 per CBFI. Distribution was determined at the same level of MXN 0.45 per CBFI which amounts to MXN 722 million and represents a payout relative to AFFO of 66%. Retained cash flow, as you know, was used to finance our CapEx program, which was complemented with MXN 300 million of short-term debt. Balance sheet, however, remains strong with only 13% [indiscernible]. Our portfolio overall occupancy continued growing and reached 91%, with retail occupancy reaching 94%, office at 76% and industrial of 100%. Thanks. We may now turn to the Q&A session. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question today comes from Alejandra Obregon of Morgan Stanley. Alejandra Obregon: The first one is on your CapEx and dividend payout. If you can perhaps provide some color on how to think of these 2 metrics in 2026 and 2027 as you move forward with Nizuc and Oaxaca. So that's the first question. And then the second one is in terms of your portfolio mix and perhaps if I'm allowed to think of it in a more long-term sort of way, maybe 3 or 5 years from here, how much do you expect industrial to represent of the mix in your portfolio and whether you see some recycling opportunities elsewhere. So how do you see your mix 3 or 5 years from here? That's the question. I'll stop here. Elías Mizrahi: Alejandra, this is Elias Mizrahi. Regarding distributions, so as you know, we've been investing very heavily on industrial assets. We're starting construction of Parque Oaxaca in the coming months. And obviously, we're also investing in the Nizuc project. So as long as we continue investing at this rhythm, we expect at least for 2026 for the dividend to remain the same. I think towards the end of next year, we'll probably have better color for 2027. But I think that this gives us the ability to reinvest our cash flows and give better returns for our long-term investors. Regarding the mix on our portfolio, I would say that we don't have a specific target on where we see or where we want to have the industrial assets as a percentage of our total portfolio. I think we're opportunistic. We will be looking at new development opportunities. And we're also investing in retail assets as well. So we don't expect only to grow in the industrial segment, but in all segments. So I think that more than targeting a mix, we'll be targeting solid projects with great risk-adjusted returns. Alejandra Obregon: Got it. And if I may follow up in terms of land and backlog, if you can talk about what you're seeing in the Mexico City and metropolitan area. Do you think there's more interest for you to continue growing here? And what -- and how does your land access look like from here? Elías Mizrahi: Yes. So first, I mean, we highlighted in our report and Jorge just mentioned the lease activity we had for the quarter. So we leased 300,000 square meters this quarter alone. We're very proud of that achievement. We already have 250,000 square meters operating and generating rent. And by year-end -- next year, we'll have more than 0.5 million square meters generating rent for the Fibra in basically 2 or 3 years since we basically announced the industrial component in our portfolio. So we continue to see strong demand. I think the market, as Jorge mentioned, welcomed Danhos, welcomed its development capacity and ability. And we're assembling land for future projects, which if we find the right land and the right opportunities, we will be able to develop them and continue growing. But we see the Mexico City market as strong and resilient for now. Operator: Our next question comes from Igor Machado of Goldman Sachs. Igor Machado: I have 2 questions here. And the first one is on the retail sales. So we saw some deceleration from department stores company. So any color that you could share with us like if you expect a retail deceleration for the next quarters, this would be helpful. And the second question is regarding the land for the industrial real estate assets. I'm just trying to better understand here who is selling the land and the terms of the selling. So that's it. Jorge Esponda: Igor, this is Jorge. Well, as you know, I mean, our retail portfolio has very positive occupation levels. I think we have a very strong tenant base. But it's true that we've seen some deceleration in the economy in consumption. However, we continue to have demand for our shopping centers. This is given the location we have. And that allows us to be quite defensive in a deceleration environment on the economy. So, so far, we're posting still very strong results in our retail portfolio. Operator: Our next question comes from [indiscernible] of JPMorgan. Unknown Analyst: Congrats on the results. My question is regarding any update on the office segment. Could you maybe walk us through how easy or hard it has been to renew the office properties? How sticky were these tenants with some minor decrease in the Toreo property? Elías Mizrahi: [indiscernible], I'm sorry, but there was some interference in the question. Can you repeat it, please? Unknown Analyst: Yes. My question was regarding the office segment. Maybe could you walk us through how easy or hard has it been to renew the office properties? And how sticky were these tenants? Elías Mizrahi: Yes. So at the beginning of the year, we had 2 major leases that -- actually this was pointed out, I think, in the fourth quarter of last year's or first quarter of this year's call. And both contracts were renewed. One was in Toreo, the other one was in Esmeralda. So in both cases, we were able to renew both big leases. And the smaller leases are also being renewed basically every quarter. So we're -- as we've mentioned, we're in the midst of keeping our tenants. Unknown Executive: [indiscernible] Elías Mizrahi: Yes. And leasing activity has picked up. In Urbitec, we leased this quarter 2,500 square meters. And also in [indiscernible] 3,500 square meters. So during the quarter, we leased approximately 7,000 square meters. Unknown Executive: [indiscernible] Operator: [Operator Instructions] Rodrigo, we have no questions at this time. I'll turn the program back over to you for any additional or closing comments. Rodrigo Chavez: Thank you very much, Alvis. Thank you, everyone, for joining us today. Please do not hesitate to contact us, Elias, Jorge or myself for any further questions. We are always available. We'll see you on our next conference call. Thank you very much. Operator: That concludes our meeting today. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good day, and welcome to the Xtract One Technologies Fiscal 2025 Fourth Quarter Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note this event is being recorded. I would now like to turn the conference over to Chris Witty, Investor Relations adviser. Please go ahead. Chris Witty: Thank you, and good morning, everyone. Welcome to Xtract One's Fiscal 2025 Fourth Quarter and Annual Conference Call. Joining me today is the company's CEO and Director, Peter Evans; and CFO, Karen Hersh. Today's earnings call will include a discussion about the state of the business, financial results and some of Xtract One's recent milestones, followed by a Q&A session. This call is being recorded and will be available on the company's website for replay purposes. Please see the presentation online that accompanies today's presentation. Before I begin, I would like to note that all dollars are Canadian unless otherwise specified and provide a brief disclaimer statement as shown on Slide 2. Today's call contains supplementary financial measures. These measures do not have any standardized meanings prescribed under IFRS and therefore, may not be comparable to similar measures presented by other reporting entities. These supplemental financial measures are defined within the company's filed management's discussion and analysis. Today's call may also include forward-looking statements that are subject to risks and uncertainties, which may cause actual results, performance or developments to differ materially from those contained in the statements and are not guarantees of future performance of the company. No assurance can be given that any of the events anticipated by the forward-looking statements will prove to have been correct. Also, some risks and uncertainties may be out of the control of the company. Today's call should be reviewed along with the company's annual consolidated financial statements, management's discussion and analysis and earnings press release issued October 23, 2025, available on the company's website and its SEDAR+ profile. And now it is my pleasure to introduce Peter Evans, Chief Executive Officer of Xtract One. Please go ahead, Peter. Peter Evans: Well, thank you, Chris, and welcome to all of our investors and analysts joining us today. We're going to start off by turning to Slide 4 and talk a little bit about the state of the business. I'm very pleased to say that we ended fiscal 2024 with a very strong Q4 that has positioned us well for the immediate and long-term future, particularly as our new Xtract One Gateway benefited from strong and accelerating demand across a wide variety of markets, most particularly education where we are rapidly cementing ourselves in a leadership position by offering the most efficient, most adaptable frictionless technology suitable for screening solutions in environments where the average individual has a much higher volume of personal items on them as they pass into a venue, items such as backpacks or laptops, tablets, metal water bottles and other items. We see this application not only for schools in the education market but also for places like convention centers, office buildings and hospitals, where we've seen a significant uptick in interest for our solutions. Following a record $16.1 million of total bookings during the fourth quarter, we began fiscal 2026 with a solid backlog, including pending installations of nearly $50 million. These are signed contracts soon to be installed. This is clearly the largest in our company's history and something we're very proud and pleased about. While revenue was negatively impacted by certain onetime events, which we'll talk about in a moment, these were customer-initiated delays and also times when we saw a customer doing a phased approach for some of our larger installations. We continue to work through these items with our customers and cannot be happier about where the company stands as we begin on the next stage of our journey as a company. I personally am looking forward to the coming year being one of higher revenue growth, significant conversion of the backlog into revenue and continuing improvement of our bottom line results as well as continued progress on our path to cash flow breakeven, a key objective for the company and myself and the other executives. Let's turn to Slide 5 for a moment. I'd like to provide some further commentary on the rollout of the Xtract One Gateway. The market continues to be very large and growing for this recently launched product. As evidenced by the number of announcements that we've made over the past few months, particularly in the education marketplace, including organizations and school districts like Manor Independent School District out of Texas, The Delmar School District in Delaware, Volusia County Schools in Florida and Mecklenburg in Virginia. It was a very, very active summer for us with several of these awards taking place just before the end of our fiscal year or just after the fiscal year and some additional contract wins that have continued to go and be booked soon after the end of the fiscal year. Many of these are not yet reflected in our backlog. That said, during the year and predominantly in the fourth quarter, the company signed contracts for Xtract One Gateway with multiple customers worth over $13.1 million serving a variety of markets, including education, some health care and some commercial enterprises. Since then, we've continued to win additional contracts and have now successfully begun commercial deployment of the Xtract One Gateway just subsequent to the fiscal year-end. And the initial feedback from those first customers has been extremely positive with many of them looking to expand. We see this as the tip of the iceberg for us in terms of overall demand as deployments, referenceability, client demonstrations and all further drive interest that we believe will continue to show growth and acceleration in 2026 and beyond. We have surpassed the original business plan that we built and that we envisioned for the first year of deployments for the Xtract One Gateway. And accordingly, we now have plans in place to double the manufacturing capacity very quickly for the Xtract One Gateway in fiscal 2026 in order to serve this inbound demand that we're seeing from organizations like schools and others. This is a nice sign of having a vision to deliver something different and actually delivering on that and the market responding incredibly positively. That positive market response has been in comparison to other solutions where essentially you need to introduce other technologies like x-ray machines and create an environment like a TSA screening activity in airport in order to have a comparison versus the Xtract One Gateway. It's for these reasons that the customers are so excited. As a reminder and a point often asked by investors, we would love to announce many, many more of these customer wins but due to competitive reasons or their preference of a particular entity or perhaps their nondisclosure agreements, we may not always be able to announce some of those new wins. This is why we promote and highlight that our backlog is a much better barometer and a good forward-looking indicator of the health of our business and the future success of our business. It's the best measure of our performance than the number of press releases that we put out. We continue to visit potential customers and host demonstrations on a weekly basis, multiple different demonstrations across the country every single week, and this is resulting in an expanding way of interested school boards and new previously untapped industries who are intrigued by our unique and groundbreaking capabilities. Our AI-enabled technology is truly the best-in-class at determining real threats in a world where the average individual is carrying a large number of large metallic items like laptops, phones, chromebooks, chargers, metal bottles and all sorts of other paraphernalia. I'd invite anyone on this call to think about your own experience when you have to divest of all those items versus the Xtract One Gateway where you just simply walk through with your rolling luggage, your backpack or whatever, and we can uniquely highlight that is a gun and that is a knife on the person and on the location. We continue to meet not only the school boards, but health care entities have now shown interest, warehousing and distribution companies who are looking to protect on both inbound and outbound. Commercial property organizations due to some of the unfortunate incidents such as what happened in New York a few months ago, has caused these marketplaces to open up to us. Other organizations like that similarly are looking to showcase our applications, which will then result in us securing new contracts. All of this does take time, particularly as the size of the orders grow. A typical school board is much larger or a school district is much larger than, say, a theater. And so the analysis that goes in takes some time for these organizations, but we're very pleased because that is increasing the size of our average order, and it's -- we're very pleased with the pace of introduction and even more excited by what the future holds for this solution. With rapid growth on the horizon, we're planning for the future and expect fiscal 2026 to be a year of significant change here at Xtract One on many aspects. Complementing this new and accretive growth that we're recognizing with the Xtract One Gateway, we continue to win new contracts for our SmartGateway at a strong, steady pace. The SmartGateway has proven itself to certain specific vertical markets and is performing extremely well. In the past few months, we've announced awards from organizations such as Temple University in Philadelphia, a global performing arts organization, San Mateo Medical Center in California and follow-on contracts, for example, with a multinational entertainment organization amongst others. These wins underscore the continued and strong demand for the SmartGateway product and its unique fit to serve those markets particularly well, particularly with this latter customer that I mentioned, where this entity, a known worldwide organization known for its theme parks and related properties chose to order additional SmartGateway units to accommodate expansion in its locations. With a planned spring 2026 deployment for a 3-year contract worth about USD 2.6 million in value, we'll increase the Xtract One's global footprint, particularly with SmartGateway and further support the entertainment organization's mission to deliver a safer guest experience at all of its venues. Both the SmartGateway and the One Gateway deliver specific capabilities that are key requirements for unique market segments and their needs. So this is not a one size fits all, it's a perfect fit for each segment. So each of those products is well positioned to serve their respective marketplaces, and we're very pleased with the response from those markets. This provides balance across our portfolio and more future business predictability as we have different kind of cycles of purchasing across different segments and of course, delivers a differentiated value that each customer acquires out of their screening solutions. Overall, as a business, we continue to grow the pipeline of opportunities. We have more than about USD 100 million currently in our qualified sales pipeline, customers that we're actively engaged in at various stages of selling cycle. And this is across both product lines. And this number continues to rise due to increasing threats, unfortunately, across the world and in geographies outside the United States as well as inside the United States. This improves our positioning and growing brand recognition of who we are and what our technology can actually accomplish. Given the current outlook for these and other opportunities, we're very optimistic about the quarters to come, and we believe the company is on a precipice of a step level change in terms of the volume and scale of our operations; therefore, why we continue to do things like I mentioned earlier, about doubling the capacity to manufacture the One Gateway. This obviously leads us to be very positive about the trend towards cash flow neutrality and we look forward to sharing those updates as we get further into fiscal 2026. I'd like to address some prior comments about revenue delays. We have experienced a handful of customer-initiated delays in their deployments of systems, which will cause onetime delays in our revenue recognition. Let me provide a few examples of these. We've signed a contract and there's a desire for an expanded contract with a major U.S. federal organization that due to federal government optimization activities that have taken place through 2025 has caused a lot of reorganizations of their organizational structure and how different people are responsible for different activities like IT infrastructure, budgets, financing and these sorts of things. While the contract is still valid and while that organization has a federal mandate that they will screen for weapons at all of their locations, they've had to pause as they've gone through these reorganization activities. So the requirement is still there and the order is still there and has not gone away, but we're working with that customer as new individuals come into play to start scheduling those deployments. Similarly, a very significant sports venue that we signed a contract with earlier has undertaken a new rebuild of their venue, and they have paused deployment of the systems until such time as they get closer to building occupancy. The good news here is that they have invited us to work closely with them and with the venues architects, for the best placement of the systems, where the conduits would go underground, how do they bring wiring in, how they bring power in and optimize the deployment of the systems into the venue design to ensure the maximum guest experience and deployment of our systems. So I'm pleased that we're working with them closely. I'd just like the building to be finished that much faster, so we can actually convert that order to revenue. On the other hand, we do have scenarios where we're very pleased where things are accelerating. We signed a contract with one of the top 5 major car manufacturers who wish to protect various venues. And they had delayed their deployments for sort of reasons. However, when we were starting to get a little bit frustrated with their delays, they called us up and said, we are ready to take shipment. And so we shipped those months -- those systems this past month after about a 12-month pause where they worked through some entrance redesign activities. So along the same lines, these orders have not gone away. Sometimes a customer needs to pause as they work through some internal activities. The summary here that like all our investors to take from this is the bookings backlog is solid, and we are still actively engaged with all of those customers as well as new customers. At this point, I'd like to turn it over to Karen, who can then provide a little more detailed discussion on our financial results, and then we'll move to Q&A. Karen, over to you. Karen Hersh: Thanks, Peter. I'm happy to review the financial highlights for what amounted to a very busy quarter, setting us up nicely for a strong fiscal 2026. Turning to Slide 7. Total revenue was approximately $3.3 million for the fourth quarter versus $5.6 million in the prior year period, reflecting certain customer-initiated delays, which Peter highlighted previously. We've been working with these customers and many of these installations have started to ramp up in Q4 and into fiscal 2026. We have also been instituting a phased deployment schedule for some of our larger, more complex installations. In particular, this is an approach that we use with school districts, delivering first for the high schools, then moving on to the middle schools and finally, elementary schools. While this approach may initially slow down our revenue in the short term, we believe that working with our customers to develop systematic deployment schedules and instituting rigorous training programs are positioning the company for long-term revenue generation and high customer satisfaction. Similar to previous quarters, revenue for the fourth quarter was spread across numerous customers and industries with the largest contributors being entertainment, education and health care. We've recently made many announcements about various new customer contracts and growing demand for Xtract One Gateway, which are expected to positively impact revenue in fiscal 2026. The mix of business will continue to fluctuate and diversify in the coming quarters given the order acceleration and interest in our products across an expanding array of industries, which I'll elaborate on in just a few minutes. We also remain committed to expanding our channel partner program, which is a valuable contributor to the company's growth. Channel partners accounted for approximately 52% of deployments for the entire fiscal year and this is expected to increase in fiscal 2026. Our gross profit margin was a record 71% for the fourth quarter versus 65% in the prior year period. Margins were also higher versus the third quarter of fiscal 2025 with the improvement both sequentially and year-over-year due to efficiencies achieved in our SmartGateway manufacturing and supply chain processes, as well as the use of advanced software tools like our view dashboard that allow for continuous and proactive monitoring of customer environments. We anticipate margins to be slightly negatively impacted in the near term by costs related to the initial production and installation of the Xtract One Gateway. However, we expect that this will improve over time with broader commercial deployment in fiscal 2026. Turning now to Slide 8. New bookings for the quarter were a record for the company at $16.1 million compared to the prior year quarter bookings of $5.6 million, of which approximately 74% were upfront contracts, meaning that the majority of these new contracts will translate to revenue relatively quickly. Bookings for the quarter were almost evenly split between direct sales and channel partners, as markets like education and health care are well suited for the channel. Total bookings for the year were $38.5 million, up from $29.8 million in the previous year. Anyone who's been following our story will know that our initial target markets were entertainment and sporting venues with a view of further expanding into other markets like schools and health care. Interestingly, in fiscal 2025, approximately 33% of our annual bookings were in the education sector, up from 14% in the previous year, primarily due to the recent launch of Xtract One Gateway. We are excited to see that several schools are now coming on board as evidenced by many of our recent customer announcements. Further, health care currently represents 17% of our bookings, and we expect this will grow in the coming year given the strong product market fit with our SmartGateway for these facilities. With the diversification of our gateway products, we expect our customer base will continue to expand into a multitude of industries in fiscal 2026. Moving on to Slide 9. Our contractual backlog and signed agreements pending installation rose to record levels as Peter previously mentioned. At the end of the quarter, our backlog collectively totaled $49.5 million as compared to $26.8 million last year, almost doubling the backlog year-over-year, which we consider to be an excellent indicator of future revenue. The backlog of $49.5 million at year-end was comprised of $15.5 million of contractual backlog with an additional impressive $34 million worth of signed agreements pending installation, the majority of which are expected to be installed within the next 12 months. Given our current total backlog of almost $50 million and a substantial pipeline of opportunities reflecting strong bid activity and expanding interest in both of our gateway products, we anticipate bookings to continue to increase, putting us on sound footing for fiscal 2026 and beyond. Now let's turn to Slide 10, which shows fourth quarter and full year operating costs year-over-year for each of our key expense categories. Sales and marketing expenses were $1.8 million in the quarter versus approximately $1.5 million in the prior year period, reflecting increased business development initiatives across a wider spectrum of industries while costs associated with R&D were $1.9 million in the quarter versus $2.3 million in the prior year period due to streamlined R&D activities. General and administrative expenses were approximately $2.2 million for the quarter in both years. Overall, operating costs were lower year-over-year even as we significantly grew our backlog and invested in the rollout of Xtract One Gateway. We have consistently managed our operating expenses while growing the company, demonstrating the scalability of our business model as we move forward on our path towards cash flow breakeven. Finally, on Slide 11, I'll discuss cash flow. During the quarter, the company had operating cash usage of $1 million compared with $1.7 million in the prior year period. And excluding changes in working capital, we spent approximately $2.7 million compared to last year's $1.3 million. For the year as a whole, we had operating cash usage of $6.5 million versus $8.1 million in fiscal 2024, primarily due to focused management of our working capital. During the quarter, we also completed a successful public offering of a bought deal, including the full exercise of the underwriter's overallotment option and raised just over $8 million to finance working capital requirements and for general corporate purposes. Our fourth quarter has been a busy but productive quarter. With the completion of our financing, the successful launch of Xtract One Gateway and the growth of our bookings and backlog, we are well positioned for growth in fiscal 2026. With that, Peter and I welcome any questions that investors may have at this time. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from Amr Ezzat from Ventum Capital. Amr Ezzat: Congrats on the very strong bookings number. I appreciate your comments on revenue recognition, and I think it's -- we all get excited with signed contracts that often forget that customers have challenges as well in taking delivery. I'm just wondering how do you feel this friction from the customer side is evolving relative to your comments last quarter and I mean, Q1, which ends next week. Are you guys seeing a bit of easing into Q2? Peter Evans: Yes. From my perspective, Amr, it's Peter here. We are seeing that easing. We do see that some of the contracts take longer to work their way through from trial to contract signing because they tend to be larger deals that we're dealing with because there's more, let's say, as an example, Fortune 500 companies that we're working with. And then those organizations might have multiple locations that they wish to deploy, multiple manufacturing plants, multiple high schools and middle schools. And they're not as interested in flash cutting, for example, 12 high schools and 20 middle schools all in one week. It's not the best approach. So we're seeing kind of these phased deployments. And we're actually starting to see things loosen up and accelerate now in terms of those deployments and in terms of that acceleration. So I'm feeling much better. We did have these onetime events, but we're starting to see that subside. Amr Ezzat: Fantastic. But if I'm sort of thinking about fiscal '26, is it fair to assume a stronger second half relative to the first half? Is that a fair assessment? Peter Evans: From my perspective, yes, primarily because we will be -- as we've seen so far, we're seeing some good momentum for the business and for One Gateway. We're also seeing steady, solid momentum for the SmartGateway, and those contracts will start converting over revenue as we work our way through fiscal 2026. Amr Ezzat: Okay. On the bookings, like, again, exceptional this quarter, and you did announce a flurry of wins post quarter end. I'm just confirming your bookings number probably doesn't capture a lot of these post-quarter wins that you guys announced. So we should be expecting another strong Q1 bookings print. Then maybe on the $16 million of bookings, if you could walk us through the split between verticals. I believe, Karen, you gave it for the full year. Peter Evans: Yes. So in general, we're continuing to see the momentum. And to your question about the flurry of announcements. Yes, where we can, as we said earlier, Amr, we are always interested in keeping our investor base aware of the activities in the company as much as we're allowed to do so by the customers. And where we can announce schools, hospitals, other locations, we will. But the announcements that have been made post Q4, in general, it's a safe bet to say that those are new deals that are occurring post the close of Q4. Some might have been from a Q4 time frame, but just due to timing of getting press releases approved, they might have rolled over into Q1. Amr Ezzat: Then, Karen, I'm not sure if you guys have the split handy for the quarter itself between the verticals? Karen Hersh: For Q4? Amr Ezzat: Yes, the bookings for Q4, the $16 million. Karen Hersh: For sure. So the general split by industry for Q4 was 60% for education in Q4 and entertainment was about 24%. So those were the 2 big ones and health care came in around 12% with the rest being some miscellaneous through other industries. So the overwhelming winner for Q4 was definitely education followed by entertainment. And those, I think you could evidence towards 2 of the larger press releases that we did, one for Volusia and the other for an entertainment organization. Those ones both fell within Q4, and so those represented a good portion of the bookings for that period. As Peter said, the deals tend to get larger that we've noticed, certainly with the Xtract One Gateway, and that's evidenced in Q4 where we're seeing a number of larger deals come through. Amr Ezzat: Fantastic. I was very pleasantly surprised with the gross margins coming in at 71%. Can you unpack what drove that? You spoke to, I believe, manufacturing efficiency. And I just wonder, is that a peak you feel? Then obviously, into Q1, what I understood from the comments is that we should expect some step back on One Gateway before margins scale again. I just want to confirm if I understood that correctly. Karen Hersh: I think you've understood it exactly correctly, which is we have said all along that we continue to bring efficiencies in terms of our [ BOM ], In terms of our support that we manage for our customers, and we've done numerous things to help improve those efficiencies over time. And so it's really nice for us to see that this has sort of translated into 71% margins, which are frankly quite impressive for our industry. You did pick up correctly on the comments about Q1. This is what happened to us with SmartGateway. You bring a new product to market. There's things to work out in terms of support. There's little adjustments that we want to make. We want our customers to be completely happy. And this tends to cause some degradation in the gross margin, at least temporarily until we work out those kinks. And so that's what we're anticipating for Q1 is a little bit of an adjustment as we get used to the Xtract One Gateway and bring it to market. And we're also continually already making changes to our [ BOM ] and making further efficiencies. It's going to take a few quarters to run through that cycle and get it really running the way that we -- similarly to our SmartGateway. Amr Ezzat: Fantastic. Then maybe one last one on OpEx. I think you spoke to what's driving that. But are we -- should we view this as a new run rate going into fiscal '26? Or maybe you could quantify how much of it has to do with the launch of One Gateway? Karen Hersh: Well, a lot of the One Gateway charges that were sort of one-off type of expenses, we did capitalize because we felt that there was a long-term future value of those. We'll start to amortize those costs in Q1 as we've brought the product to market. But similar to what we've said in the past, we believe that our operating structure is fairly stable. We have to continue to add to it to some degree to continue to address, for example, business development across more markets than we were initially targeting. And R&D is still going to continue to be a focus for us as we continue to innovate. We're not going to sit on our laurels. So R&D is going to continue to be a focus for us. But these changes are relatively small when you compare them to what we're expecting from a top line growth. So I think that scalability, which is really what you're talking about is, I think, going to continue on. And I think the changes that we have and the growth that we have in the operating base will be quite modest. Operator: Our next question comes from Scott Buck with H.C. Wainwright. Scott Buck: Peter, I was hoping, given the momentum you're seeing in education, if you could give us a bit of a reminder on how big the education opportunity here is in North America? And then maybe touch on some of the other higher growth segments of the business like health care as well. Peter Evans: Yes, absolutely, Scott. So simple math, Scott, there's 130,000 K-12 schools in the United States. That is a public K-12 that doesn't include private. And if you assume 1 to 2 systems per school, depending on the size of the school, depending on the number of entrances, maybe they've got entrance for bus drop-offs, another entrance for main entrants. And we see a variety. Some schools want as many as 3 systems. So you can argue that depending on the systems, the feature functionality and things like that for very simple round numbers, $100,000 to $200,000 a school for argument's sake. And those are just round numbers for simple math. So multiply that by 130,000 K-12 schools, you're in the range of $13 billion to, what, $25 billion or so for that marketplace. So I believe that between ourselves and our competitors, we've barely scratched the surface in terms of the numbers of schools and the numbers of opportunities. I think there are some things that take time to work through the schools, particularly budgets. Most of the schools have to fund these kinds of acquisitions of the systems through grant applications and grant funds, which is -- can be a bit of an arduous process. The money is there, though. Recently, Texas awarded several hundred million dollars for school safety and security, which has opened up, for example, the Texas marketplace. So the market is there. The market is large. The market is significant. It doesn't all happen overnight, though, depending on grant monies and these sorts of things. What we're pleased with, though, is for those schools like Volusia County that did extensive testing over a month-long period, and they were previously using one competitive solution and tested a second competitive solution versus us. It was very obvious what the best solution was for those schools. They could choose an x-ray machine and a screening solution and still have issues with alerts and weapons getting through or they can walk through the One Gateway with kids streaming in at 66 per minute. So we're very pleased with our position that innovation has delivered. We're very pleased to be serving that school industry, that $13 billion to $25 billion market. And all of our customers that we've deployed with so far are very happy and have become strong references for us. Does that answer your question, Scott? Scott Buck: Yes. No, that's perfect, Peter. I appreciate that. You mentioned one example there where you went in and displaced a competitor. Typically in the education space, is that more often than not you're displacing somebody else? Or are there a lot of greenfield opportunities in there as well? Peter Evans: I think we barely scratched penetration in the marketplace between ourselves and all the competitive opportunities. There are some schools you'll see -- I think there's higher penetration, quite frankly, Scott, of walk-through metal detectors that might have been deployed in some intercity locations 5 years ago. I think a place like downtown New York or Detroit or Chicago. But in terms of advanced screening solutions, in the case of this one place where we displaced a competitor, they're using that competitive solution for screening of football matches on Friday evening. And they had occasionally used it for screening students entering into the school. And I was very pleased to get a call from the Chief Security Officer one day where he said, well, I finally scrapped my last of product X and thrown in the dumpster after we've deployed now in 6 high schools with you. Scott Buck: Great. That's helpful, Peter. And then one last one. I want to ask about some of the commentary you had on channel partners and that becoming, I guess, a larger piece of revenue. Are you adding new channel partners at this point? Or are your partners just getting better at helping sell the product? Peter Evans: It's a little bit of both, Scott. We are adding new channel partners, but we're very selective of how we do this. Weapon screening solutions need to be deployed correctly. It is a people, process and technology question, not just dropping technology on the ground. People need to be trained correctly. You have to get the [ con ops ] and the flow right. Otherwise, it gets a little lumpy. And so we look to very good channel partners who can essentially replicate what we do with the high quality and the high touch and the high customer focus. So I'm less interested in having 500 partners versus having 5 really excellent partners. Now we have more than 5, okay? But as an example or an anecdote. And so we're continuously recruiting new partners, but being very selective about who they are. And then what we're finding is our existing partners, as they get their fourth, fifth, sixth deployment with their customers, they as a company are starting to replicate our level of knowledge and our level of engagement, and we're seeing the aperture of their pipeline expand also. So we've got growth with new partners. We've got growth with the existing partners become more fluent in the solution. Scott Buck: Okay. And just given the partnership network that you guys have built, we shouldn't expect any kind of deployment delays on your side, given any kind of capacity constraints at this point. Is that right? Peter Evans: Right now, we don't have any capacity constraints. But as I mentioned in my comments, because of the high demand for the One Gateway that's outstripped what we had our original business plan, we are already in the process of looking to double the capacity that we built into the manufacturing lines so that we can deal with that. So there may be some slight delays until we get that ramped up, but not something that we think is going to be meaningful or significant. Scott Buck: Good problems to have, right? Peter Evans: Yes. Operator: Our next question comes from [ John Hyde ] with Strategic Investing Channel. Unknown Analyst: Congrats on the bookings as the other analysts have said. My first question is around contract split between upfront and subscription. I know, Karen, you mentioned, I think it was 75% or so was upfront in these bookings. Can you give us maybe, let's say, like a split between what type of customers are choosing the different types of subscription versus upfront? Karen Hersh: Sure. It was -- 73% was upfront for Q4. And interestingly, for the full year, the upfront came in at 58% versus 42% for subscription. And so we look to that to see what's going on here. And I think you heard from Amr's question that we had a strong education quarter. And I think that was the main reason for the upfront. So what we're finding sometimes with schools or fairly often with schools is that they have grant money that comes in and they tend to work on an annual budget. And that lends itself well to the upfront contracts. So we often see upfront when we're dealing with schools. Similarly, when we deal with entertainment or stadiums, arenas, any sporting facilities, they tend to be very highly focused on their P&L, and they like to have security as a service. And so that lends itself extremely well to our subscription model, and that's what we often see when we're dealing with sports and entertainment. Health care, we find can go either way. They're often upfront, but at the same time, we do find some of our health care facilities do like to use a subscription model. I would say it's perhaps a little bit more leaning towards the upfront. But you're definitely seeing a preponderance of a market going towards one type of contract versus the other. But that being said, we always have exceptions. And from our standpoint, we're agnostic as to which one our customers choose. We just want to meet the customer with what suits them best for their needs, and that's why we offer that flexibility of both models, whereas some of our competitors in the market are much less flexible in terms of what they offer and they're often pushing customers into a subscription model when they are, in fact, better suited towards an upfront model. So I think that's the key takeaway from us, which is we're very happy to meet our customer from whichever model suits their purposes. Our margins are comparable on both scenarios. And therefore, we just do what's best for our customers. Unknown Analyst: Awesome. So -- and on kind of that topic, having a lot to offer for the customers. I know, Peter, you mentioned, and I think this kind of goes under the radar sometimes. I think you guys are really the only player in the space as far as advanced weapons detection that offers kind of 2 different tailored products, whereas I think your competitors mostly kind of just take their product and try to maybe add on a metal detector like you were saying. Is this something that is really kind of driving some of the advantage with having those 2 products? And if you can talk about maybe which particular customers really do appreciate that advantage? Peter Evans: Yes. So John, it's a great question. I guess the easiest way to describe it is there are -- for each market segment, there are certain critical key factors that they're looking for. And by having more flexibility in the portfolio, that allows us to be more aligned to what those customers' needs are. And I'll give you some examples in a moment versus kind of a one-size fits all. If all you've got is a square peg and you've got to push into a round hole, a hexagonal hole, a triangular hole of unique needs, you kind of have to hammer it in there, and it's not going to fit very, very well. In our case, think of it like we have got a solution with SmartGateway and what it does uniquely and the flexibility for various environments to address the needs of the square pegs and the hexagonal pegs and with the One Gateway, the round pegs. There are certain things that certain markets want. The #1 thing for schools is they want the kids just to flow in. They don't want them to have to divest their backpacks, their laptops, put them on an x-ray machine, walk on through all that sort of nonsense. We want the schools to be very welcoming and the One Gateway allows people to do that. In the case of hospitals, the bulk of the hospitals, the majority of them are very worried about edge weapons. And there's unfortunate incidents like what happened in Nova Scotia in January this year, where 3 nurses were stabbed and one needed life-saving surgery, and that was from a 2-inch blade. And so being able to detect those small edge weapons without alerting on 70% to 80% of the smartphones like other solutions would do, is a competitive advantage for the SmartGateway. And then that applies when you start to think about international markets where the preponderance of the issues are edge weapons, they are not firearms. And so for health care organizations or international markets, the ability to detect the smaller knives without the untenable numbers of alerts is critical. For other organizations like stadiums and arenas, there's all sorts of other capabilities in the SmartGateway, ease of portability. Let just tip it, roll it, drop it on the ground, turn it on and it works. And it's up and running, self-calibrating, self-managing. I don't have to worry about moving metal doors or rebar under the ground or all these other silly things that make it operationally complex for people. The arenas and stadiums have enough to worry about to get 17,000 excited Billy Joel fans in to go see Billy. And so making our systems very simple to use, particularly in an environment where you're using outsourced security guards who change over frequently. Now these are things that we've built into the platform in a manner that makes it very easy for arenas and stadiums and the SmartGateway perfect fits that, very easy for hospitals. I was at one hospital location where they were doing a demonstration and the vestibule between the 2 sets of sliding doors was about 6 foot by 7 foot, fairly small, and we fit into it perfectly where others couldn't. So the ability to fit and align to those different market needs for the different segments is what's giving us competitive advantage. Unknown Analyst: Awesome. One last question. I know you talked about the advantage with -- internationally with knives. I know that's a big thing, especially with the SmartGateway. With schools, though, I know a lot of the schools, obviously, in the U.S. have been picking up on these technologies and we kind of only expect it to continue. But internationally, are you guys seeing the same trend with schools wanting to add security systems like these? Or is it kind of particularly just certain markets like the U.S.? Peter Evans: I think the primary issue in the U.S. is with weapons and firearms. There isn't a week that goes by where we don't hear a story about some child bringing a gun to school. You don't have the same issues in outside of the U.S. because there's not same easy access to firearms. However, there are anecdotally certain locations like I believe in the south of France, they have now mandated that schools will start screening for weapons. So we are starting to see this coming a little bit at the forefront, usually driven by some sort of an event. I was in the U.K. a month ago, and there are certain school districts that are now starting to make it mandatory to start screening for weapons also, primarily driven by some sort of unfortunate event. What we see is in countries outside of the U.S., when there is an event, there's a much faster reaction and mandate to start driving weapon screening solutions. Operator: Our next question comes from, Jeffrey Bennett, a private investor. Jeffrey Bennett: I just wanted to get some visibility into Europe with Martyn's Law coming into effect. I know you just signed Carlisle Support Services and you've done some demos for the Premier Soccer League over there. What kind of revenues are you expecting out of that? I'll put on mute there. And for Karen, I wanted to know what kind of warrant conversions are currently taking place with your warrants? Peter Evans: So thank you for the question. The U.K. is a very strong and emerging market for us. We're very pleased with the engagements with assorted football clubs, theater organizations and other iconic venues. Obviously, we can't speak to them specifically because we're under a nondisclosure with those organizations, until such time as we've either signed a formal contract with them or until such time as we have got their agreement to actually put out a formal press release. So I can't name any specific names. I wish I could, but we can't right now. But the U.K. particularly is becoming a very nice market for us, and we're very pleased with the business acceleration that's occurring there right now. All I can really say is stay tuned, more announcements to come. Jeffrey Bennett: Karen, for the warrant conversions, what kind of conversions are you seeing? Karen Hersh: We have seen some conversions happening in September. We had [ $2.8 ] -- almost [ $2.9 million ] of warrants that were exercised. And this was primarily -- this was exclusively actually related to the financing that we just completed in June. So we've had some additional cash come into the organization from those conversions. And that extended into a little bit more going on in October. In total, [ $4 million ] warrants, give or take, have been exercised since year-end that has provided additional cash for the company. And I would note that there are a number of warrants that are still in the money and could potentially convert throughout the rest of the year. Operator: At this point, there are no further questions in the queue. I would like to turn the conference back over to Peter Evans, CEO, for any closing remarks. Peter Evans: Well, first off, thank you, everyone, for taking the time out of your very busy day to join us today for this presentation. We are very pleased with how we wrapped up the year strongly. There's a few bumps in the road last year, but those were quickly corrected, and we feel that we've got our momentum back, and we've got that strength back in everything that we're doing. 2026 is looking very, very good. I'm feeling very pleased about it right now. I couldn't be happier. I'm very thankful for our investors who continue to support the company. I'm unbelievably thankful to all the employees that we have in our company. We have got a fantastic group of individuals who are all very passionate about what we do. And most importantly, I'm very thankful to our customers who continue to support us, continue to renew with us and continue to go tell all of their friends about us and why they want to work with Xtract One. So with that in mind, I'd invite everyone to stay tuned. We are looking forward to our Q1 announcement coming up very soon, and we will continue the momentum and keeping everyone aware of what we're doing here at Xtract One. Thank you, everyone. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good day, and welcome to the Third Quarter 2025 Comfort Systems USA Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] As a reminder, this call may be recorded. I would now like to turn the call over to Julie Shaeff, Chief Accounting Officer. Please go ahead. Julie Shaeff: Thanks, Michelle. Good morning. Welcome to Comfort Systems USA's Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Call. Our comments today as well as our press releases contain forward-looking statements within the meaning of the applicable securities laws and regulations. What we will say today is based upon the current plans and expectations of Comfort Systems USA. Those plans and expectations include risks and uncertainties that might cause actual future activities and results of our operations to be materially different from those set forth in our comments. You can read a detailed listing and commentary concerning our specific risk factors in our most recent Form 10-K and Form 10-Q as well as in our press release covering these earnings. A slide presentation is provided as a companion to our remarks and is posted on the Investor Relations section of the company's website found at comfortsystemsusa.com. Joining me on the call today are Brian Lane, President and Chief Executive Officer; Trent McKenna, Chief Operating Officer; and Bill George, Chief Financial Officer. Brian will open our remarks. Brian Lane: All right. Thanks, Julie. Good morning, and thank you for joining us on the call today. Our amazing teams across the country continue to deliver excellent results for our customers, and they have delivered financial results that far exceed even our recent outcomes. We earned $8.25 per share this quarter, which is double what we earned in the same quarter last year. Our mechanical business had a sharp increase in profitability, and our electrical segment was higher as well. We also had favorable developments in some late-stage projects that contributed to our great results. Construction is driving most of our results, but service revenue and profit also grew by double-digit percentages. Our bookings were strong, and our backlog at the end of the quarter grew to a new high of $9.4 billion. As a result of exceptional demand for our services, we achieved a second consecutive same-store backlog increase of more than $1 billion despite significant third quarter burn. We continue to book work with good margins and good working conditions for our valuable people. We entered the fourth quarter of 2025 with $3.7 billion more in backlog than last year at this time. I'm happy to announce the acquisition of 2 companies on October 1. FZ Electrical, a contractor with strong industrial capabilities located in Grand Rapids, Michigan; and Meisner Electric, a contractor based in Boca Raton, Florida, with strong capabilities in health care and other attractive markets. We are thrilled to have these 2 companies join the Comfort Systems USA family of companies, and we welcome them. Today, we increased our quarterly dividend by 20% to $0.60 per share, and we have actively purchased shares during 2025. With solid bookings and great demand, we expect continuing growth and strong results in 2025 and 2026. Trent will discuss our operations and outlook in a few minutes, and I will make closing comments after our Q&A. But first, I will turn the call over to Bill to review our financial performance. Bill? William George: Thanks, Brian. Our third quarter results were remarkable in every way with 33% same-store revenue growth, sharply higher margins, EPS up by over 100% from the prior year and a surge of over $500 million in quarterly free cash flow. We achieved more than $400 million in quarterly EBITDA for the first time ever, and that's a 74% increase over the same quarter 1 year ago. So we'll start with revenue. Revenue for the third quarter of 2025 was $2.5 billion, an increase of $639 million or 35% compared to last year. Electric segment revenue grew by 71% and mechanical revenue increased by 26%. Through 9 months, same-store revenue increased 23% and currently, our best estimate is that fourth quarter same-store revenue will grow in the high-teen range as compared to the same quarter last year. For full year 2026, we expect same-store revenue growth to continue most likely by a percentage in the low to mid-teens and weighed more heavily to the first half of the year. Gross profit was $608 million for the third quarter of 2025, $226 million higher than 1 year ago. Our gross profit percentage grew to a remarkable 24.8% this quarter compared to 21.1% for the third quarter of 2024. Quarterly gross profit percentage in our mechanical segment increased significantly to 24.3% this year compared to 20.3% last year. Margins in our electrical segment also grew to 26.2% as compared to 23.9% in the third quarter of 2024. Great ongoing execution augmented by favorable developments in certain late-stage projects drove us to higher margins in both segments. Our largest single discrete project development was recognizing $16 million of previously deferred revenue on a project as a customer emerged from bankruptcy. We currently expect that 2026 profit margins are likely to continue in the strong ranges that we have achieved and averaged over recent quarters. SG&A expense for the quarter was $230 million or 9.4% of revenue compared to $180 million or 9.9% of revenue in the third quarter of 2024. SG&A increased mainly from ongoing investments in people to support our higher activity levels. Our operating income increased by just over 86% from last year from $203 million in the third quarter of 2024 to $379 million for the third quarter of 2025. Our operating income percentage surged to 5.5% this quarter from 11.2% in the prior year. Our year-to-date tax rate was 20.9%. Our effective tax rate in the first quarter was lower due to interest we received on a delayed refund relating to our 2022 federal tax return. We expect our tax rate to continue to be around 23% for the rest of 2025 and into 2026. After considering all these factors, net income for the third quarter of 2025 was $292 million or $8.25 per share as compared to net income for the third quarter of 2024 of $146 million or $4.09 per share. Thanks to great execution by our people, EBITDA increased by 74% to $414 million this quarter from a strong $238 million in the third quarter of 2024. Our trailing 12-month EBITDA is now $1.25 billion. Free cash flow for the third quarter of 2025 was $519 million, and year-to-date, our free cash flow is $632 million. We purchased additional shares this quarter. And year-to-date, we have spent around $125 million, buying approximately 345,000 shares at an average price of $363.13 per share. At the end of September, our net cash position was $725 million. As Brian mentioned, we acquired 2 fantastic companies on October 1, Feyen Zylstra and Meisner Electric. We funded approximately $170 million in purchase consideration in the first -- fourth quarter, and these acquisitions are expected to provide over $200 million in incremental annual revenue and $15 million to $20 million of annual EBITDA. In August, we finalized an amendment to our senior credit facility that increased our borrowing capacity from $850 million to $1.1 billion on very favorable terms. The new maturity date is October 2030. Our balance sheet and cash flow have put us in a great position to continue to invest, grow and reward our shareholders. That's all I got. Trent? Trent McKenna: Thanks, Bill. I'm going to discuss our operations and outlook. Our backlog at the end of the third quarter was a record $9.4 billion, a large sequential and large year-over-year increase. Since last year at this time, our backlog has increased by $3.7 billion or 65% and $3.5 billion of the increase was same-store. On a sequential basis, backlog increased by $1.3 billion or 15%, all of which was same-store. Third quarter bookings were especially strong in the technology sector, both in our traditional construction business as well as the modular part of our business. We are entering the final quarter of 2025 with same-store backlog 62% higher than at this time last year, and our project pipelines remain at historically high levels. Industrial customers accounted for 65% of total revenue in the first 9 months of 2025, and they are major drivers of pipeline and backlog. Technology, which is included in Industrial, was 42% of our revenue, a substantial increase from 32% in the prior year. While our manufacturing revenues declined on a percentage basis, we continue to see good demand for manufacturing, but in many cases, data center opportunities are more compelling. Institutional markets, which include education, health care and government remain strong and represent 22% of our revenue. The commercial sector provided about 13% of revenue. Most of our service revenue is for commercial customers. Construction accounted for 86% of our revenue with projects for new buildings representing 61% and existing building construction 25%. We include modular in new building construction and year-to-date, modular was 17% of our revenue. We remain on track to have 3 million square feet of space in our modular businesses by early 2026, and we will prudently consider additional investments next year based on the strong demand we are seeing in modular. Service revenue was up 11%, but with faster growth in construction, it is now 14% of total revenue. Service profitability was strong this quarter, and service continues to be a growing and reliable source of profit and cash flow. I cannot say enough about the amazing team of craft professionals that we have working hard for our customers every single day. Thanks to the teams that are working across the country, we are optimistic about our future. I want to close by joining Brian and Bill in thanking our over 21,000 employees for their hard work and dedication. I will now turn it back over to Michelle for questions. Thank you. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from Adam Thalhimer with Thompson, Davis. Adam Thalhimer: Congrats on another wave of record results. I wanted to ask high level on the technology side. Does the bidding activity match the bookings and the revenue growth that you saw in Q3? Brian Lane: Yes, Adam, the opportunities, the pipeline is still robust, matching quarter 3. There's still more opportunities that then probably can be handled out there in the market at the moment. So we've seen no let up at all in the opportunities. Adam Thalhimer: And then I'm curious on capital allocation. Your free cash flow -- your net cash, I think, broke out to an all-time record in Q3. Just curious how you're thinking about that and if just accumulating cash from here wouldn't be the worst thing in the world? William George: Well, that's never the worst thing in the world. There are worse alternatives to accumulating cash. But we haven't changed our capital allocation thinking since 2007. We will -- to the extent we can find opportunities that we have conviction around, we will deploy most of our cash doing acquisitions. We will continually buy back our shares using a portion of our free cash flow, and we get aggressive on that when we feel like the stock has dipped to -- relative to our prospects. So for example, when it dipped earlier this year, we spent $100 million in a couple of weeks buying shares. And then we -- one point you might be making is there's so much cash now. Is it realistic for us to deploy it into acquisitions? And I think the answer is we've faced that problem on a couple of stair steps in our cash over the last few years. So far, our reputation as an acquirer and our commitment to great outcomes for the people we buy have allowed us to find good opportunities to deploy our cash. One thing people might not think about is we are growing, but the companies we're buying are growing as well. There's a certain amount of scaling going on. So I meet with companies regularly that are having -- that have results that are twice as big as they were 2 or 3 years ago. And so in a sense, the reality is the opportunity set that's facing a company with a great, deep, well-established workforce of pipe fitters or electricians is amazing. These companies are worth more today than they were 5 years ago just because of actually what's going on because of the investments they've been making in the meanwhile. And we're optimistic. We're going to just try to keep doing what we've been doing. And if we wake up with the problem of we just can't keep up with the cash, then we'll find ways to reward our shareholders in other ways. Operator: Our next question comes from Sangita Jain with KeyBanc Capital Markets. Sangita Jain: So a couple that I have. One is on the cash flow in third quarter, your free cash flow was especially strong. So I'm just trying to think how we should think about it for the whole year and if there were any material advance payments included in 3Q that we should be aware of? William George: So for one thing, there wasn't an extraordinary event like there has been a few times over the last few years where we get way ahead due to some specific event or we have a turnaround where that event is sort of recalibrated. I will say that you can always expect our cash flow to be roughly equal to our net income. We are a cash business. We pay our taxes in cash. So when you see a quarter where we have cash flow above our net income, at some point, we're going to give that back. When it's below our net income, then we have cash we'll collect in the future. Through 6 months, we were behind our net income. There were some specific reasons for that, that we've discussed. In the third quarter, we had a big catch-up. We're getting fantastic payment terms. As we can negotiate good pricing and good conditions for our workers, we can also negotiate good payment terms. So we just had a great cash flow quarter, but nothing fundamental has changed. We're going to cash flow our net income. Sangita Jain: Got it. And then if I can ask one on backlog growth. Obviously, your backlog suggests that you're booking out further than a year. Can you speak a little bit to that? And if it's primarily on the modular side or also on the traditional construction side? If it's just data center or also life sciences pharma work that you feel like you're booking out earlier and earlier? Trent McKenna: So when -- our bookings for the quarter, right, we were broadly across all of our businesses. And there were some -- the bookings that we had in modular, those are going to -- those are pushed out farther. So those aren't going to be exactly relevant to what I'm about to say. But for the rest of our bookings, all of those bookings are going to start sometime within the next year. They might be longer-term projects because of the size of the projects, but they are all projects that are slated to begin in 2026. So when we talk about bookings out further out, that's more of the modular side of the business. Operator: Our next question comes from Julio Romero with Sidoti & Company. Julio Romero: Just following up on the last question about the order acceleration. Historically, you guys are very prudent at kind of not taking on additional backlog and not getting out over your skis. I know, Trent, you mentioned a piece of the backlog growth was modular orders that were further out. But just help us think about the step-up in orders here for the last several quarters. Part of it is booking yourselves further out, but some of it is also, I guess, securing enough pricing in your bid margins to compensate for that additional risk of additional orders? Brian Lane: Yes. So Julio, we still have the same philosophy we've always had. We'll take on work we know we can do that we can handle with the skilled workforce that we have. So we look at each opportunity, particularly on the lodger side, make sure the timing is right, work for us that we can achieve a good product for our customers. So if you look at the timing of what we're winning, when it's coming in and can we handle it, we feel very comfortable with the workload that we have today. Trent McKenna: And I want to add too, Julio, the collaboration between our companies is really permitting a lot of this additional booking that you're seeing. It's the companies working together to share workforces so that they can tackle projects that would otherwise have been kind of outside of their ability scope previously. Brian Lane: And Julio, one thing that we do have going for us is that we have folks that will travel and you see some of this work, maybe get all the West Texas, Abilene, Amarillo that we can handle because we have people that will travel to these sites. Julio Romero: That's very helpful. And then I know a big emphasis is being selective with regards to the specific partners you work with. And I think you guys mentioned earlier, your partners are getting bigger. They're taking on additional work. But just throwing that question back at you guys, has the pool of partners that you work with increased? Or is this just more a function of you doing more with your existing partners? William George: So what Trent was referring to was our companies working together. We do work sometimes with -- we worked with some companies. We worked with a company we bought, called Ivey, before we bought them. We have selected situations like that. But I think overwhelmingly, we're really talking about companies that are Comfort Systems USA companies that are 50 or 100 or 10 or 50 miles from each other. Brian Lane: And it's really a great point for people to come and join us. They have opportunity to work with a lot of other companies in the same industry. under the same overall structure that we have. Julio Romero: Yes. And I'm sorry to rephrase my question, I meant when I said has the pool of partners increased, I meant has the pool of kind of the customers that you typically have worked with increased? Or are you doing more with existing customers? William George: I would say there aren't many people in the United States we haven't done work for in the past. If they've done work in the past, we've probably done it. So that's kind of a hard question to answer, but it's mostly -- there is a definite preference for people who we have a history of succeeding together with. We have rough projects, we don't want to do work with those people anymore. We want to do work with the people that we have great projects with over and over. Brian, did you -- I mean... Operator: Our next question comes from Brent Thielman with D.A. Davidson & Company. Brent Thielman: Congrats again, another great quarter. I guess, Brian, Trent or Bill, one of the questions that seems to come up often is just your ability to sustain the growth you're seeing outside of modular, just given sort of the industry labor constraints out there. You've grown same-store, call it, 20% or more for what looks to be a fourth year in a row here. And I know there's a lot of factors to the growth over the last few years. But maybe you could talk about just sort of how critical have your sort of internal recruiting, hiring efforts been in recent years in support of that growth versus job values getting bigger? And then also, I guess, is there any sort of slowdown or change you've seen in terms of your ability to bring in people to support the growth, I guess, outside of acquisitions? Brian Lane: Yes. So I'll go first, Brent. First and foremost, this is a good place to work, right? We treat people fair in what respect. We pay them well, and there's a good benefit package. So we're constantly recruiting. But as you can tell by our numbers, we're up over 21,000 access to another probably 35,000, 34,000 contract labors that we have. So all in all, we're constantly recruiting, but we do get people to come here and work. We also have a lot of work, which makes us a good place to work as well. So how much can we grow? We continue to train. We're improving productivity constantly. We're trying to pick the right jobs that we're good at planning them using BIM, prefab and modular help us. But the enhancement that we are achieving with the skilled workforce is the best I've ever seen in my career today. Brent Thielman: Okay. All right. And then the 3 million square footage of space in modular that, I guess, becomes available early 2026, I think you said Trent. Is that capacity or space already effectively sold out? Or do you expect it to be soon? Trent McKenna: Yes. The answer is yes. Brent Thielman: Okay. Just one last technicality, if I could. The $15.5 million write-up that you called out, I think, in the filing, is that all reflected in the mechanical segment? Or I'm just trying to level set what kind of normalized margin looks like. William George: So that happens to be in the electrical segment. But one of the things we were basically saying is we always get these questions, did you have anything special in the quarter? Did you have jobs that closed out especially well? We have a lot of jobs now. So we almost always do. But at this point, we did have some special closeouts this quarter that were particularly helpful. That was the biggest one. So in MD&A, you're required to give an example. We gave the biggest single example, but they happened in both electrical and mechanical. We're late in some jobs. The jobs are going well. The systems are being turned on and they work well. We're able to relieve contingency. So we did -- this would have been a great quarter without those. This would have been a record quarter even without some of those pickups. Some of those pickups pushed our results a little further, and we wanted to just let people know that. Brent Thielman: Okay. Sorry. And Bill, theoretically, you have these every quarter. It just varies. So even if we compare year-on-year, you might have had them last year? William George: But the last 3 or 4 quarters, we were frequently asked, did you have any special closeout? And we said nothing out of the usual. This time, we're saying we kind of had some a little more than we would -- we might normally count on having. So I would say we do have -- we had some really good stuff happened this quarter. Operator: Our next question comes from Josh Chan with UBS. Joshua Chan: Congrats on a really great quarter. I wanted to ask about the backlog question, but especially within the last 6 months because obviously, you've had a strong demand environment, you have labor constraint, you have labor sharing for a while now. But really over the last 2 quarters, you had these 2 consecutive $1 billion step-up in the backlog. And I was just wondering if anything is different in this last 6 months versus the longer period, I guess. William George: It's an interesting way you asked that question. Every quarter is different from every other quarter, right? We had some big bookings. Sometimes they're in pharma, sometimes they're -- it's never exactly the same because this is lumpy stuff, as we've said. We had a lot of really, really good opportunities get to the point where they were documented and could go into backlog this quarter. Year-to-date, it's the companies you guys know of and think about. There were some interesting ones this quarter. It's work we know are really companies that are doing work they've done over and over. So we feel great about it. But there's just such a good market. There's such a good opportunity. Our customers, they want us to commit early, so they commit early. It's just a fantastic market, and we have just unbelievably good companies. Joshua Chan: Yes. That makes a lot of sense. I appreciate the color there. And then on modular capacity, if you were to expand kind of incrementally from here, would there be a preference to serving existing customer or I guess, demand for that? Or would there be a preference to kind of grow with other types of customers within modular? William George: I would say we always have a preference towards meeting the needs of the people who have been great partners for us over years. And in the case of one of the ones you would be referring to more than a decade. So we'll always have a preference towards great customers as opposed to new customers. Having said that, we are -- we talk to new customers. We have opportunities. As you know, we added a customer. But if you were asking me the question, would our guys rather do work with people who they have a great relationship with or find out how good somebody else is, they'll take the sure thing. Operator: Our next question comes from Tim Mulrooney with William Blair. Timothy Mulrooney: I hate to go back to this backlog question and beat it to death, but I'm newer to the company here. So I just want to make sure I understand how this works. How much of your backlog, excluding that modular piece, would you expect to start at some point over the next 12 months? I'm just trying to understand how much of this backlog is actually being pushed out versus just elongated due to the larger projects? William George: So I'm really glad you asked. The majority of the backlog numerically is jobs that have already started. It's the work left to finish on jobs that have already started. When Trent says everything is going to start within a year, he means all the new bookings. We don't have new bookings. Really many of the new bookings have already started at some level in the sense that we're doing preliminary work, underground work. We have engineering we're billing for. But it is -- this is really a -- because the definition of backlog in sort of what's called a remaining performance obligation under GAAP is so strict. You really don't put something into the reported backlog number until you have a price, a scope and a legally binding obligation that can be audited. We are -- almost any project that we put into our backlog, it was awarded to us a quarter, 2 quarters, 3 quarters ago. We received a phone call saying, this is your work, long before it shows up in backlog. So I hope that helps because it's not like -- we're not like a manufacturing company that's selling stuff we're going to start producing far in the future. You can't really price the building until it's been designed. You can't really design a building until you're about to start it. So... Timothy Mulrooney: Yes. No, that's really helpful, Bill. I guess, a more firm picture for a more firm backlog. That's helpful. So my other question just really quick is actually something I don't hear discussed a lot on these calls, but I'm curious to learn more is that service revenue piece. I mean it's up 11%. You said it's like 14% to 15% of your revenue. It's not insignificant. I don't hear it talked about a lot. What's driving that strength in the revenue growth there, and it sounds like -- and in the profitability? And is there some sort of conversion like when your new construction is stronger that brings along some service? Or are those pretty much not correlated? Just any color on that piece of the business. Trent McKenna: So the service business continues to be strong. There's a lot of investment in sales force collaboration, making sure that we're going after the right parts of that market. Across the board, we're just seeing broad strength in that business, and it's execution driven. We have a lot of people -- the service business, it's really -- it's a day-to-day kind of bunt single doubles business. It's not like the construction business where you add a lot to your backlog at once. It's small maintenance contracts, pull-through work that comes from that. To your point, it's converting new work to service contracts over time. So it is the kind of business that just by its nature, doesn't grow quite as episodically as the construction business. But what you've got is you've got some real strength in that from the teams out in the field that are making it happen. Operator: Our next question comes from Brian Brophy with Stifel. Brian Brophy: Congrats on a nice quarter. Just wanted to follow up on some of this headcount discussion. I think the over 21,000 employees implies a little bit over 15% headcount growth since the end of 2024. It obviously seems to be an important enabler of some of the organic growth we've seen here this quarter. Just could you help us understand how sustainable that pace of hiring could be, assuming demand remains healthy here? William George: That number does include some acquisitions. So -- but I would say the majority of that was 15 points were added by our companies. And we don't -- we would never tell you, oh, we can regularly add 12% to our workforce of craft workers. We had a really good 9 months. We're confident we can -- we have -- on any given day, we have apprenticeship programs going on that we really are trying to get as many people as we can legally put into them involved in. There are like state-mandated ratios where you can only have a certain number of apprentices per journey persons. So we're trying to grow as fast as we can. I think high single digits is what we've accomplished over a long period of time. We're pretty proud of that, by the way, because that means you're creating or you're helping people create themselves as electricians and pipe fitters and that's good for them. That's good for us. That's good for the U.S. Brian Brophy: Okay. Yes, that's helpful. And then wondering if you could give an update on some of the automation investments you've made on the modular side. And just to what extent you're seeing some productivity benefits? Any color you can provide there would be interesting. William George: You want to -- Okay. Well, so more and more robots, right? So as we get more and more buildings implemented, we see the bills go by for robots we're buying. We've added turn tables. It's what Trent was saying, it's singles and doubles, but yes, no, there's a lot of automation going in. There's improvements in welding proficiency that's driven by better software, really AI-enabled software. There's just a million little things. I mean... Brian Lane: I'll also tell you, Brian, in terms of the history of construction, the amount of innovation and technology that's being developed and applied today leaps and bounds over what it's ever been. And it's going to be a huge help into helping us build stuff as we go forward safer, more productively and the quality is getting better every day. So... Trent McKenna: Yes. And one of the benefits Comfort Systems has is we have 48 different test beds where we can try new things and then move them throughout the enterprise if they work. And so it's a really excellent way to be able to test and innovate and then be able to do it in a controlled way and then move it out if it's effective in one operating unit, then it will be effective across. And it's a way for us to be able to innovate inside of a construction environment without significant risk. So it's a real benefit to our structure. Brian Brophy: Yes, that's really helpful. Last one for me. Pharma was mentioned very briefly. Just would you give us an update on kind of what you're seeing on the project pipeline side, particularly some of the onshoring opportunities that may be coming. Obviously, we've had a little bit more tariff discussion on pharma products. I'm just curious if you've seen any movement in that market. William George: Our biggest single booking, I think, in the last couple of quarters was in pharma, but the majority of our bookings today are in technology. It's not because there aren't pharma opportunities. It's because technology is competing for our resources and they're making a compelling case for our resources. I will also say, if you talk to -- we have a very, very strong pharma group of people that have done work in pharma for decades in the Mid-Atlantic. I've spent time with some of them recently. They say that there is a lot of planning going on projects with code names for construction along the Eastern Seaboard. But in our case, that would be the Mid-Atlantic area and especially the research triangle, the area around the research triangle. So there's a lot of work coming. Pharma has very, very long lead times. They they think and plan for years. So unless something like -- there are exceptions to that. GLP-1 boom, they're just building it as fast as they can. The COVID vaccines and all sorts of things that were needed for the COVID vaccines, very, very fast. But normal regular day-to-day pharma stuff, it develops over a long period of time. And that pipeline, the people, the smartest people in our company who know about it, say it's very, very good. Now the time may come when it's available to us, and that's not what we choose to do, right? But I think that the opportunity is out there. Operator: Our next question is a follow-up from Sangita Jain with KeyBanc Capital Markets. Sangita Jain: I just had a follow-up on -- as you see large data centers starting to get commissioned, I'm wondering if there's a change in the type of electrical or mechanical scope that you may be seeing because we're hearing that developers are now looking at DC power instead of AC power. And I wonder if that impacts you or if it just kind of stays outside the wall. William George: So we don't -- for us, electrons going through a wire, you just can't even imagine how generic that is to an electrician. He couldn't care if those electrons are -- he doesn't care if it's going to make pills or it's going to make data. So you'd be -- you just need electricians. That's a great thing about our positioning. Whatever you -- if you need to do something, you need us. And I haven't heard anybody saying that it's materially changing. The one thing you do hear is scale, like the amount of copper, the amount of switchgear, the density of cooling, just the sheer scale, people -- even very, very seasoned people are amazed by that in our organization. But as far as like those kind of tweaks, I'm not hearing anything. Trent? Trent McKenna: No. Operator: There are no further questions at this time. I'd like to turn the call back over to Brian Lane for closing remarks. Brian Lane: Okay. I just want to reiterate my gratitude for the amazing dedication and excellence of the teams we have across our nation, serving our customers every day. Demand is strong, and our people are rising to the challenge of addressing the unprecedented need for their unique skills. As Trent mentioned, we feel that conditions are good for us to continue to perform. And as Bill indicated, we have the resources and the commitment to lean into delivering for our employees, our customers and for you, our shareholders. As we embark upon the holidays that are coming up, we won't have another call. I wish everyone the best for the rest of the year and enjoy your time with your families as the holidays come upon us. Thank you for your confidence. Have a great weekend. Operator: Thank you for your participation. This does conclude the program. You may now disconnect. Good day.
Operator: Good morning. Welcome to Megacable's Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. With us this morning, we have Mr. Enrique Yamuni, CEO; Mr. Raymundo Fernandez, Deputy CEO; and Mr. Luis Zetter, CFO. Let me remind you that the information discussed at today's earnings call may include forward-looking statements on the company's future financial performance and prospects, which are subject to risks and uncertainties. Megacable undertakes no obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statements. I will now turn the call over to Mr. Enrique Yamuni. Sir, you may begin. Enrique Robles: Thank you, Saul. Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us today. During the quarter, we remain firmly aligned with our strategy and continued with the execution of our expansion and network evolution projects as planned. This disciplined approach has enabled us to sustain subscriber growth above market level, positioning Megacable as the second largest operator in the country by number of broadband subscribers. The achievement reflects our commitment to becoming a leader player in Mexico telecommunications sector. A key driver of this progress has been the expansion of our infrastructure. During this period, we successfully reached our goal of doubling our infrastructure by number of homes passed compared to those at the expansion announcement, making a significant milestone 3 years into the execution of this initiative. Today, our network is capable of serving 82% of our subscriber base to fiber, a tangible result of our strategic investments. We have already captured over 50% of the subscribers originally target in those territories, and we continue working diligently to increase penetration and reach the next set of objectives. In parallel, we have made substantial progress in our network evolution project, migrating subscribers to a state-of-the-art fiber network. This effort is part of our clear vision to become a full fiber operator in the medium term, enhancing our competitive edge. We are proud to offer a robust service portfolio with competitive pricing bandwidth, tailored to evolving needs of our customers and outstanding customer service. This is evidenced by our performance in key indicators such as Net Promoter Score, which continues to improve quarter-over-quarter. Operationally, we remain focused on driving value to quality service and fair prices. In this sense, ARPU increased both sequentially and for the first time in the last 12 months on a yearly basis, thus reflecting the strength of our value proposition and the positive impact of recent commercial adjustments. From a financial standpoint, subscriber growth has consistently translated into revenue growth. Our mass market segment has maintained high single-digit growth with an acceleration observed during this period. Likewise, with consolidated EBITDA has increased its growth pace, resulting in margin expansion on a year-over-year basis, a trend we expect to sustain in the coming quarters. Our capital investment levels are showing a clear deceleration trend. Excluding extraordinary investment projects, our organic CapEx has declined to mid-teens aligning with global best-in-class telecom operators aligning the foundation for a more efficient investment structure going forward. As a result of this lower CapEx intensity and continued EBITDA growth, we are approaching our cash generation target. This year, we expect to be cash flow positive before dividend payments and very close to achieving net cash flow even after dividends. It is also worth noting that throughout this investment cycle, our debt levels have not increased significantly. We maintain a solid balance sheet with one of the lowest leverage ratios in the market. This highlights the efficiency with which we have executed our initiatives and position us well to capitalize on future strategic investment opportunities. Our financial strength has been recognized again by the rating agencies as HR Ratings confirmed -- reaffirmed our AAA rating this quarter, following Fitch's rate confirmation in the second quarter. These rating actions reflect the quality of our balance sheet, the consistency of our performance and the strength of our long-term outlook. As we approach the final quarter of the year, we remain committed to execute our fiber deployment strategy, consolidated growth in new territories and drive operational efficiency. Above all, our focus is on maximizing free cash flows and solidifying our position as Mexico's most reliable telecommunications platform to preserve the strength of the Megacable brand, with millions of households and businesses across Mexico have come to rely on connectivity and entertainment. All this said, now I pass the call over to Raymundo for operational remarks. Please Raymundo, go ahead. Raymundo Pendones: Thanks, Enrique, and good morning, everyone. As Enrique just note, this was another quarter of steady progress. Our results reflect the continued momentum of the core business, reaffirming the strength of our strategy and our ability to adapt to shifting market dynamics and evolving customer expectations. Our subscriber base continues to grow both in new territories and expansion areas where penetration levels keep increasing. And more importantly, this growth in our base has consistently translating to revenue increases particularly during this period where mass market segment revenues accelerated. Let me walk you through the key operational metrics of the quarter. We ended the quarter with nearly 5.9 million unique subscribers, an increase of 9% year-over-year, equivalent to 506,000 net additions. In this quarter alone, net additions reached 122,000 slightly below last quarter's, but well within internal expectations in line with the consistency of our performance. In the Internet segment, subscribers totaled almost 5.7 million, up 10% versus third quarter '24, representing 528,000 net additions, of which 129,000 were added this quarter. This performance reflects strong demand for high-speed connectivity, even following the price adjustment implemented at the start of the quarter, highlighting the continued relevance of our value proposal particularly in price-sensitive markets. Regarding our Video segment, we closed the quarter with nearly 4 million unique content subscribers, including 3.9 million of linear TV and 124,000 users with streaming service coupled only with our Broadband solution. Within the linear TV segment, XView continued to expand, reaching almost 3.7 million users at 9.9% year-over-year increase with 333,000 net additions. In Telephony, we surpassed the 5 million subscriber mark, up 11% versus the prior year, equivalent to 490,000 net additions with 98,000 net additions during the quarter. While this service remains primarily complementary within our bundles, its expansion contributes significantly to customer retention. Turning to our mobile virtual network operator business, our revenue, total lines reached 640,000 with 21,000 net adds this quarter and 128,000 over the last 12 months. Growth remains focused on postpaid offerings continuing the upward trends since early 2023. We closed the quarter with 14.6 million RGUs, up 8% year-over-year driven by a steady subscriber growth in the mass market, whilst revenue generating units per unique subscribers stood at 2.49, ARPU improved to MXN 422.3, up from MXN 418.9 in the same period last year and MXN 421 last quarter. This figure reflects pricing optimization despite a bundled mix more inclined towards double play. Our expansion and modernization of network continues to be core drivers of our growth. Our infrastructure now extends to 107,000 kilometers, allow it to serve over 18.7 million homes, up 10% from last year. As of quarter end, over 82% of our subscriber base was already connected via fiber compared to 73% in the same period last year, a clear indicator of the progress made towards becoming a full fiber operator. Churn levels stood at 2.3% for Internet, 2.7% for Video and 2.7% for Telephony, reflecting the price adjustment carried out at the beginning of the quarter and despite the upward fluctuation within reasonable levels. It is important to mention that based on seasonal patterns, we anticipate churn to improve toward next quarters. In a nutshell, our mass market segment remains a primary engine of growth and profitability driven by expanding coverage and improved operational leverage in both legacy and developing markets. By contrast, the corporate segment remains soft, consistent with trends in earlier this year, mostly attributed to an economic slowdown in the corporate segment. Undoubtedly, competitive conditions in this market have intensified. With greater fiber availability, there has been an increase in the supply of available services, which has negatively impacted market prices for these services. On the positive side, the integration of the corporate segment has progressed steadily under the business Tech-Co model. As part of this merger, we have focused on evolving the business model shifting from generating most of our revenue from equipment sales to managed service models, which generate a larger recurring revenue base. This has had a temporary effect on the results of these 9 months of 2025. However, we expect greater stability and recurrence in revenue as these consolidation matures. Before I close, I want to emphasize that these quarterly results were achieved through disciplined execution and quality service despite an increasingly competitive and price-sensitive market as our network reliability coverage expansion and bundles continues to differentiate our value also. Looking ahead, we remain focused on preserving momentum to the fourth quarter, with churn expected to soften in the next quarters, territory penetration to move forward an infrastructure deployment to meet customer needs, we are confident in our ability to deliver resilient results as of year-end. Thank you for your attention. I will now turn the call over to Luis for the financial review. Luis Zetter Zermeno: Thank you, Raymundo. Good morning, everyone. Let me walk you through our financial performance for the third quarter 2025. During the quarter, as Enrique and Raymundo mentioned, we continue to execute our long-term strategy with discipline and consistency, enabling us to deliver solid top line growth and strong profitability. Taking a closer look at our financial performance for the quarter. Total revenues reached MXN 8.9 billion, a 9% increase against the MXN 8.2 billion recorded in the third quarter 2024. This performance was mainly supported by the mass market segment that grew 11% year-over-year, the highest growth in the last 6 periods driven by ongoing subscriber growth and a gradual ARPU improvement. In the same period, corporate segment revenues contracted 5% compared to the third quarter of 2024, mainly explained by the economic deceleration in this segment, coupled with a higher competition. As a result, mass market operations contributed with 85% of total revenues in the quarter and the remainder on the corporate segment. On the cost side, cost of services for the quarter totaled MXN 2.4 billion, up 6% year-over-year, mainly due to a deeper revenue mix composition in the corporate segment, favoring higher margin income streams. Well SG&A reached MXN 2.5 billion, increasing 9% primarily from higher labor costs. Both lines remain under control advancing at the same level or below revenue. Turning to profitability. EBITDA reached MXN 3.9 billion, up 10% year-over-year, accelerating its growth trend in the annual comparison along with total revenues. EBITDA margin was 44.2%, slightly below sequentially as a result of seasonal effects, but above the 43.6% recorded in the third quarter of 2024. Again, an expansion of 50-plus basis points, regardless of the contraction in corporate revenue. Notably, margin expansion at newer territories continue driven by an incremental subscriber base and improve infrastructure utilization. At the same time, margins in mature regions remain solid and aligned to historical trends. Net income for the quarter was MXN 628 million, accumulating MXN 2.1 billion year-to-date, a 13% increase versus MXN 1.9 billion recorded in the same 9 months of last year. In this context, we remain confident that profitability will strengthen as depreciation stabilizes and newly integrated regions mature. Turning to the balance sheet. Net debt declined sequentially, but remained largely in line with the same period of last year closing at MXN 22.3 billion at quarter end, supported by a solid cash generation and the absence of any additional debt. The net debt-to-EBITDA ratio stood at 1.45x down from 1.56x in last quarter and below the 1.54x of the prior year. In this sense, we continue to maintain one of the strongest leverage profiles of the industry. Additionally, our interest coverage ratio remained solid at 5.59x and the weighted average cost of debt stood at 8.77%, continuing its downward trend. This indicator reinforce the strength of our capital structure and provide flexibility to support our long-term goals. Turning to investments. CapEx for the quarter totaled approximately MXN 2.4 billion, above the MXN 1.9 billion reported last quarter, mainly due to typical second half seasonality. However, we remain comfortably within our full year investment guidance. In relation to revenue, CapEx represented 26.6% in the quarter and 25.1% year-to-date. And we continue to expect the full year ratio to lie as we have been mentioning between 26% and 28% of revenues, consistent with our soft lending investment trend. Looking ahead, we focus on balancing growth with cautious capital allocation, and our priorities continue to include the generation -- increase the generation of positive cash flow in 2026, preserving our investment-grade credit profile and advanced maturation of recent investment across both new and legacy markets. Lastly, I would like to highlight 2 items that reflect our continued commitment to transparency and value creation. First, as noted by Enrique HR Ratings reaffirmed our AAA credit breaking, following the reaffirmation rate by Fitch Ratings in the second quarter. Both rating actions validate the strength of our balance sheet and consistency of our financial strategy. Second, we continue to advance at our sustainability and disclosure activities with the release of our 2024 integrated annual report under GRI and SASB standards. Verified by 35 professionals in accordance with these standards as we continuously strive to further strengthen our ESG reporting in anticipation of evolving market standards and practices. In line with this, the impact allocation report of our 2024 local notes is also now available. In summary, our third quarter results reflect the strength of our business model, discipling financial execution and a healthy position for long-term growth. Thank you. We are now ready to take your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Marcelo Santos from JPMorgan. Marcelo Santos: I have two questions. The first is regarding CapEx. So you made it very clear what's the outlook for this year. How do you see CapEx going in 2026 and 2027. And the second outlook is a bit about the competitive environment and growth. I mean, you had very good adds, but churn was a bit higher and SG&A was a bit higher sequentially. So is growth coming at a more expensive cost than what was foreseen? Is this because of a bit of the environment? So just wanted to tie these things. Raymundo Pendones: Luis, you want to go ahead? Luis Zetter Zermeno: Yes, on CapEx, for sure, Marcelo, thanks for your question. And as we mentioned, our CapEx is in the downhill trend and even when we are going to end this year around 26% as we expected, our forecast for the future '26 and '27 will be, '26 will be around 24% to 26% of revenues and declining on '27 to grow between 21% and 23%. Enrique Robles: Yes. The CapEx trend continues to decline, even though we have [ up ] worth in this quarter because of the build of the network and the [ comps ] that we activate, we expect that we announced that in the second quarter when we said the second quarter wasn't difficult. But the good news is like Luis is saying that we continue to have a lower CapEx over revenue this year around 26% to 28%, that's what we expect. And the message here from the management is that we will have that decline for next year between 24% to 26%. Raymundo Pendones: And Marcelo regarding the competitive environment. The highest growth that we have in subscribers, the highest growth rate comes from expansion territories as there is a greater opportunity for penetration and company's expansion on that part, of course. In legacy territories, the good news is that penetration remains stable at around 40% and growing. That means despite of competition, the offer that we have and the strategy of a good product, good network at the best affordable price is proving to provide a 10% growth in revenue, EBITDA and subscribers all around and we continue -- we will continue to forecast that for the early 2026 if you might say. Now the churn, remember that we have an increase in rates at the beginning of the quarter. That increase in rates put pressure on the churn. Our level of gross adds is the same. It's a little bit higher than what we had in the second quarter. So that means we're improving and having more capacity of bringing gross adds. We're not against any increase in rates that we that we have at the beginning. And in some of our high penetrated market, we have that increase in short. We expect that's shown to stabilize and decline slightly in the quarters to come. That's our view of what we have. Of course, it is a competitive environment. We've been having that competitive environment for a long time. We have Izzi, we have Total, we have Telmex in our markets. But as we said before, we believe that we'll have the best offer and to continue to provide growth in the markets where we are. Operator: The next question comes from Milenna Okamura from Goldman Sachs. Milenna Okamura: The first one is you mentioned in your early remarks, some commercial adjustments that drove your ARPU increase. So can you give us a little bit more detail about these initiatives, aside from the price you have implemented? And how do you expect margins to evolve going forward as you continue to increase your fiber penetration in new areas? Raymundo Pendones: Yes. Thank you for the question, Milenna. Regarding the ARPU, we continue to provide a slight increase in the ARPU that we have there. And that's a combination of several factors. One is the increase in rates that we have on that part. The other one is the increase in apps and services per unique subscribers that we also are successful in that part. And that's coupled with the increase of subscribers bring a lower ARPU because of the promotions that we have. So all that combination doesn't allow us to increase more the ARPU, but we believe that we can continue to have a slight trend increasing going forward. Now in terms of the markets, we still have room to grow, we are at around 81% Broadband penetration in our markets, and we really believe that we can raise to around 90% -- to below 90% in the years to come. So all the companies will continue to grow in that part. The thing is that who has the better offer price and margins to take part of that growth in the market. So far, we have growth in expansion. That means we're capturing market from competition. And of course, some of them also will be new market subscribers. And we're capturing subscribers, also 1/3 of our subscribers come from organic systems. That means we're growing above market growth because of that offer that we have because we convert and we have all our subscribers, 83% of our base, the majority of those organic subscribers already has access to fiber, brand-new CPEs, better quality of the video that we have there and better offer. So that's what we see that we will continue to grow in the markets to come. You can expect 2026 and 2027 to continue to provide for Megacable growth between 100,000 to 150,000 subscribers per quarter. Operator: The next question comes from Phani Kumar from HSBC. Phani Kumar Kanumuri: So the first one is regarding the comment that you made earlier, saying that if you exclude the special projects, your CapEx margin is in mid-teens. So I wanted to understand like what are you excluding from this? Is it just the expansion project and the migration products that you have? The second question is how was this CapEx, the maintenance CapEx, let's say, 3 years ago, has it come down from like 20% to mid-teens? Or is it -- how is the trend evolving? And what is driving that trend? Raymundo Pendones: I'm sorry, this was [indiscernible], it was productized in my opinion. Luis Zetter Zermeno: Phani -- a little bit. Can you rephrase the first question, please? Phani Kumar Kanumuri: The first question is, you said that you are excluding some special projects. So what are the special projects that you have? Is it just a recognition or does it also include the customer premise equipment? Luis Zetter Zermeno: So what we consider special projects are both the expansion and the GPON evolution CapEx projects per se. There are other small investments that come along with that -- those strategies. But basically, those are the 2 special projects that we mentioned. Raymundo Pendones: The expansion project like Luis was saying, we announced that at the end of 2021, we start getting subscriber at the mid of 2022. We're very happy that we already doubled the infrastructure of the company, getting more than 9 million home pass in addition, put us in a very similar position to that of the competition as a strength company and growing subscribers on that. We are very well in terms of how we're increasing those subscribers, and that's reflect on the growth of revenue. And that means that in the future, we will slow down kilometers and homes to be activated in the expansion territories and that's for sure. The other project that we have, which is the GPON Evolution we call it, that's evolving from HFC to GPON to fiber, all our existing territories. We're very successful also. As I said, totally, we already have 83% of the company is already on fiber. So for the years to come, the evolution from HFC to fiber, it will be smaller. So what Luis is saying, our 2 main projects -- special projects are decreasing in CapEx intensity expenditures, okay? This company will never stop investing in CapEx, that's for sure because we're a technology company. But the levels that we expect after we finish those special projects and that's around 2028 will be levels between the 15% to 28% CapEx over revenue. Enrique Robles: But in the meantime, it will be declining from the current 25%, 26% to the lower very low 20s, and we will get to below 20s when we finish -- when we finish those 2 special products. Luis Zetter Zermeno: And to your second question, the maintenance CapEx has reduced, yes, because it's easier or cheaper to maintain network on the GPON side of the house compared to the HFC previous network. Phani Kumar Kanumuri: Is there any quantity measure? Is there any quantification of what's the decrease that happened, let's say, over the last 3 years? Luis Zetter Zermeno: Well, it was a little bit above 20%, and now it's on the high teens or mid-teens. So that's basically on the maintenance CapEx. Operator: Next question comes from Andres Coello from Scotiabank. Andres Coello: Two quick questions, please. The first one is on the competitive environment. I think Televisa just confirmed that they will invest $600 million this year. I think that's 20% more than what you are planning to invest, around $500 million. So I'm wondering if you are noticing any change in behavior from Televisa, if you think that Televisa can become a little bit more defensive in the territories that you just entered. That's my first question. And whether this can, in any way, affect your CapEx guidance to have Televisa investing more than you. And my second question is on the recent natural events in Veracruz and other states. I'm just wondering if there was -- if you're expecting any nonrecurring impact in the fourth quarter, perhaps in terms of revenues and also in terms of infrastructure. Raymundo Pendones: Yes, Andres, thank you for the questions. Regarding the competitive environment, Televisa is investing more than us because we already invest what we have to invest. We have been investing in fiber before they did hit on that part. We have a good offer, a good product and good price and we don't see why we are going to slow down our CapEx and our growth in subscriber. Regarding Veracruz, we were affected and hit in some of our markets. One of those markets being Costa Rica. We already have all the system back and working and on and working with our subscribers. And what we can say is that we're working in a normal condition. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Emilio Fuentes from [ GBM ]. Emilio Fuentes: I was wondering if you could give us some outlook on how your dividend will evolve going forward, especially given how you've been able to pay around 20% of your EBITDA. Now that you -- the company will go into a less intensive investment phase and the more cash generating phase, should we expect this to go up? Enrique Robles: Well, we haven't made any decisions yet. Obviously, it will depend on the future, how we see the industry and opportunities going forward, but if we do not have anything better to put our money in. Obviously, we could always raise our dividends. We don't see why not, but it's too early to call that. Operator: The next questions come from Ernesto Gonzalez from Morgan Stanley. Ernesto Gonzalez: Look, I know it's early to discuss 2026. But given the high levels of penetration in the Broadband market in Mexico, is it reasonable to assume that you can maintain the current level of growth for next year? And the second question is, can you also discuss the main drivers of why your subscribers churn? Is it because they get better prices elsewhere because they're looking for a better network or any general commentary in churn is appreciated. Raymundo Pendones: Thank you, Ernesto. Yes, as we mentioned, we don't see why we should slow our growth. We forecast the same growth that we have between 100 to 150 per quarter. That's what we're looking for 2026. And that's based in the offer and also because the market at 81% penetration still have room to grow on that part. Regarding the churn, what we see is that a slight amount of our churn goes to competition. But as I said, this slide, what we see is that every churn that we have is economically, that's the main reason that they can afford to pay. And as I said at the beginning of the third quarter, we had an increase in rates that put pressure on the churn. That's the reason of the increase in churn. Operator: The next question comes from Lucca Brendim from Bank of America. Lucca Brendim: I have only one here from my side. Can you give us an outlook on the corporate segment. It has slowed down this year, but how can you -- we think about it going forward, especially for 2026, 2027, how much do you think that this segment can grow. Raymundo Pendones: Yes, it's a good question. Look, as I said, the corporate segment has a slowdown, it's a soft result that -- what we have. And that's due to -- 2 main factors. One is the market. The market has decreased the price of fiber and the price of connectivity. And the other one is that we changed the way that we sell our infrastructure product before we used to sell a lot of that infrastructure on a cash basis. And now we changed that into more products that has serviced over a long period of time, bringing a more recurring into the future, more profitable instead of just selling hardware in that part that we don't like that part. So we make a shift in the strategy of the corporate segment that affect us slightly in the short term, but that sure will bring better results in the future. Something that I want to say is that the corporate -- even for the corporate segment has a 5% decline year-over-year. We did not see a decline in the EBITDA of that segment. That means we have a much more better margin with our strategy, recoveries of the decrease in the revenue that we have. So that's part of our strategy. We are very happy of that part. We integrate our 3 companies into MCM business, Tech-Co and that shift is sure it's going to pay off in 2026. Operator: The next question comes from Alex Azar from GBM. Alejandro Azar Wabi: I just wanted to pick your brains on what's next. Several questions from my colleagues being on capital allocation, fully penetrated market. So what's on your mind when you see Mexico fully penetrated in terms of cable perhaps '27, '28. How should we think about Megacable in the next 5, 10 years? Are you guys going to grow more aggressively in -- as an MVNO or perhaps the corporate networks. Just wanted to understand how you're viewing the company very long term. Enrique Robles: Thank you, Alex. Obviously, in the telecom industry, there is very many opportunities in the future, like as you mentioned, mobile with MVNO. In the corporate market, we have a great, great opportunity. In the digitalization of the country, obviously, also in education and telemedicine and all that and with the AI accelerating, growing -- the growth of the AI and all the applications that will come with that. Obviously, there is a big -- very big opportunities in the future for the telecom industry to sell -- to upsell services and applications for the Mexican homes and for the business community. Also in the education and medicine industries and services are really big -- it's going to open very big opportunities. We still have a lot to do in digitalization, and this government is putting a big emphasis in that. We have to digitalize the country banking and everything. I think that the market is there. Obviously, it will decelerate in some segments like the connectivity of homes, but we will get to saturation point at times -- some certain time, but there are a lot more things to do. And also, we -- I mean we don't know what new things are coming with AI and the new technologies. For sure, we will find something to do. Raymundo Pendones: That's the remark. At the end, this is a MXN 64 million question, what are you going to do? We're really, really, really focused, Alex, in what we announced at the end of 2021 in that part, those main 2 projects as we like to say, the GPON evolution that brings us that strength in the network and in the product for the future to come and expanding and being effective in both. That's where we're focused on the management right now on that part. But for sure, we're not going to stay on that part. CapEx will decrease. Free cash flow will increase. Revenues will continue to come. EBITDA will continue to come. And the same question that you have, it will be good to know in a year or 2, what we are going to do. But for sure, we're going to continue to be part as Enrique said, on a market that will continue to move from connectivity to IT solutions and value-added services, both in the corporate segment and the residential and maybe other technologies, too. Luis Zetter Zermeno: And we will have the balance sheet to support any endeavor that we will be searching. Raymundo Pendones: We won't be steady, that's for sure. Alejandro Azar Wabi: If I may add, if I may have a follow-up, and thank you for the color. But the market has been really hot in terms of AI, data centers. If I'm not mistaken, you have some data centers. So how are you thinking on these assets? Are you seeing them as core assets? Or would you be thinking of divesting like Axtel bid that under different circumstances. But how are you seeing your data centers? Are you -- are those core assets or you can divest them? Or how you think on those? Enrique Robles: Well, the data center is an asset that would be able to test the waters there. I think that's going to be really big players in that specialized in data centers. Ours is a very good asset that we have. But I don't think we will be growing in those kind of data centers. We will be more focused in edge data set. We already have built over 300 of those all across the country. Raymundo Pendones: And also, like Enrique telling you and your straight question, it is not core. What we have on those both in our main data centers, centralized data center and the edge, we have Megacable infrastructure. Those facilities are built mainly as an anchor for Megacable and an office space and kilowatts for other people to be here. We don't have the mind in investment in fixed data center assets. We want to have a solid core network, both in the long haul and the last mile, the best fiber company in terms of products and services and put applications on top of that. The other ones, the main anchor for the data center is Megacable. It has a great asset for somebody else in the future because it's located in the western part of Mexico. There is no other asset like that in this area. The hyperscalers and the content and the streamers will have to come after going to Greater Mexico, will have to come to different parts of Mexico, one of those being Guadalajara, and that's where we have it. And that's the mind that we have for that part. Our infrastructure is for Megacable use. We don't know whether to maximize that in the future. We will explore that when we finish having our mind in bringing the growth of subscribers increase in margin, the decrease in EBIT -- in CapEx and all the KPIs that we're telling you we're focused on that point. Operator: We have one question through the chat is coming from [ Patrick Brook ] from DS Advisers. There have been reports that AT&T is looking to sell its mobile business in Mexico. Is that something Megacable will be interested and consider buying? Enrique Robles: Not currently, we are pretty much focused in our main projects, which is finishing our expansion plan. And we don't want to go into -- I mean, we're going into a cash positive cycle, and we don't want to reverse that, not currently. We are focused in our main projects. Thank you very much. Operator: Okay. That was the last question. With no questions in the queue. This session is concluded. I pass the call over to Mr. Enrique Yamuni for final remarks. Enrique Robles: Okay. Thank you very much, Saul. As always, it is a pleasure to discuss our results with you. Please contact our Investor Relations department if you have any questions or concerns regarding the company. Have a very wonderful day and a great weekend. Luis Zetter Zermeno: Thank you, everybody.
Operator: Good morning, and welcome to the Minerals Technologies Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note, this event is being recorded. I would now like to turn the conference over to Lydia Kopylova, Head of Investor Relations. Please go ahead. Lydia Kopylova: Thank you, Gary. Good morning, everyone, and welcome to our third quarter 2025 earnings conference call. Today's call will be led by Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, Doug Dietrich; and Chief Financial Officer, Erik Aldag. Following Doug and Erik's prepared remarks, we'll open it up to questions. As a reminder, some of the statements made during this call may constitute forward-looking statements within the meaning of the federal securities laws. Please note the cautionary language about forward-looking statements contained in our earnings release and on this slide. Our SEC filings disclose certain risks and uncertainties, which may cause our actual results to differ materially from these forward-looking statements. Please also note that some of our comments today refer to non-GAAP financial measures. A reconciliation to GAAP financial measures can be found in our earnings release and in an appendix of this presentation, which are posted on our website. Now I'll turn it over to Doug. Doug? Douglas Dietrich: Thanks, Lydia. Good morning, everyone, and thanks for joining today. I'll start today's call with a review of our third quarter, followed by an update on what we're seeing across our key end markets. I figure it would be helpful to provide some perspective on how our markets have changed over the past year and how they continue to move within the global economic context. I then want to highlight some of the recent investments we've made to support the long-term growth we are seeing across several of our product lines. Erik will then take you through the detailed financials and share our outlook for the fourth quarter, and then we'll open it up to questions. Let me start with our Q3 numbers. We had strong execution across our business. delivering solid financial results despite facing mixed market conditions, which I'll get into a bit later. Our sales increased 1%, both sequentially and over last year to $532 million. Operating income came in at $78 million and earnings per share were $1.55, a company record for the third quarter. Cash flow was strong and was up 24% year-over-year. We continue to strengthen our balance sheet, providing us with a financial foundation from which we can evaluate different investments and opportunities to drive growth. We also returned $20 million to our shareholders in the quarter and last week announced a 9% increase to our regular quarterly dividend, making this the third consecutive year that MTI has had a dividend increase. We recognize our sales growth has been sluggish this year due largely to the softer market conditions we've been experiencing in residential and commercial construction, heavy truck and agricultural equipment markets and in Europe in general. These softer market conditions have largely offset the growth we are seeing in many of our other product lines where we are executing on opportunities in markets that are structurally expanding and where we have built a distinct competitive advantage. I'll highlight some of these specific investments and opportunities in a moment and outline how they will set us up for meaningful expansion across several product lines, both in the near and long term. But first, let me provide an update on our current market conditions. As a general overview, after the first quarter, most of our end markets have been and remain relatively stable. A few continue to be weaker than last year, and we expect them to remain so through the fourth quarter. Let's start with our Household & Personal Care product line. Pet litter market conditions in North America and Europe have remained stable and at similar levels compared to last year. We continue to see discounting activities from branded producers in North America, and in response, we've worked with our customers to make promotional adjustments to the products we supply them. These activities have had a positive impact on our sales volumes and profits. The pet litter market in Asia, and more specifically, China, continued to show strong growth. Our volumes are momentum there, and we are making investments to support this long-term growth. In our other consumer these markets, demand for our natural oil purification and animal health products has been strong, with our sales this year up 18% and 12%, respectively, and we see this trend continuing. In Specialty Additives, we're facing mixed market conditions in paper and packaging. Asia continues to be a market with good opportunities for us to expand our base business and introduce new technologies. However, this year, North America demand has been weaker. Elsewhere in this product line, demand in the residential construction market has been relatively flat all year. We did see some signs of further softening late in the third quarter, which may make it a slower end of the year. For our high-temperature technologies product line, conditions have remained relatively stable for steel production in the U.S. with utilization rates remaining in the mid to upper 70% range. It is not the highest level we've seen over the past 2 years, but healthy enough for stable volumes. Europe continues to be more of a challenge with steel utilization rates dropping below 60% this year. The U.S. foundry market has also remained relatively steady for most of the year, buoyed by stable auto production. Two areas that have been soft for this business all year are the agricultural equipment market and heavy truck markets. When these markets begin to rebound, they will provide good eye for foundry demand. The China foundry market has remained relatively strong this year despite the impact of tariffs and ongoing trade disputes. In fact, we've seen strong volume across our metalcasting business there with year-to-date volumes up over 10% from last year. In environmental and infrastructure, commercial construction remains slow compared to historical levels, and these similar conditions exist for the environmental lining and remediation markets. We expect to see some improvement in project activity as interest rates ease and projects are financed. We are already specified on several large commercial and environmental projects and expect an inflection in this product line sales when these projects commence. Elsewhere, we've seen strong pull for our infrastructure drilling products this year, increased geothermal drilling and fiber optic cable installation has been driving the increased demand. As you can see, we continue to experience mixed conditions across our end markets. But despite the impact these conditions are having on our top line this year, our team has navigated these conditions to maintain margins, profits and cash flow. At the same time, we've not deviated from our focus on investments in technologies and markets where we see the biggest growth opportunities, which I'll go into more detail on the next slide. We've spoken about our strategy to build positions in higher growth markets. Markets with economic or macro trends where we can deploy new technologies or expand our existing technologies to drive higher levels of growth and balance the more cyclical portions of our company. We've been executing on these opportunities, expanding our pet care business, investing in technology serving a variety of consumer-driven end markets, and deploying new technology in some of our more traditional businesses like refractories and paper and packaging to expand our value proposition globally. As you've likely seen, we announced a few recent investments made in support of these strategies, and I want to highlight a few of them to remind you of the opportunity we continue to see. Let's start with a few opportunities in our Consumer and Specialty segment. In our pet care business, we remain confident in the long-term growth trends of this market and in the private label portion in particular. We expect the North America pet litter market to continue to grow by 3% to 4% and in the Asia market to grow by 6% to 8% per year over the long term. Over the past 5 years, our pet litter business has grown organically at a 9% compound rate. Adjusted for the 2 acquisitions we've made over this period. To support this continued growth, we recently made investments at our plants in Dyersburg, Tennessee; Branford, Ontario, and Chaoyang City in China. We've broadened these plant manufacturing capabilities to increase throughput, lower cost and offer greater packaging flexibility to meet customer demand. Dyersburg and Branford are both strategically located and well connected to large portions of the North America market. These recent investments to expand capacity upgrade capability at these sites enabled us to secure some significant contracts beginning in 2026. In China, we've outgrown our existing facility and are bringing online a completely new one to meet the demand that we are seeing from this rapidly growing pet litter market. The upgrades across these 3 plants are expected to be completed by the end of 2025 and will fortify our position as the largest high-quality private label cat litter supplier to customers around the world. In our natural oil purification product line, we announced an investment at our plant in Turkey to support the significant growth we are seeing in this market. Since 2018, our Bleaching Earth business has grown at a compound rate of 20%, and this is our third expansion since we opened the facility to support this level of revenue growth. Our facility in Turkey at both mines the raw materials and manufactures absorbents and Bleaching Earth products sold under the brand name Rafinol , which are used for the purification of edible oils and renewable fuels. Including biodiesel, renewable diesel, sustainable aviation fuel. The market opportunity here is significant. The global natural oil purification market size was $1.1 billion in 2024. The renewable fuels portion accounts for over 12% of this market and is the fastest-growing segment. Demand for sustainable aviation fuel, in particular, is growing rapidly and is being bolstered by supportive regulatory changes in the U.S. and Europe. Our Rafinol product line is differentiated in the market with its high-performing absorptive properties that succeed in the most challenging applications like sustainable aviation fuel. Also worth mentioning, we've made other investments to meet the increased demand for our natural animal health products, and also for our higher tech Fabric Care solutions for dry laundry detergent. In our Paper and Packaging business, we continue to secure new contracts in Asia and in the next 6 months, we expect to commission 4 new satellites in the region. There continues to be a significant unpenetrated addressable market in Asia for our technologies. We've been driving the deployment of engineered calcium carbonate and the introduction of renewable technologies to the paper and white packaging industry as producers expand and look to upgrade their product quality. Since 2022, our volumes there have grown by 20%, including the doubling of our sales to the white packaging industry. We've always been the leader in the region and are well positioned to continue to grow by delivering the best calcium carbonate solutions including innovative technologies like NewYield. On the Engineered Solutions side, our MINSCAN installations and our Refractories business continue to go strong. We just signed our 18th MINSCAN contract and we'll be installing 6 new units this coming year. There's a large addressable market with over 130 electric arc furnaces in the U.S. and Europe capable of using MINSCAN, providing us with a significant runway to grow over the next several years. In summary, we expect these investments to generate $100 million in incremental revenue over the next 12 to 18 months as they ramp up. And these are just a few examples of the investments that we've recently made to support the growth opportunities for which we have strategically positioned ourselves. I want to be clear that these are just a subset of the initiatives that we are pursuing. Other areas like PFAS remediation, natural skin care additives, geothermal drilling products and further penetration of our greensand bond technologies into Asia are all progressing nicely as well. Together, they provide several significant pathways for us to drive sales higher going forward. And when our weaker markets begin to rebound, we see that providing additional upside to our top line growth. With that, let's have Erik take you through more detail on our third quarter financials and our fourth quarter outlook. Erik? Erik Aldag: Thanks, Doug, and good morning, everyone. I'll start by providing an overview of our third quarter results followed by a review of the performance of our segments, and I'll wrap up with our outlook for the fourth quarter. Following my remarks, I'll turn the call over for questions. Now let's review our third quarter results. Overall, our team delivered another solid performance while continuing to navigate mixed market conditions. Third quarter sales were $532 million, up 1% sequentially and 1% higher than the prior year. You can see in the sequential sales bridge on the top right, that sales increased in 3 of our 4 product lines. In Consumer & Specialties, our Household & Personal Care product line was up 2% sequentially and driven by increases in cat litter and other consumer specialties. In Specialty Additives, sales were 2% lower sequentially as we moved into the seasonally lower period for residential construction applications. In Engineered Solutions, sales in high-temperature technologies increased slightly from the second quarter as higher sales to steel customers were partly offset by lower sales to foundry customers in North America. And we saw a 5% sequential increase in our environmental and infrastructure product line, driven by increased demand for offshore services as well as infrastructure drilling products. To summarize, conditions played out mostly as we anticipated, and I'll take you through more of the details when I cover the segments in a moment. Operating income for the quarter was $78 million, down 1% sequentially and versus the prior year, and operating margin was 14.7% of sales. In the operating income bridge on the bottom right of the slide, you can see that unfavorable volume and mix primarily in the Consumer & Specialty segment impacted income directly by $1 million. And lower volume also contributed to temporarily higher operating costs at a few of our facilities in the quarter. Higher pricing of $1 million offset inflationary input costs, including higher tariff costs in the third quarter. EBITDA was $100 million, up 1% from prior quarter and prior year and EBITDA margin was 18.8%. I'd like to point out that versus the third quarter last year, we've done well to offset $10 million of higher costs, including tariff costs raw material increases, energy and temporary increases like higher logistics costs associated with our U.S. cat litter plant upgrade. We offset these cost increases with a combination of productivity improvements, supply chain actions, price increases and our cost savings program. And I would also highlight as we move through the temporary cost increases, we should see margin improvement from these actions going forward. Earnings per share, excluding special items, was $1.55 , the same level as the second quarter and up 3% from last year, representing a record third quarter for the company. We recorded special items of $7.5 million in the quarter related to litigation expenses. Now let's turn to a review of our segments, beginning with Consumer & Specialties. Third quarter sales in the Consumer & Specialty segment were $277 million, flat sequentially and down 1% from last year. In Household & Personal Care, sales improved by 2% from prior quarter to $130 million, driven by improving volumes in our cat litter business and continued progress on growth initiatives in consumer specialty applications. Most notably in edible oil and renewable fuel purification, where sales grew 18% with last year. In Specialty Additives, sales were $148 million, 2% lower sequentially. The Global Paper and Packaging volumes were flat compared with the second quarter as volume increases in Asia offset lower volumes in North America. Meanwhile, demand for residential construction products was incrementally softer in the quarter, which pulled volumes lower for the product line. Despite the volume pressure in Specialty Additives, the segment continued to build on the operating performance gains we saw in the second quarter, delivering a modest improvement to operating margin sequentially. Operating income in the quarter was $37 million, representing a 13.5% of sales. Looking ahead to the fourth quarter, in Household & Personal Care, we expect continued sequential growth in cat litter, edible oil and renewable fuel purification. And in Specialty Additives, we're expecting lower sales sequentially, primarily driven by typical seasonality for residential construction products. We do expect softer-than-normal residential construction volumes in the fourth quarter as some customers are indicating they have efficient inventory levels heading into the winter months. and they are planning to adjust production schedules accordingly. Overall, for the segment, we expect sales to be flat or slightly lower sequentially. Now let's turn to the Engineered Solutions segment. Third quarter sales in the Engineered Solutions segment increased by 2% sequentially and grew 4% from prior year to $255 million. In the high temperature technologies product line, sales of $179 million were similar to prior quarter and up 2% year-over-year. Sales to steel customers in North America continued strong more than offsetting continued weakness in the Europe and Middle East steel market. Sales to foundry customers were mixed with North America volumes impacted by continued softness in the heavy truck and agricultural equipment markets, in addition to the typical third quarter customer maintenance outages. On the positive side, we saw continued strong demand across a with foundry volumes up 5% sequentially and up 17% versus prior year. In Environmental & Infrastructure, sales led by 5% sequentially and were up 9% from prior year driven by a for offshore services and strong pull for infrastructure drilling products. The segment did a nice job of mitigating tariff impacts and turned in another strong operating performance. Operating income was $45 million, and operating margin improved by 20 basis points sequentially to 17.6% of sales, a record level for the segment. Looking ahead to the fourth quarter, we expect environmental and infrastructure sales to be 10% to 15% lower sequentially and due to typical seasonality for large project activity. And in high-temperature technologies, we expect sales to be slightly lower sequentially as several of our foundry customers in North America have communicated longer than towards the end of the year. This is due to the continued softness seen in the agricultural equipment in markets and in anticipation of some acute automotive production disruptions. While these plans could change, our current outlook assumes a reduced number of foundry working days in December, along with the temporary margin impact of the associated lower productivity at our plant sites. Overall, we expect segment sales to be lower by around 5% sequentially. Now let me turn to a summary of our balance sheet and cash flow highlights. We delivered another solid cash flow performance in the third quarter. with free cash flow of $44 million. Capital expenditures totaled $27 million in the third quarter, and we remain on pace for approximately $100 million of capital investments for the full year. Some of the key investments that Doug outlined earlier will be commissioned during the fourth quarter with revenue ramping up in the beginning of 2026. And we expect that sort of cadence to continue into next year with additional start-ups expected throughout the first half. In total, we returned $20 million to shareholders in the third quarter through share repurchases and dividends in keeping with our stated balanced approach to capital deployment. Our balance sheet remains strong, and our net leverage ratio remains at 1.7x EBITDA. Below our target of 2x EBITDA. Now I'll summarize our outlook for the fourth quarter. Overall, we expect fourth quarter sales to be approximately 2% to 4% lower sequentially and primarily driven by seasonal patterns in a few of our end markets. Operating income for the quarter is expected to be between $65 million and $70 million, with earnings per share between $1.20 and $1.30. Our sales range of $510 million to $525 million considers a number of factors. On the positive side, we expect continued traction with our growth initiatives in Household & Personal Care. The cat litter business is gaining sales momentum and the fourth quarter is typically a strong one for cat litter. In addition, we expect continued growth in edible oil and renewable fuel purification. As I noted earlier, some of our customers serving the residential construction and foundry markets in the U.S. are signaling the potential for slower order patterns and extended outages around the holiday. Which would impact volumes of some relatively high incremental margin products in both our Specialty Additives and high-temperature technologies product lines. We are also watching for potential volatility in order patterns due to uncertainty around tariff policy. As we've communicated, we don't have a significant direct exposure to tariffs. However, we're mindful of potential near-term impacts on our customers. Our guidance takes all of these to accounts and where we land in the range depends on how they play out. In summary, we have positive momentum across a number of product lines as we head into the fourth quarter, and we are focused on delivering the growth initiatives that will carry this momentum into next year. With that, I'll turn the call over for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question today comes from Daniel Moore with CJS Securities. Dan Moore: Pet Care. It looks like you saw an uptick in catlier volumes in Q3. How should we think about -- you described the market dynamics, how do we think about those and the potential to get your pet care business back to that kind of term mid-single-digit plus growth rate cadence, not necessarily 2026 guide, but over the next 12 to 24 months. Erik Aldag: Yes. I appreciate that. Look, Dan, as I mentioned, let me start. I'll hand it over to DJ for some details. There's been a challenging pet term market for us. But this is one year we -- I tried to make some comments to highlight, if you take a longer-term view on the market and our performance in it, we've grown organically. I mean, we pieced the business together through some acquisitions. But even adjusting for some of those over the past 2 years, the business has grown by 9% compound. This year, a little bit flatter, we've seen some dynamics in the market that haven't been seen before in terms of something. We've made those adjustments. We have to work with our customers to make those adjustments. We've done that. We've seen those the volume improve as a result. And I think that carries through the fourth quarter and into next year. The biggest thing is, I think this is a good business for us, vertically integrated. We're global, obviously the largest with the technology, and we're confident in that long-term growth rate of it, that I mentioned, 3% to 4% North America, 6% to 8% in Asia. And we're making investments to be able to support the growth that we see and what's going to be coming forward and short term next year. I'll let D.J. talk about that. But these are good investments to make this business is going to revert to that growth rate. I never said it's going to be a straight line, but we will have that business growing next year. And I'll pass it over to DJ to let's give you some details on what we're securing with some of these upgrades. D. J. Monagle: Yes. Thanks, Dan. We kind of close out some of the market dynamics and then just give you a sense of the return back to that upper single-digit growth rate. On the North American market, what we did see early on, and we had mentioned in previous calls, these battles among the brands and is the only way I would describe the significant discounting that went on the brands, that caused some pretty big market share shifts within the brands, but it also had an effect on private label. Most pronounced at some specialty pet stores and grocery stores. We want to adjust with our private label partners and come up with a promotional schemes that still keep their private label relevant. That includes price discounts, changes in packaging, changes on shelf allocation. And so we feel that, that part of the market has stabilized pretty well. Doug had mentioned some pretty significant investments that reposition us for some future growth and coming pretty quickly, Doug had mentioned some contracts. So what you'll be seeing is of some $30 million plus of growth that will be going into next year as those contracts come online, that's towards the end of the first quarter. So we feel really good about that. There's some further growth that's capable or enabled by these investments in North America, especially with the product flexibility and packaging flexibility. The other thing Doug mentioned that we're very excited about is the reinvestment or the establishment of a new facility in Asia. We outgrew our old facility. We've got a lot of pull from a wide range in the market on how to take advantage of that growing region. And the difference for Asia with us is that it's a much broader and more profound mix of branded customers, global brands that want to grow in Asia, and we're well positioned to manufacture and co-pack for them, but also supporting the regional private labels as well as an emerging e-commerce business there. So this investment does that for us. So that would be additional growth. So I think the market has stabilized. We've made some adjustments with our branded partners, and we're very well positioned to get that back on track as projected in 2026. Dan Moore: Really helpful. And just pulling on that string. With all of those investments you're making, how do we think about just the overall increase in capacity as we exit '25. Douglas Dietrich: Well, some of them in North America, so the overall increase in capacity. So we're looking at that 6% to 8%. I'll start with China. We've made this investment. It's a new facility. We've put in capacity to probably sustain it for the next 3, 4 years. It's a big enough facility that we can add additional packaging capacity to meet that growth over a longer period of time. So that one, we're starting with modular kind of growth to meet the incremental investments over the next 10 years. In North America, the investments we've made in Canada and here in the U.S. and these 2 we talked about were a lot of quality upgrades handling upgrades. Again, these are 2 acquired facilities. So these were planned a long time ago. We needed to find the right time to be able to shift production around keeping our customers supplied while we made these changes. That's a lot of the cost increase you've seen and some of the margin -- a bit of the margin deterioration you saw this year. But that's -- we're through that. And we've made upgrades to material handling, quality packaging, packaging flexibility, throughput, all of which have reduced cost as well and should accrue to profitability going forward. So it's a number of different things, but we've got plenty of capacity in these facilities to grow at those rates for I'd say the next 5 to 10 years. But again, we can also have space in them to add modular packaging capacity if we need to keep up with the market. So I think we're in good position, Dan. These investments, they're not significant huge investments for us, but they did put us in a position to be able to secure higher quality contracts. And as DJ mentioned, we see about $30 million of that coming in starting in the second quarter next year. Dan Moore: Very helpful. Switching gears, Environmental and infrastructure, little pockets of strength there at least this quarter. I know maybe a more difficult seasonally slower period that we're going into, but just talk about momentum as we kind of think about -- or to think about turning the page towards '26. Douglas Dietrich: We saw some momentum. Actually, this quarter was in our offshore water treatment business, which has been doing really well. I guess I'll start with just construction and environmental remediation, relatively flat. We've seen some projects come I mentioned were specific projects. We thought that business would probably turn this year. It still hasn't Commercial construction, large building is still relatively flat. I think when -- it's interest rate sensitive. I do think when interest rates start to move down, we will see more of that on the shelf activity come into play, and that will be positive for us. But this quarter a lot of water filtration stemming from our capability around PFAS remediation, our ability to take complex things out of water. And that was some new projects we secured offshore, and that really came through in the quarter, and we think that's sustainable through the fourth and into next year. Dan Moore: Very helpful. Just in terms of the Q4 guide, revenue down 3-ish percent sequentially at midpoint, op income down more like low teens. So a little bit of a higher decremental margin. I appreciate the color on boundaries, which is high margin. Are there other corporate incentive comp, any other expenses, which you might call out in Q4 that could pinch margins more than might be typical given the volume decline? Erik Aldag: Yes. Thanks, Dan. This is Erik. No, nothing unusual from a corporate expense standpoint in the fourth quarter. The main drivers are really the ones that I called out in the prepared remarks in terms of the mix. I mean, the markets that are down seasonally for us, Q3 to Q4 and then the foundry and some of the residential construction products that we have, those are higher incremental margin products for us. And so we do have a mix impact that goes against us in terms of the decremental margins that we're seeing Q3 to Q4. The only other thing I would highlight is we had some strong margins in the third quarter in the Engineered Solutions segment. That was continued strong performance from the team's offsetting tariffs, continued strong productivity, variable conversion cost control. We did have a couple of the equipment sales in the high-temperature technologies product line that helped margins in the third quarter, and we don't have any of those equipment sales forecasted for the fourth quarter. But as Doug mentioned, we've got about 6 to come next year in terms of those MINSCAN installations. Operator: The next question is from Mike Harrison with Seaport Research Partners. Michael Harrison: I was hoping we could talk a little bit about the margin performance in Consumer & Specialties. I think it was relatively close to where you were expecting, but you are kind of tracking like 150 to 200 basis points lower than you were last year. I was hoping that we could maybe break down or help kind of bridge some of those key factors that have driven that weaker margin performance. Maybe just talk about how you see the discounting or promotional activity in pet care. Maybe mix, maybe the volume declines in Specialty Additives and on that resi high-margin stuff as well as the temporary cost from pet care expansions like -- can you help us understand what's going on there? And then maybe just directionally help us understand what that -- as we start to think about consumer and specialty margin into next year, how some of those items should trend? Erik Aldag: Yes. Thanks, Mike. This is Erik. So I think you hit on a lot of the key themes there. And actually, for the third quarter, the margins were right where we expected them to be for the segment. The largest driver there is some of these temporary cost impacts we have. I mean we have a significant upgrade going on at one of our U.S. cat litter plants. And we've had to move around production across our footprint in North America, and there's been an increase in logistics costs as a result. So that's the primary driver of the margin pressure, I'd say, from Q2 to Q3 -- in Q2 as well as in Q3. That facility is going to be ramping up here in the fourth quarter. And so we're moving through that more temporary impact. You mentioned discounting. We're not seeing a negative margin impact because we've been helping our retail partners with discounting. And the reason for that is we've had some incremental pricing discounts on our products but it's helped with our volumes. And so as we get more volumes running through these plants, there is significant fixed cost leverage benefit that we get. And so we haven't seen margin donation from any of the discounting that we've been participating with our retail partner. As far as where this is going, the segment is set up well for 15%. We were very close to 15% last year, and we're going to get there again as we move through some of these more temporary issues. But that's our target. This segment should be delivering 15% operating margin. Douglas Dietrich: Michael, the only thing I'll add, and I'll put that same as echo what Erik just said. We'll get back to and probably exceed last year's margins in the segment. And that's going to come from a couple of things. A, the ending of the temporary logistics expense, number one, and some of the other ancillary expenses that came across as we made these investments in these facilities. Two, we have seen some lower volumes due to this discounting, which we've adjusted. And as Erik just mentioned, those volumes are coming back. That is helping profitability. And three, the additional volume that we're going to be putting through these plants next year, starting in the second quarter, is going to be very accretive to those margins. And so I think, as Erik said, we're set up to get back to last year's margins next year and probably see them with some of this additional volume. Michael Harrison: All right. That's very helpful. And then maybe just on the investments that you're making in Turkey with the Bleaching Earth for renewable fuel. . Can you help us understand what the dollar amount of that investment looks like? How much is your capacity expanding? And I guess, should we think about the investments as mostly mine expansion or is there something that you're doing on the, I guess, refining or processing side that's helping to improve your capabilities as well. Douglas Dietrich: Sure. I want to be careful about giving some information out there and how much capacity we're putting into the market. So I won't give you a ton give you a percentage. -- again, we built the facility 8 years ago. We built it with enough room to expand it. At the time, we want -- we were looking more at the edible oil market, which grows at about 3%, 4% kind of GDP business and we had a great product for that application. Since that time, we saw the development of the market for renewable fuels. And we started supplying that market probably 4 years ago, 5 years ago, and then more recently, the development of sustainable aviation fuel through regulation changes in Europe, in particular, now U.S. has really started to pull that product much harder. And so this expansion, $9 million, $10 million type expansion. We've expanded the plant by about 30% and in terms of capacity to be able to meet the growing demand. Like I said, we've been growing at about 20% per year for the past 8 years. But a large portion of what's happening is what started as a 100% edible oil kind of application and product sales has now moved probably 34% of our business is now in sustainable aviation fuel and renewable fuels. And that's growing very quickly. And so this expansion was -- it's going to supply both, but it will probably be consumed very quickly with some of the renewable fuels. We have sufficient reserves in the region for decades. And we will look probably to expand the facility again over the next 5, 6 years, depending on how the market goes. But this one is an incremental step within the current footprint. The next one might be a whole new footprint if we continue to grow at this pace. Michael Harrison: All right. Very helpful. And then last question I have is just on the cash flow and maybe some of the working capital dynamics. You mentioned the higher logistics costs, but I assume you're carrying some additional inventory in the pet care business as you work through these expansions. And then is there anywhere else that maybe inventory is a little bit elevated right now? I'm thinking, in particular, maybe MGO as you're trying to navigate or mitigate some of the tariff impacts. Just trying to think about how working title trends in Q4 and how we should think about it as we're starting to look at next year? Erik Aldag: Yes. Thanks, Mike. So in terms of working capital, AR, AP, both in good shape. We watch those metrics closely and no major changes there. We are holding on to a little more inventory, and you touched on it to a few of the spots there. a little higher inventory in pet care, but some strategic positions, I would say, in the high temperature business. MGO being one of them, every couple of years, there's a river closure in the middle of the U.S. that we have to work around and we build up some inventories to manage around those. We're going to be working through a lot of those inventory positions in the fourth quarter. And so we should be ending the year sort of at a more typical level in terms of the inventories. We'll still have some of those strategic positions in place, but more of a typical level from an inventory perspective. From a cash flow standpoint, we're expecting a strong fourth quarter as usual for the company, strong cash from ops, the free cash flow number is going to depend a little bit on the pace of some of these growth capital investments that we've talked about. We've got a number of them ramping up in the fourth quarter. And so the capital number that ends up happening in the fourth quarter could depend a little bit on the timing of how those come through. But overall, expecting a strong cash flow quarter in the fourth. Operator: The next question is from Pete Osterland with Truth Securities. Peter Osterland: I wanted to start just by following up on the recent investments across pet care and Bleaching Earth, so you've talked about an aggregate targeting $50 million of growth investments supporting $100 million of additional revenue -- just in aggregate, how much of those targets are represented by what you've already in a currently in progress. And to the extent that there's more to come, we're across your portfolio are you still targeting for additional organic growth investments? Erik Aldag: So if I understand -- Pete, this is Erik. If I understand the question correctly, the $50 million of CapEx and the $100 million of revenue that we've talked about, those are the investments that Doug laid out today in terms of the highlight on growth capital projects that we have. But importantly, that is just a subset of the growth opportunities that we have much of the opportunity we have is supported by existing capacity, and so it isn't requiring necessarily growth capital to support it. Those are just investments that we wanted to highlight supporting the growth opportunity. Douglas Dietrich: Yes. I guess I'll add, Pete, this is just -- when I look at -- when you look at those markets, and so the North America pet litter market, the Asia pet litter market, the bleaching earth market of $1.1 billion and the renewable fuels growing as the fastest segment. And then also with paper and packaging and our MI scans. -- just these investments are $100 million over the next 12 to 18 months, right? But that trend continues. That's not just the opportunity in those markets alone, right? I think just the MI scans, if you do the math on the MI scans, each MINSCAN is probably worth to us $1 million -- $1 million to $2 million depending on the size of the vessel that is going on, et cetera. So you're looking at just the 18 that we've installed are probably worth about $20-plus million of reoccurring revenue every year. And there's a whole runway of those to go. Not that we'll get 130 million of them, 100% of them, we might. But that market, that's a $0.25 billion market for us just in that product line, right? Look at the bleaching earth market with renewable fuels. We're targeting $75 million of growing this business to $75 million over the next 2 years. Pet care, we're a $400 million business. We think that business grows with some of the investments we're making to $500 million, and that's been our target for 2027. And I think we're on target for that. Given this year, it might be another 6 months, 9 months, but we're still seeing that, that business is another $100 million to grow. And these investments that we've made will support that. So all the way down the list, you're looking at hundreds of millions of dollars of opportunity that we positioned ourselves for -- these investments are the first step in tapping into them, but we've been making these investments over the past 5 years. This is our third bleaching earth expansion. We've upgraded these other facilities in pet care. Now we're upgrading these 2 or 3 key ones. And so these are investments that we've made before, we've delivered on. We're making them again, and they're setting us up for that continued growth. So I think you're going to see that. So I took your question a little bit further, but these are big opportunities, but we've positioned ourselves in these markets for these opportunities, and now we're taking advantage of. Peter Osterland: No, that's very helpful. And just kind of following up on the pet care investment specifically that you're expecting to finish by the end of '25. I guess what's the time frame to realize that run rate of incremental revenue that you discussed? I mean, is it kind of a gradual ramp throughout the course of '26, so you kind of expect that to continue driving growth into '27? Or how should we think about that? Douglas Dietrich: For pet care, in particular, as DJ mentioned, these investments will set us up for longer-term growth. But in particular, we've secured about $25 million, $30 million of contracts on an annual basis that should start to ramp up through the first, but be full run rate by the second. So I think if you snap the chalk line at the end of March and ran 12 months, we think that's $20 million, $25 million of revenue right there. So next year, probably expecting $20 million, $18 million of that $25 million to hit in pet care alone, and that's going to continue. And we've got capacity -- further capacity in China for that market that continues to grow. So we think we're getting this thing back on track. These investments position ourselves with high-quality operations, low-cost operations and strategically located to deliver on the business. And so I think you'll start to see that growth rate revert in the second quarter. Peter Osterland: Very helpful. And then just lastly, I wanted to ask for any update on Talc. It looks like litigation expenses have trended higher each quarter during this year. Just was wondering if you have any update to share on the time frame or expected cost to resolve? And would you expect that until it's resolved, with the $7.5 million of litigation expenses you saw in the third quarter, would that be the run rate of what to expect going forward? Douglas Dietrich: This quarter was a little bit higher in terms of activity. I think our average has been more $3 million to $4 million per quarter. We think it probably reverts back to that. I will say that we're continuing very diligently to work on establishing a 524G trust. There's not a lot significant in terms of updates to report this quarter. We're waiting to hear back from the Southern District of Texas District Court on a number of motions to figure out which lane we'll be in, whether it will be in the District Court or back in the bankruptcy court. And as I mentioned, we're continuing to work to establish that 524. We are wide open to getting this done and getting it done quickly. But the court systems, they take their time and they schedule themselves, and we have limited ability to kind of impact that portion of it. But -- so not a lot of progress, but rest assured, we are working to get this behind us as fairly and as finally and as quickly as possible. With regard to costs, the reserve that we have on our balance sheet, we see that as sufficient for the ongoing both establishment of the trust and the cost it's going to take to get there. So no change to what we see in terms of the reserve. Operator: This concludes our question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to Doug Dietrich for any closing remarks. Douglas Dietrich: Thanks, everyone, for joining this quarter. We appreciate the questions. We appreciate the attention and interest in Minerals Technologies, and we'll chat with you again at the end of January. Thank you very much. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good morning, and welcome to FIBRA Macquarie's Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Call and Webcast. My name is Rob, and I'll be your operator for this call. [Operator Instructions] I would now like to turn the conference call over to Nikki Sacks. Please go ahead. Nikki Sacks: Thank you, and good morning, everyone. Thank you for joining FIBRA Macquarie's third quarter 2025 earnings conference call and webcast. Today's call will be led by Simon Hanna, our Chief Executive Officer; and Andrew McDonald-Hughes, our CFO. Before I turn the call over to Simon, I'd like to remind everyone that this presentation is proprietary, and all rights are reserved. The presentation has been prepared solely for informational purposes and is not a solicitation or an offer to buy or sell any securities. Forward-looking statements in this presentation are subject to a number of risks and uncertainties. Our actual results, performance, prospects or opportunities could differ materially from those expressed in or implied by the forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements are made as of the date of this presentation. We undertake no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statements after the completion of this presentation, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as required by law. Additionally, on this conference call, we may refer to certain non-IFRS measures as well as to U.S. dollars, which are U.S. dollar equivalent amounts, unless otherwise specified. As usual, we've prepared supplementary materials that we may reference during the call. If you've not already done so, I would encourage you to visit our website at fibramacquarie.com and download these materials. A link to the materials can be found under the Investors, Events and Presentations tab. And with that, it is my pleasure to hand the call over to FIBRA Macquarie's Chief Executive Officer, Simon Hanna. Simon? Simon Hanna: Thank you, Nikki, and good morning, everyone. I'm excited to share that we delivered another solid quarter of financial and operating performance with record-breaking results across key metrics. At the same time, we executed on both strategic and opportunistic initiatives that create value for our certificate holders and continue to position us for sustainable growth. The third quarter showcased the strength of our business model, starting at the top line. For the quarter, we achieved record consolidated revenues, up 8.4% in underlying U.S. dollar terms over the prior year. This momentum translated through to our quarterly U.S. dollar AFFO, which increased an impressive 6.6% annually. [ AFFO ], our quarterly distribution reflects a significant 17% increase from last year, all whilst maintaining a comfortable and prudent payout ratio. Turning to our industrial portfolio. We continue to see strong performance amidst a subdued market backdrop with average rental rates increasing 6.8% year-over-year. Notably, we achieved another quarter of double-digit renewal spreads, 17% on negotiated leases with high quarterly retention of almost 90%. Our full year 2025 performance continues to shape up rather well, perhaps best demonstrated by the 6.1% increase in U.S. dollar same-store NOI year-to-date. So in summary, we are very satisfied with the sustained momentum enjoyed from our industrial portfolio through to today, and we expect that momentum to carry through to the fourth quarter, providing for a strong finish to the year. Moving to our capital allocation and asset recycling initiatives. We had an active quarter closing on a number of transactions. I'm excited with the continued growth of our Mexico City footprint with the acquisition of a prime 250,000 square foot logistics facility. We acquired the property through a sale and leaseback for $35 million, leased to a leading global consumer company under a 3-year U.S. dollar-denominated contract. It not only provides 2025 NOI and AFFO contribution, but also positions us to capture embedded real rental rate growth. This acquisition exemplifies our thoughtful approach to capital allocation. In this case, we secured a scarce well-located infill asset that enhances our portfolio quality, while providing visible earnings and NAV accretion. We're optimistic about repeating this type of success in other deal opportunities under our review, alongside pursuing additional strategic land investments in our pipeline. We also continue to selectively pursue asset recycling initiatives. And during the third quarter, we sold a vacant industrial property in Chihuahua City for $14 million, representing a 30% premium to book value. This transaction demonstrates our commitment to active portfolio management, allowing us to accretively recycle capital into attractive opportunities like the Mexico City acquisition, I just mentioned. Turning to our retail portfolio. We also delivered strong results and achieved a post-pandemic record occupancy of 93.6%. Rising occupancy and rental rates contributed to annual NOI growth of 4.1%, essentially reaching record levels of operating cash flow. We maintain a cautiously optimistic outlook on the operating performance of our retail portfolio and expect the medium-term growth trends to continue. Looking at the broader market environment. While we acknowledge the ongoing uncertainty around trade policy, we also remain confident in Mexico's strategic position within North American supply chains. The long-term fundamentals that have driven Mexico's manufacturing growth over the past decades remain firmly intact, including high-quality labor, proximity to major U.S. markets and continued trade advantages. Notwithstanding the evolving geopolitical landscape, our high-quality portfolio, internalized platform and strategic market positioning, enables us to continue to deliver strong results and capitalize on growth opportunities. It is also worth mentioning our unique vertically integrated platform gives us, amongst other benefits privileged access to market intelligence and allows us to respond swiftly to changing conditions. This positioning, combined with our ability to capture embedded rental growth allows us to continue delivering value to certificate holders, while building a long-term portfolio resilience. Before turning the call over to Andrew, I want to highlight our ongoing commitment to sustainability. We are proud of achieving 3 green stars in our 2025 credit assessment, including a score of 94 points for the development benchmark, exceeding our peers on a regional and global basis. We're also taking this opportunity to publish our annual ESG report that is now available on our website, which provides a comprehensive overview of our sustainability initiatives and performance. Andrew, over to you. Andrew McDonald-Hughes: Thank you, Simon. I'm pleased to report another quarter of strong financial performance that reflects both the quality of our portfolio and the effectiveness of our capital allocation strategy. For the third quarter, we delivered AFFO of USD 29.7 million, representing a solid 6.6% increase year-over-year and demonstrated our continued ability to grow earnings on a per certificate basis. Our balance sheet remains exceptionally well positioned. During the quarter, we successfully completed the refinancing and expansion of our sustainability-linked credit facility. This USD 375 million facility comprises a $150 million 4-year term loan and a $225 million 3-year revolving credit facility. The transaction delivered multiple strategic benefits. Firstly, it enhanced our liquidity position to approximately USD 625 million, providing substantial financial flexibility to fund growth initiatives. Second, it reduced our weighted average cost of debt to approximately 5.5%, while extending our debt maturities. And third, the sustainability-linked features align our financing strategy with our ESG objectives through green building certification targets with the sustainability-linked portion of our drawn debt now representing 68%. As of September 30, we maintain a prudent debt profile being 92% fixed rate with our CNBV regulatory debt to total asset ratio standing at 33.2% and a robust debt service coverage ratio of 4.6x. Embedded firepower stands at approximately USD 500 million, whilst managing to a 35% LTV ratio, including the potential recycling of our retail portfolio. Turning to our guidance. We are reaffirming our FY '25 AFFO per certificate guidance to a range of MXN 2.8 to MXN 2.85 and our FY '25 AFFO guidance in underlying U.S. dollar terms to a range of $115 million to $119 million, representing annual growth of up to 5%. We are also reaffirming our cash distribution guidance for FY '25 of MXN 2.45 per certificate. This represents a 16.7% increase in peso terms and translates to an expected FY '25 AFFO payout ratio of approximately 87% based on our guidance midpoint, representing a well-covered distribution. This guidance assumes stable market conditions and no material deterioration of the geopolitical landscape or Mexico's key trading relationships, including the potential implementation of tariffs. Looking ahead, our strong balance sheet, ample liquidity and disciplined approach to capital allocation position us well to navigate market uncertainties, while selectively pursuing growth opportunities that create long-term value for our certificate holders. In closing, I want to recognize the exceptional work of our entire team. Their dedication and expertise continue to drive our operational excellence and strategic execution. With that, I'll ask the operator to open the phone lines for your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And the first question comes from the line of Andre Mazini with Citigroup. André Mazini: Yes. So my question is around the potential economic deceleration Mexico is supposed to be having now in the second half of 2025. A lot of talk on that among investors and media. So I wanted to understand if you're feeling that this economic deceleration in your conversation with tenants, maybe splitting between the 3 tenant types, industrial light manufacturing, industrial logistics and the retail tenants as well. Simon Hanna: Yes. Thanks, Andre. Thanks for the question. Yes, I guess it's a bit of a dynamic backdrop out there. As you can appreciate, really where we're much more correlated with the U.S. GDP, U.S. economy more so than Mexico, and that's obviously going to be where most of the activity will basically drive outcomes for us. When we break it down between those 3 categories, look, I'd say, in general, for industrial light manufacturing, fair to say that our volumes production is slightly off compared to last year. When you look at auto parts production, it's off around sort of 7% compared to last year. So I'd say nothing that's fundamentally causing a problem there from a demand perspective, maybe a slightly lower utilization. But in general, sort of, I'd say, steady demand backdrop and something which we expect to prevail regardless of that Mexican -- Mexican economy dynamic, more so just to do with how trends continue out of the U.S. So that will very much then link into the logistics part of industrial, at least for the business-to-business, where we have most of our exposure. It will be correlated more or less with the trend on light manufacturing. So again, I'd say for both manufacturing and the B2B logistics going pretty steady, and I think the outlook is steady as well. Obviously, the name of the game there is really USMCA as a real catalyst to change that demand environment probably heading towards the second half of next year. Retail, yes, definitely more sort of linked to Mexican economy fundamentals. But I'd say the consumer remains in pretty good health. We're seeing good employment, wage numbers, et cetera. general foot traffic and activity in the shopping centers is we've been happy with that. You would have seen some of the encouraging metrics come through the quarter, record occupancy, rising rental rates, same-store were up about 5% year-over-year at the NOI level. So I'd say generally good conditions there. Cinema is continuing to struggle a little bit more, I'd say, compared to the rest of the tenant mix to be fair. Gym is doing rather well. Supermarkets is doing rather well, restaurants rather well. So that's probably cinema probably the main weakness that we're still looking for a bit of a pickup. But again, we have a cautiously optimistic outlook as well when it comes to retail, expecting fairly steady demand environment. So overall, that leads us up to a pretty good outlook for heading into 2026. Operator: The next question is from the line of [ Helena Ruiz ] with [indiscernible]. Unknown Analyst: I have a couple. The first one is on the stress. I was wondering if you could give us like any color if you expect them to remain like at these levels for the last quarter of the year and next year? And also, if you could give us a breakdown like this growth is coming from all regions like especially one market? And then my second question is on occupancy, like looking at each market, like most markets remain like really strong. The only one that saw a drop in occupancy are Monterrey and Juarez. So if you could also give us a bit of color on why the occupancy fell in those markets? Simon Hanna: Thanks, Helena, for those questions. Yes. Look, when it comes to lease spreads, firstly, taking that one on. Look, pretty good quarter again, around 17%. We have a sort of a last 12-month run rate of around 20%. So that's been tracking, I'd say, at a pleasing level for us. When we look ahead, virtually 0 rollover on 4Q, so it doesn't really move the needle. So we should be somewhere close to that run rate level on a full year basis. Outlook for next year, it's still early. We have about 16% rollover, 17% rollover next year. So we have some opportunity there to continue capturing, I would say, positive momentum when it comes to spreads, a little bit early to say how much. Obviously, the -- a little bit there depend on market conditions. But I think we -- we'd like to think that we can capture positive momentum in the same way we're seeing through the balance of this year. When it comes to some of those, I'd say, market-by-market dynamics, and I'd say there's -- it's quite an active market out there even despite the subdued new leasing conditions. I would say, in general, we are seeing that the same dynamic we have today is what we've seen for the last couple of quarters, where steady occupancy and operating trends with USMCA being the real catalyst to, we think unlock new demand. But taking that down to, I guess, market levels to answer your question, Monterrey is probably the most active market. It's also one of the biggest in the country, around 185 million square feet. So we still see a lot of activity there, a lot under construction. So supply is still coming through. And that's always been the Monterrey way to be fair, but there's probably around 8 million under construction. Amongst all that, though, on a quarterly basis, we're seeing sort of close to 4 million new leasing to basically offset some move-outs of about 4 million. So no doubt, there's a little bit of vacancy there north of 5%. And you can probably say it's more of a tenant market than a landlord market these days. But -- when it comes to the type of product that we're delivering in the market, this is in Monterrey, but in other markets as well, I'd say that we're at the upper end of that tier. And that pro forma vacancy is not so much of an issue for us. We're looking at in terms of the best quality buildings in the market, that's who our competition is because that's what we're building in terms of location, quality of building size, utilities, et cetera. So that real competition is much more narrow. So whether you're even talking someone like Tijuana, where, again, you're seeing a lot of vacancy or supply come on, it doesn't really change the equation for us. We're in the best part of town with some of those flagship developments up against really just a handful of building competitors. And so that noise around sort of 13%, 14% vacancy in Tijuana or 8% in Monterrey, it's not as relevant when you actually just boil it down to what the hard competition is against our Class A development product and we feel very well positioned to have some activity on that as we get through the year in USMCA in particular. Juarez, I'd say, is probably remains pretty soft. That one has got a lot more sort of undifferentiated vacancy. It's a bit more of a slower market than Monterrey at the moment, much more USMCA linked as well. So I think we expect more activity in that second half of next year or maybe the summer. Reynosa, again, sort of a key northern market, I'd say, very, very quiet as well and had a good positive absorption quarter for the quarter. But on a year-to-date basis, it's pretty flat in terms of absorption. And again, you'd expect that to be more correlated with USMCA pickup. Operator: The next question is from the line of Jorel Guilloty with Goldman Sachs. Wilfredo Jorel Guilloty: So my first question is around the recent M&A that you announced or mentioned in the report in Mexico City. So you bought an asset $35 million, sale leaseback. And back of the envelope, this is like $1,500 per square meter. So I wanted to get a sense of what cap rate you saw for this asset? And also, if the idea here is on further capital allocation, if it's in Mexico City that you want to focus on. And then -- and I'm sorry if you spoke about this earlier, but I wanted to ask about Monterrey and Juarez where you saw occupancy declines of 300 and 120 basis points each on a sequential basis. So I wanted to get a sense of what drove that, if it's 1 tenant or multiple, just to understand if this is a one-off or a trend. So any color would be very helpful. Simon Hanna: Okay. Thanks, Jorel. Great questions there. Yes, the Mexico City acquisition, that was a fantastic one to do is irreplaceable location around 15 minutes from downtown in the Vallejo submarket. And so that's a great last mile district to be in for sure. We're able to access that facility, really thinking about the stabilized cap rate at around a 10% level U.S. dollar sort of the rental as well. So that's the way we're looking at it sort of seeing that stabilize into a 10% cap. Now it's got an initial 3-year lease period there with the user. So -- sort of coming in at sort of an 8% area, but that's definitely below where we think the market rates are. So just thinking about that on a real embedded rental rate growth profile when you actually look at 3 years down the track, where you think that should land around 10%. And so if you're able to access Mexico City last mile stabilized 10%, dollarized 250,000 square foot, we take that all day long, and we're very excited about that. And yes, potentially, there could be 1 or 2 other opportunistic deals like that, that could come along. We're currently looking at 1 deal in particular and we'd like to think that maybe there's an opportunity to do that opportunistically. Again, let's see, so I think that was a great transaction to pull off from a capital allocation point of view. And I'm happy to say, repeat that success. Moving to the second question, on Monterrey, Juarez. So yes, I think from our own perspective, we -- in line with the market trends, we did see some vacancy there. But when you actually look at what drove that year-over-year, pretty simple story, Jorel, in the sense that we just delivered some Class A product that has not been leased up. So it's been added into our inventory. Both fantastic buildings, and we think very marketable. And again, something that will probably be more linked to USMCA ultimately, given the type of buildings and locations they're at. So we feel very good about the buildings that have been added to inventory, even though they're unleased in the short term. We do think they've got great income potential over the medium term. And we actually take the step back there, Jorel, actually not just what we've delivered in Monterrey and Juarez, but the other Class A product we have that basically has income potential and you add that up in terms of sort of getting close to 1 million square feet around the country. The exciting thing there is that we actually do have some real embedded growth that I don't think has been properly priced into our valuation or share price. And any type of a meaningful lease up there on that sort of Class A development product that we have, we're fully invested. It's basically built product ready to be leased up, mainly subject to USMCA, if you want to say that. That's got the potential ability to add something like, I'd say, comfortably north of $10 million at the NOI level. And you can obviously just drop that down to AFFO as well given that we're essentially fully funded and built that. So that's a pretty exciting sort of short-term opportunity we think, to help drive NOI and earnings is to basically take advantage of improving market conditions into next year, particularly with USMCA to trigger that lease-up. Wilfredo Jorel Guilloty: And a quick follow-up, if I may. So the sale leaseback opportunity, you mentioned there's a few in Mexico City, but are there opportunities such as those in other markets that you're in? And would it be focused on logistics? Simon Hanna: Yes. I think the answer is there are. Obviously, we're sort of looking at selective opportunities here. We particularly like Mexico City Logistics. That's a favored market for us where we'd like to increase our footprint. There are other opportunities in those other large consumption markets as well, sort of more of a logistics spend, you could say. But as I say, when you look actually see what's in our immediate pipeline and possible opportunities, we're thinking more Mexico City as being executable in the short term. Operator: The next question is from the line of Alejandra Obregon with Morgan Stanley. Alejandra Obregon: Mine is on capital allocation as well. So I was just wondering if you can provide some color on how you're thinking of your uses of cash for 2026. I mean if we split it between dividends, acquisitions, development, how would that look like in 2026? And what are the elements that will get you to any sort of decision on the mix on that front? And then the second one is on the M&A market. So I was just wondering if you're seeing any change in sentiment or acceleration in M&A activity that perhaps could trigger some recycling opportunities for you other than the sale and leaseback that you just mentioned? Simon Hanna: Sure. Yes. Thanks, Alejandra. So yes, look, I think in terms of capital allocation, fairly consistent outlook with how we currently have been deploying our capital. I think the main focus in the medium to long-term is going to be on that industrial development program. We have a land bank there of around 5 million square feet of buildable GLA in core markets. So that's something that we can flex up in terms of development activity. As you know, we've been doing 0 construction starts for the last few quarters. But as we get better visibility on demand fundamentals, that will remain the primary avenue of how we allocate our capital into those development properties, mainly on a spec basis, you could say. We remain also interested in pursuing certain opportunities in the short term. They boil down, as I say, one is 2 opportunistic acquisitions where we can access those sort of development like returns, if you want to call it that, something like the 10% cap Mexico City. If we can do that on a more sort of a bite-sized basis to complement what we're doing on the development program, that's great. I would say the other investment portal would be through strategic land bank investments to basically complement and add to the $5 million that we have so that we will basically continue that runway for building out getting back to that sort of 1 million to 2 million square feet of velocity on a medium- to long-term basis is where you want to be. And adding to that land bank will be an important part of that equation. When it comes to buyback, I guess that's obviously another opportunity. I'm not sure, Andrew, if you wanted to give color on that. Andrew McDonald-Hughes: Yes, happy to. I think as we've said previously, we continue to favor allocating capital to development and value-add opportunities where we see obviously; a, you have a much lesser impact on the balance sheet over the long-term. You're not impacting liquidity overall and you're setting yourself up for valuation upside and the growth of those underlying assets. And so we'll continue to do that. I think historically, we've guided to in the order of $100 million to $150 million of development per year. We've obviously been softer this year given the broader macro backdrop, but we continue to work towards some permitting and predevelopment works with respect to the recent acquisitions that we made in both Guadalajara and Tijuana. And I think there's a good opportunity for those particular projects to progress over the next 12 months. And I think more to the point, we see a broader opportunity for future growth with the embedded potential recycling opportunity of our retail portfolio, along with the broader liquidity that we have access to through the balance sheet, which really sets us up for in the order of $500 million worth of potential firepower over the medium term. So ultimately, from a growth perspective, over the near term, there's a deep sense of embedded value with the development projects that we have delivered to date that are well positioned for lease-up once we see the tailwinds return to the markets, which we're positive on with respect to how that looks over the short to medium term. And just with what we have already completed and delivered; that's in excess of $10 million in potential NOI contribution over the coming years. And we think that, that will come to fruition and have a good line of sight to lease up on those properties as we go through the USMCA renewal and have more, I think, surety on the tariff and macro backdrop going forward through 2026 and into 2027. So overall, I think broadly speaking, from a capital allocation standpoint and the growth opportunities that the business is well positioned. Alejandra Obregon: Excellent. That was very clear. Operator: The next question is from the line of Alan Macias with Bank of America. Alan Macias: My question was answered, but just going back to M&A, anything on the table regarding the retail sector? Simon Hanna: Yes. Thanks, Alan. Good to hear you. So I think retail, we're definitely very satisfied with the general trend of what we're seeing in operating financial metrics at the risk of repeating myself, but happy to say at 93.6%, record occupancy on a post-pandemic basis, NOI essentially at record levels, up around sort of $7 million, $8 million quarterly run rate. It's been a fantastic contributor to the overall returns. As we think about operational performance, probably a little bit more upside to go, I think, even as good as it's been, that we are seeing some interesting opportunities to add to that overall, NOI performance, and that will obviously lead into valuation also becoming higher. And as you think about that sort of valuation number, it's not insignificant by any means, sort of -- we're talking sort of $300 million plus. And so the interesting dynamic that we're seeing just as NOI continues to improve is obviously a more conducive interest rate backdrop with the interest rates locally falling from, let's say, 10% to sub-8% and you're sort of getting into positive leverage territory and sort of more compelling M&A backdrop. So we like the sound of that in terms of how that's all converging and [indiscernible] for an ability to start thinking about that sort of medium-term opportunity that Andrew mentioned around recycling. And really, that's what we've got to be thinking about in terms of -- apart from that short-term catalyst to grow earnings, which is really simple, which is just to lease up the Class A stuff that we've built and is ready for lease-up. The medium-term opportunity is certainly quite exciting and quite compelling when we think about that embedded firepower of around $500 million, that really allows us to flex up when it comes to building out the land bank and thinking about additional investments. We feel quite excited and well positioned with the ability to do that. Operator: Thank you. At this time, there are no further questions. I'd like to turn the floor back to management for closing remarks. Simon Hanna: Yes. Thank you for that, Rob, and thank you for everyone for participating in today's call. Along with Andrew, I would like to thank all of our stakeholders for your ongoing support, and we very much look forward to speaking with you over the coming days and weeks as well as updating you again at the end of the quarter. So have a great one. Thank you. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for joining our presentation today. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Thank you for standing by, and welcome to First Western Financial's Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] I would now like to hand the call over to Tony Rossi. Please go ahead. Tony Rossi: Thank you, Latif. Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us today for First Western Financial's Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Call. Joining us from First Western's management team are Scott Wylie, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer; Julie Courkamp, Chief Operating Officer; and David Weber, Chief Financial Officer. We will use a slide presentation as part of our discussion this morning. If you've not done so already, please visit the Events and Presentations page of First Western's Investor Relations website to download a copy of the presentation. Before we begin, I'd like to remind you that this conference call contains forward-looking statements with respect to the future performance and financial condition of First Western Financial that involve risks and uncertainties. Various factors could cause actual results to be materially different from any future results expressed or implied by such forward-looking statements. These factors are discussed in the company's SEC filings, which are available on the company's website. I would also direct you to read the disclaimers in our earnings release and investor presentation. The company disclaims any obligation to update any forward-looking statements made during the call. Additionally, management may refer to non-GAAP measures, which are intended to supplement, but not substitute for the most directly comparable GAAP measures. The press release available on the website contains the financial and other quantitative information to be discussed today as well as the reconciliation of the GAAP to non-GAAP measures. And with that, I'd like to turn the call over to Scott. Scott? Scott Wylie: Thanks, Tony, and good morning, everybody. Starting on Slide 3. We executed well in the third quarter and saw positive trends in many areas of loan deposit growth, growth in our net interest income, well-managed expenses and generally stable asset quality. This resulted in an increase in our level of profitability and positive operating leverage. Market remains very competitive in terms of pricing on loans and deposits. We continue to successfully generate new loans and deposits by offering superior level of service, expertise and responsiveness rather than winning business by offering the highest rates on deposits or the lowest rates on loans as other banks are doing. We continue to maintain a conservative approach to new loan production with our disciplined underwriting and pricing criteria. However, as a result of the additions we made to our banking team over the past few years as well as generally healthy economic conditions in our markets, we had a solid level of loan production, which was well diversified across our markets and industries and loan types. As a result of our financial performance and the balance sheet management strategies, we had a further increase in both book value and tangible book value per share, and we used our strong capital position to repurchase some of our shares during the third quarter, which was accretive to our tangible book value per share. Moving to Slide 4. We generated net income of $3.2 million or $0.32 per diluted share in the third quarter, which is higher than the prior quarter and a 45% increase from our EPS in the third quarter of last year. With our prudent balance sheet management, our tangible book value per share increased by 1.2% this quarter. I'll turn over the call to Julie for some additional discussion on our balance sheet and trust and investment management trends. Julie? Julie Courkamp: Thanks, Scott. Turning to Slide 5. We'll look at the trends in our loan portfolio. Our loans held for investment increased $50 million from the end of the prior quarter. We continue to be conservative and highly selective in our new loan production. But with the higher level of productivity we are seeing from the additions to our banking team that we have made over the last several quarters, we are seeing a solid level of new loan production. While we are also seeing an increase in CRE loan demand that meet our underwriting and pricing criteria, new loan production was $146 million in the third quarter. The new loan production was well diversified with the largest increases coming in our residential and commercial real estate portfolios. And we are also getting deposit relationships with most of these new clients. We continue to be disciplined and are maintaining our pricing criteria, which resulted in the average rate on new loan production being 6.38% in the quarter. Moving to Slide 6. We can take a closer look at our deposit trends. Our total deposits increased $320 million from the end of the prior quarter. This was due to both new accounts and a buildup among existing client balances. We had an increase in noninterest-bearing deposits due to inflows we saw from title companies, driven by mortgage industry volume. Additionally, we had an increase in interest-bearing deposits as a result of the successful execution of our deposit gathering strategies. Now turning to trust and investment management on Slide 7. We had a $64 million decrease in our assets under management in the third quarter, primarily attributed to net withdrawals on low fee product categories, partially offset by improved market conditions on investment agency accounts. This resulted in increased $43 million or 2.7% during the quarter. Trust and investment management fees increased $100,000 from the prior quarter, primarily driven by the increase in investment agency AUM. Now I'll turn the call over to David for further discussion of our financials. David? David Weber: Thank you, Julie. Turning to Slide 8, we'll look at our gross revenue. Our gross revenue increased 8.7% from the prior quarter due to increases in both net interest income and noninterest income. Year-over-year, our gross revenue increased 15.5%. Now turning to Slide 9. We'll look at the trends in net interest income and margin. Our net interest income increased for the fourth consecutive quarter and increased 8.9% from the prior quarter, primarily due to an increase in our average interest-earning assets with the strong deposit growth we had contributing to our higher level of cash on the balance sheet. Our net interest income increased 25% relative to the third quarter of 2024. Our NIM decreased 13 basis points from the prior quarter to 2.54%. This was due to unfavorable mix shifts in both interest-earning assets and deposits as our deposit growth during the quarter was in higher cost money market accounts. The strong deposit growth during the quarter contributed to higher cash held on the balance sheet. As this liquidity is deployed into the loan portfolio during the fourth quarter, we expect to see NIM expansion. Now turning to Slide 10. Our noninterest income increased by more than $500,000 or 8.5%, which is 34% annualized from the prior quarter. This was primarily due to increases in all major fee categories, including trust and investment management fees, insurance fees and gain on sale of mortgage loans. The increase in gain on sale of mortgage loans was driven by a higher level of mortgage production and the increase in trust and investment management fees was driven by an increase in investment agency AUM as a result of improving market conditions. Now turning to Slide 11 and our expenses. Our noninterest expense increased by less than $1 million from the prior quarter. Most areas of noninterest expense were relatively consistent with the prior quarter as we continue to tightly manage expenses while also making investments in the business that we believe will positively impact our long-term performance. Turning to Slide 12. We'll look at our asset quality. As Scott indicated earlier, we saw generally stable trends in the loan portfolio in the third quarter with slight increases in NPLs and NPAs. This was primarily due to one loan that was downgraded during the quarter. And we had a minimal level of net charge-offs again this quarter. We had a slight increase in our allowance coverage from 75 basis points in the prior quarter to 81 basis points in the third quarter. Now I'll turn it back to Scott. Scott? Scott Wylie: Thanks, David. Turning to Slide 13, I'll wrap up with some comments about our outlook. Overall, we continue to see relatively healthy economic conditions in our markets, and we're seeing good opportunities to add both new clients and banking talent due to the ongoing disruption from M&A activity here in the Colorado market. Our loan deposit pipelines remain strong and should continue to result in solid balance sheet growth in the fourth quarter. In addition to balance sheet growth, we also expect to see positive trends in net interest margin, fee income and more operating leverage resulting from our disciplined expense control. Based on trends we're seeing in the portfolio and the feedback we're getting from our clients, we're not seeing anything to indicate that we'll experience any meaningful deterioration in asset quality. The positive trends we're seeing in a number of key areas are expected to continue, which we believe should result in steady improvement in our financial performance and further value being created for our shareholders going forward. So with that, we're happy to take your questions. Latif, if you could please open up the call. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Brett Rabatin of Hovde Group. Please go ahead, Brett. Brett Rabatin: I wanted to start with the deposits and the strong MMDA growth. And if I heard you correct, it sounds like that's a mix of internal efforts as well as maybe the mortgage department. Just any -- can you maybe go into a little more color there? And then are those levels sticky, the growth in the level? Scott Wylie: Well, I think we've talked about our efforts to grow deposits and the fact that, that would happen a little bit in a lumpy fashion wouldn't be a big surprise given our history here. We do see large deposits coming in and out. And in this case, I think the things that we saw that happened in Q3 are deposits that are going to stay here and give us a higher deposit base to grow from into Q4. Brett Rabatin: Okay. That's helpful. And then the NPA that you added during the quarter, any color on that credit? And then just was there part of the provision related to a specific reserve for that NPA? Scott Wylie: Yes. I think we have a number of credits that have performance issues over time, and this is one that is a C&I loan. We have been paying attention to it. We downgraded it in Q3, and we do have a specific provision for it. We expect it to be worked out and work through over time, the provision is more than adequate. Brett Rabatin: Okay. And then just maybe lastly, if I could ask on the margin. Julie, you indicated the margin would be up from here. Any magnitude that you could share in terms of what you think 4Q might look like, presuming we get a rate cut or 2? David Weber: Yes. I think we do have opportunity to see NIM expansion. If you look at the amount of liquidity that's sitting on the balance sheet, if we redeploy that into the loan portfolio at something like plus 200, I think that should drive NIM expansion there. We also certainly have the ability to continue to improve earning asset yields and lower our deposit costs. So I think we've got we've got a pretty nice path for NIM expansion in the fourth quarter. Brett Rabatin: Okay. David, any magnitude that you're thinking about in terms of basis points? David Weber: Yes. I'm thinking we can achieve something like 5 basis points of NIM expansion. Brett Rabatin: Okay. Okay. Great. Appreciate all the color. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Matthew Clark of Piper Sandler. Matthew Clark: I wanted to start on the spot rate on deposits at the end of the quarter. David Weber: Yes. Matthew, it was 3.04%. Matthew Clark: Okay. And then any updated thoughts on the beta you're looking to achieve with additional Fed rate cuts through the cycle and whether or not that starts to decline over time? David Weber: Yes. It has been declining, and it will certainly continue. We achieved somewhere around a 63% beta on money market accounts in the third quarter. And I think that's reasonable for the fourth quarter expectation as well. Matthew Clark: Okay. And then the expense run rate going forward, I think some of the increase this quarter was related to incentive comp. But what are your thoughts on the run rate here in the fourth quarter? David Weber: Yes. The incentive comp can vary certainly with the financial performance. But I think something similar to third quarter as far as expenses is probably a reasonable estimate for fourth quarter. Matthew Clark: Okay. Great. And then last one for me, just on the wealth management business. AUM down a little bit. It looked like it was in the lower fee products, though may have been deliberate, not sure. But any update on the kind of renewed growth and profitability improvement strategy there? Scott Wylie: Yes. We've definitely been working on getting that going again, and we've replaced the team on the trust and in the planning side. We've got a new leader that joined us beginning in the second quarter for our planning team and definitely seeing some nice progress from them. As David noted, we saw AUM go down, which is not really something we manage for. We're really more concerned about the fee income, and we saw fee income grow in the agency accounts in Q3, which is what we want to see. So definitely nice progress from that new team with, I think, a lot more to come. And Matt, just a little bit more color on deposit pricing. With the increase in deposits, you're always going to see relatively expensive at first, and then it's going to moderate over time typically with these new relationships and additional deposits you bring in. Our average deposit costs last quarter peaked at 3.22% in August, and then we're down about 3.15% in September. And as David said, ended the quarter at 3.04%. So you're seeing a nice trend just within the quarter there. So hopefully, we can see that continue into Q4. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Will Jones of KBW. William Jones: I wanted to circle back to the deposit growth. Obviously, a fairly banner quarter there for deposits, and it sounds like you expect maybe to see a little bit more balance sheet growth in the fourth quarter here. But should we, in any way, view this large influx of deposits as a way to prefund your expected growth for 2026, and maybe '26 then becomes more about just remixing the balance sheet? And then just, I guess, pairing within that, you obviously have a fair amount of liquidity from the deposit growth. How should we think about you guys being a little more opportunistic with securities purchases at this point? Scott Wylie: Well, I think that was a 3-part question. So let me see if I can get them all here. William Jones: Yes. I'm sorry about that through... Scott Wylie: Well, we appreciate the question. So I think you're right on with the idea that we were opportunistic in bringing deposits on. We have done a number of things over the last 12 months to get the team here focused on deposit growth. We know we can grow loans, and we wanted to see the loan-to-deposit ratio come more in line. And so the way you described that is reasonable. Although I would say it's not like a one-off thing that prefunds 2026 or something like that. I mean, I think this is an ongoing effort that goes throughout the product group throughout the -- our PTIM world, planning, trust and investment management world goes definitely through each one of our 19 locations. We require relationships with each loan, and that includes deposits. And so very much a focus of the company. I think that we're seeing a lot of market disruption out there. So on one hand, you've got this competitive environment for deposits, but you've also got people that don't want to be with really large out-of-state banks. And that disruption is continuing, I would say, increasing, and that creates opportunity for talent for people that we can bring centrally to support our teams. We can bring new people into our teams and then we're bringing in new clients. And so I think that's going to continue. I don't really see any reason to think that's going to abate. And at the same time, we've got this tiny low market share in most of our markets. We're kind of 1% or 2% in our bigger markets and less in the newer markets. So in strong and growing economy. So I think all those things set up for some nice continued asset growth into the fourth quarter and next year. William Jones: Okay. Helpful response. And just as I kind of like pair some of those comments, just into how the margin looks for 2026. As I kind of look back how you've transformed the margin this year, about 20 to 25 basis points of year-over-year expansion. Do you think that magnitude is repeatable again in 2026? Is the opportunity there from both a deposit pricing standpoint and loan growth standpoint to see that kind of magnitude again in 2026? Scott Wylie: Well, what I've been seeing is that we really got heavily impacted by that rapid run-up in short-term rates and the inverted yield curve and that we thought that, that would turn around and we'd see nice deposit betas as rates declined, which we have. And the fact that we've seen 22 basis point improvement from Q3 of last year to Q3 of this year, I think it's a nice start in that. We've moved out of the 2.30s into the 2.50s. And I continue to think that in normal environments, my banks, including this one, have produced 3.15%, 3.20%, 3.25% NIM for the way we do business. And that's where I think we're going. I don't think we're going to get there next quarter. I don't know if we can get there next year, but that, I think, is going to continue and the fact we've seen that amount of improvement here over the last 12 months in spite of the growth that we've seen on the balance sheet, I think, is really promising and bodes well for continued operating leverage into 2026. William Jones: Yes. Okay. Very helpful there. And then lastly for me, you touched a little bit on in some of your comments, just the organic opportunity that's arisen from some of the M&A disruption. But there has been a lot of deal announcements. There's been a lot of price discovery. So just curious how you think about your own scarcity value within that? And then maybe how you view yourself as a downstream buyer potentially of banks. Scott Wylie: Well, we believe that our path to -- we believe our job is to drive shareholder value. And we believe our path to creating shareholder value is creating operating leverage in our business here by growing revenues a lot faster than expenses. And that turns into improved efficiency ratio, improved bottom line. And we're not happy where the profitability is. We're not happy where the efficiency ratio is. But we've made a bunch of investments here over the last couple of years and changes that are now paying off, and we're seeing the green shoots of that, and that's going to drive continued organic growth and operating leverage for us. And now talked a couple of times about why we think that continues into '26 and beyond. So specifically, in terms of scarcity value, clearly, First Western is a unique franchise that both is becoming more unique in Colorado, but I would say also more unique as a successful wealth management business on a national basis. I mean I think the bank, in a lot of ways, most similar to us in terms of their balance sheet and AUM was FineMark in Florida, and the fact that they sold for 6.5x revenue and 92x trailing earnings to a really good buyer, I think, is an interesting data point for us. And I know others use other metrics on that, but I mean, I think that's what the data is. So yes, I think there is good scarcity value here. I think our clients, frankly, see that and they find us to be a desirable place to do business. I think other bankers around the country are seeing that, too. In terms of acquisitions, we would love to be buyers. We've done that over the years a lot, 13 times, and we just have to get our stock price back to something reasonable. And definitely, there's a lot of activity out there that we could benefit from if we can get our stock price back in line or when we get our stock price back in line. William Jones: Okay. I appreciate that. Appreciate that response. That's all for me. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Bill Dezellem of Tieton Capital Management. Please go ahead, Bill. William Dezellem: First of all, Scott, it sounded like you may have had some additional comments that you were going to share to the last question. I'll let you do that if there's something more you want to add. Scott Wylie: No, I'll add a few comments at the end. Thank you, Bill. William Dezellem: All right. So continuing down the deconsolidation route, would you talk about what transactions have been most disruptive and possibly favorably impactful for First Western? Scott Wylie: Yes. I don't entirely understand it, Bill. So I can't really give you a really solid prediction of what's going to happen with all this. But I would tell you that when Guaranty Bank and CoBiz sold, I thought that was going to create a lot of opportunity because our type of clients definitely were at those 2 banks. And I thought with them being acquired by out-of-state banks, that was going to create a lot of opportunity for us. As it turned out, it didn't. And I think a lot of the reason for that is the bankers stayed in place for a while. And then when they did move, they were really bid up by other players. And so it got to be really expensive to bring those folks over. Now with the second-tier acquisitions that we're seeing, for example, with Citywide, which was a really great local family-owned and family-run bank, they sold to Heartland, I don't know, 5, 7 years ago, something like that. And then I think Heartland really had a strategy of trying to run these local banks as the way they had run historically. UMB buys Heartland, UMB is going to drive a UMB culture into what used to be Citywide. And so we've seen some good people and good opportunities come out of that. And so I think interestingly, it's sort of the second-tier acquisitions that really create more opportunities in some way. And then the FirstBank one in this market is just really interesting. Like FirstBank is a great retail bank and just really loved by Coloradans. So there's this emotional tie that I don't entirely understand. But definitely local people here, local business leaders, local entrepreneurs have strong relationships with that company. And it's just going to be a challenge for a big national player to keep that passion. And we'll see. I mean we've had lots of calls. We have clients that bank here and bank there. And you can be pretty sure that those folks are calling us to saying what additional capacity you guys have for us to stay with you guys. So I don't know how all that plays out, Bill. I do feel like we're seeing more benefits of the disruption in today's market than what we saw 5 or 7 years ago. And again, I'm not sure all the reasons why, but it's been really good for us so far. William Dezellem: So let me take that one step further. Do you sense that you have the opportunity to become the new bank that Coloradans love that others look at you and go, we don't even know why, but they sit on this pedestal. Scott Wylie: Well, I do know our clients love us. We're never going to be a retail bank the way FirstBank was. Like FirstBank, one of their strengths was they did one thing. And over the years, I've talked to people like John Ikard and other CEOs over there, and they're like, well, what do you think about the trust and investment management business? And I would tell them and they would say, well, that's fine, but we're never going to do that at FirstBank. So I mean they're just very focused on being a retail bank. And I think they did that better than anybody. And we're not ever going to do that. We're not going to open branches on every corner like they did and stuff like that. So I think we'll continue to be in First Western. I know that our folks are very committed to their markets and their communities. We talk here about taking care of our 4 key stakeholders, which are shareholders, associates, clients and communities. And so we try and do those things that are right for our people and create that emotional connection that you're talking about. And certainly, with our niche, that's something we would hope to expand and build on. William Dezellem: That's helpful. And then relative to Arizona specifically, are you seeing anything from a transaction standpoint that you see as benefiting your opportunity for bringing on new people there? Scott Wylie: Well, I don't think we've announced it yet. We have Julie, who is telling me. So I was thinking I was going to make some news here, Julie, but you're ahead of me. But we actually recruited one of the top folks out of First Republic to build our franchise in Arizona for us, and he had a garden leave period and all that stuff, but he's now joined us. And we are really optimistic about what we think the team there can do in the years to come. I think that, that Arizona market for us, if we had the same tiny market share that we had in Arizona that we have in Colorado, we would be -- what's the number, Julie, $4 billion, $6 billion, bigger or something like that. And so that's what we've charged the team there to come up with. I think we've got a leader in place that can do it. William Dezellem: Great. Congratulations on that. One additional question, please. The excess cash that you have on the balance sheet, how long are you thinking that it will take to redeploy that cash? Scott Wylie: Yes. Actually, that was one of the 3-part question that I missed on, David. And do you want to talk about what we've done already with investments and then what our thoughts are. David Weber: Yes. I mean, Bill, if you kind of look back at the history of our balance sheet, we certainly have our liquidity and capital really more earmarked towards the loan portfolio. And I think that continues. Now that being said, when there are opportunities from a bond perspective that we like, we will take advantage of them. So we did add about $50 million in the third quarter to the bond portfolio, and those were primarily floaters that got us a nice spread over interest-bearing cash, which still really remains highly liquid assets, government guaranteed bonds, agency GSEs, things like that. So I think the focus is still to deploy that liquidity into the loan portfolio. But as we see opportunities in the bond portfolio, we'll certainly assess those as they come up. William Dezellem: So 2 follow-on questions to that. Number one is that the $49 million available for sale that's now on the balance sheet that you're referring to. And then that redeploying of that, I mean, is this something that is a 2-, 3-quarter phenomenon given what you see with economic activity? Is it something you think by the end of the Q4 -- is it more like full year next year? I guess I'm looking for a bit more solid view of how you see loan demand relating to that excess cash -- excess liquidity, I should say. David Weber: Yes. Good question, Bill. We expect our loan demand trends to continue. We had a really strong second quarter in loan growth. We had a good quarter again in the third quarter as far as loan growth. And we -- given our loan pipelines and what we're seeing in our markets, we do expect those trends to continue. So I don't think it's a year down the road type of thing with those trends continuing as far as redeploying that liquidity. Scott Wylie: I would just add, Bill, that we have seen a modest growth rate in the balance sheet, right? Like I think that our expectation is that we can grow single digits, mid-single digits, maybe low double digits. We're not interested particularly in growing faster than that. And I think that you're going to see this growth continue at a moderate pace here into 2026 from everything we know. Not expecting to go out and lend all this money out next week. That is not in our game plan. Operator: I would now like to turn the conference back to Scott Wylie for closing remarks. Sir? Scott Wylie: Great. Thank you. We said for several quarters that we had success playing defense and that we were going to shift back on to offense in 2025. We had some pretty stiff headwinds there for a while with short rapid run-up 525 basis points in short-term rates. We had that inverted yield curve for an extended period. We have 3 of the 4 largest bank failures in U.S. history, including First Republic, which very much was seen as a successful player in our niche. But we said, we got through the defense, let's shift over to offense and really leverage the investments that we've made over the past couple of years in 5 key areas. We've replaced our technology infrastructure. We've moved to a completely cloud-based environment. We've installed middleware. We've rolled out a new digital platform. We're adding all kinds of new services and tools onto that tech platform that really, I think, help us be a leader from a tech standpoint. We've reorganized number two, our product teams, our loan deposit, investment management planning, trust, mortgage teams have all been strengthened and reorganized. We've expanded our PC local office teams. We've given them a new proprietary toolbox for growth and rolled that out here in the last quarter. We've reset and standardized our internal control processes for more efficiency and value add so that we're competing on value and not on price. And number five, we've rebuilt our credit and risk and support and marketing teams to support the First Western that we envision for the future. And that's all paid for and in our current expense structure. And so we were hoping to see some green shoots of progress in that this year, and that showed up in Q3. Our net interest income was up 35% Q-over-Q, quarter-over-quarter annualized. Our fees were up 31.6% quarter-over-quarter annualized in each of our key areas, David pointed that out, which I thought was a really great pointing in PTIM, in insurance, in banking, in mortgages, we saw nice growth. Our pre-provision net revenues were up almost 35% quarter-over-quarter annualized, and our efficiency ratio is trending down with operating leverage up. So thinking about 2026, we do our business planning in the fourth quarter. And so that's a big project that we're doing now with each department head in each office. And so we'll see how all that plays out. But if you just look at Q3 year-over-year trend lines, then our net interest income is up 25% year-over-year, and that was done with modest growth in the balance sheet plus NIM improvement, which drives nice operating leverage, which we saw. Our fees were up 21% from September of last year to September of this year. And our operating expenses were only up 4%, and that was mainly due to incentive comp that is driven off of revenue growth. So if we had higher expenses in Q4 because we're paying incentive growth because we're seeing good -- incentive comp because we're seeing good growth, and that's a good problem to have. So looking past this quarter, our intention is to get back to be a high financial performance like we were earlier in this decade. And we have a clear path to 1% ROAA and plenty of room beyond that. We were honored to be named one of just 16 KBW Bank Honor Roll members in 2025 for our performance over last year. We were just, I think, made as of Q3 now, Piper Sandler's list of the top 200 U.S.-listed banks in size. And then we just saw our schedule for the Hovde Conference down in Florida in a couple of weeks. And the organizers there asked us to add some time slots because of high demand. So I think there's good momentum here. We're really optimistic about how we can finish the year and continue to deliver shareholder value into 2026. Thanks, everybody, for your support, and thanks for dialing in today. We really appreciate it. Operator: This concludes today's conference call. Thank you for participating. You may now disconnect.
Cenk Gur: Dear friends, this is Kaan speaking. Thank you for joining our third quarter earnings call. I'm speaking to you from Copenhagen. While I am on the road, I wanted to take a moment to connect with all of you and share my perspective on the current operating environment and how we are positioning ourselves for the period ahead. After my remarks, I will leave the floor to Turker, Ebru and Gulce and our IR team, who will go through the detailed financial results and handle the Q&A. Although I'm not able to stay for the entire call, I'm looking forward to catching up again soon. Before we dive into the numbers, I want to take a moment to talk about the broader macro environment, particularly what we are seeing in Turkiye. As you all know, the strong monetary tightening in April postponed the anticipated margin expansion. Following today's 100 bps rate cuts, we expect the policy easing to continue in measured steps. On the growth side, following a solid pace in Q2, economic activity shows sign of moderation in Q3. We envisage another period of mild economic growth this year around 3.5%. Current account balance remains supportive for exchange rate stability. Looking forward, achieving lasting this inflation will be key to sustaining healthy growth across the real and financial sectors. Monetary measures have successfully restored financial stability and the Central Bank restarted reserve accumulation in May. Gross reserve have surpassed its mid-March level by reaching $189 billion, while net reserves have steadily improved to around $57 billion. Domestic residents still favor Turkish lira assets and deposit dollarization remains weak. A fixed deposit share in the banking system has been stable around 40% levels on the back of the macro prudential measures, keeping Turkish lira deposit rates higher than the policy rate. Foreign capital flows have been on the rise since May. Without a doubt, global conditions generate a conducive environment for the continuance of the existing exchange rate regime and support financial market stability. Let's move on to our bank. Let me start with our overall performance. During the quarter, we delivered healthy loan growth accompanied by across-the-board market share gains, particularly in our core customer segments. This growth was quality driven, fully aligned with our disciplined and selective lending strategy as well as the regulatory requirements. On the funding side, our dedication continued on expanding and deepening customer relationship. This translated into market share gains in low-cost deposits and a strong performance in demand deposits, further enhancing the stability and efficiency of our funding base. This balanced development on both sides of the balance sheet supported a solid increase in net interest income, while our fee income also maintained its strong momentum. At the same time, we remain fully focused on asset quality and risk management. Our prudent underwriting standards, proactive monitoring and well-diversified portfolio continue to support the resilience of our asset base. As a result, we maintained strong solvency comfortably above regulatory threshold. This solid foundation positioned us well to capture growth opportunities ahead while continuing to safeguard the strength and stability of our franchise. We are executing today with discipline while transforming for tomorrow through a clear long-term vision. We have a strong proven business model, which we continue to enhance and adapt as customer needs evolve. Our business models brings together digital excellence, strong customer engagement and strategic investment in technology and our people, all shaping the future of sustainable growth and lasting value for all stakeholders. Let's move to our 3-year strategic plan, where we regularly share transparent updates on our progress each quarter. Execution remains strong with the majority of our 3-year strategic objectives already delivered or well within reach. Our only shortfall remains in Turkish lira time deposit market share, which is a reflection of our funding optimization efforts and the impact of a regulation-driven low level of Turkish lira LDR. Our dedication for customer growth remains fully in place through both customer acquisition and deepening relationship. Backed by a well-structured balance sheet, this forms a scalable, resilient earnings platform with strong momentum and long-term growth potential. Let me leave you with 3 takeaways. First one is we continue to grow selectively and with discipline. Secondly, we manage risk proactively. And lastly, we remain focused on sustainable core revenues that will drive real return on equity in the upcoming periods. I'm very proud of our teams. Their hard work and dedication truly drive our success. A sincere thank you to all people for their commitments. And dear friends, the partners, thank you for your continued trust and support. I look forward to seeing you all again soon, bye for now, Turker and Ebru. Over to you. Kamile Ebru GÜVENIR: Thank you so much, Kaan Bey. We will start now with the first slide on the NII and the revenues. Our net income in the 9 months was up by 17% year-on-year to TRY 38.908 billion, resulting in an ROE of 20.4% and ROA of 1.8%. During the same period, we had solid revenue growth, up 48% year-on-year to TRY 155.970 billion, led by robust fee generation and renewed NII momentum during third quarter. To put in numbers, our quarterly swap adjusted NII improved notably by 48% [ quarter-on-quarter ], supported by disciplined balance sheet management, while strategic investments, deepening client relationships and strong cross-sell execution continue to fuel fee growth. Together, these drivers further strengthened our recurring revenue base and the solid NII recovery this quarter underscores how we're leveraging our strong solvency position to deliver profitable growth and our balance sheet flexibility. Strong growth alongside robust solvency highlights our agility and risk reward discipline. As we move ahead, our sustainable growth mindset, solid balance sheet and analytical capabilities will drive margins further. Moving on to the balance sheet. We achieved a 28% year-to-date growth in TL loans, well on track to meet our full year loan growth guidance of over 30% shared at the start of the year. On a quarterly basis, our TL loan growth of 13% led to across-the-board market share gains, while risk discipline remained intact. Please also note that our robust growth achieved is in full alignment with the loan growth regulations. During third quarter, we captured 90 basis points of market share in business banking loans among private banks, illustrating our targeted focus on segments with growth potential. Building on our leadership in consumer lending, we expanded our presence further, capturing 30 basis points additional share among private banks. This demonstrates our readiness to capture new opportunities while managing risk. On the FX book side, we grew by 4.1% quarter-on-quarter and 5.1% year-to-date, capturing 30 basis points market share gain among private banks during the quarter. The increase was mainly driven by government-backed infrastructure projects, multinationals and blue-chip corporates, reflecting a prudent, quality-focused growth strategy, fully aligned with regulations. Please also note that we have a solid pipeline, indicating upside potential to our mid-single-digit foreign currency loan growth guidance for the full year. Moving on to the securities. Our security portfolio composition demonstrates our balanced approach with a focus on yield maximization, 69% of our securities are TL, while we have selectively increased our positioning in the foreign currency side through proactive Eurobond investments. This is underlined by a robust 21% year-to-date growth in our foreign currency securities in dollar terms. We are well positioned with long duration, comparatively higher yielding TL fixed rate securities, which will support book value growth going forward. To put in numbers, 65% of our TL fixed rate securities are classified under fair value through other comprehensive income. Our TLREF index bond portfolio offers decent spread. While our CPI linkers offer positive real rate and its share in total has actually declined since 2022 by 33 percentage points. Our active yield-focused management of the securities portfolio has supported timely adjustments to market dynamics and will underpin margin resilience in the periods ahead. Moving on to the funding side. We effectively utilized our flexible balance sheet and strong deposit franchise while optimizing our funding costs. At the same time, we successfully strengthened our TL deposit base, capturing notable market share gains in both demand deposits and widespread consumer-only segments. Our TL demand deposit market share among private banks increased quarter-on-quarter by 190 basis points, reaching a robust 18.6% as of third quarter. Accordingly, TL demand deposit share in total TL deposits advanced by 300 basis points year-to-date to 16%. Share of total demand deposits in total deposits also excelled by around 500 basis points to 33% during the same period. Meanwhile, our strong customer engagement helped us achieve a 40 basis point market share gain in the sub TRY 1 million TL time deposits, reaching 16.5% in third quarter. On top of our strong and widespread deposit base, our low TL LDR, which, as you can see, was partially utilized for growth opportunities during the quarter, is still offering substantial room for funding cost optimization in the coming period. Moving on to P&L. NIM recovery resumed in third quarter as expected, following the temporary margin pressure in second quarter due to the pause and the reversal of the rate cut cycle. Our swap adjusted net interest margin expanded by 73 basis points quarter-on-quarter, supported by both improved funding dynamics and well-positioned loan portfolio. Please note that our CPI normalized quarterly NIM improvement was also strong at 50 basis points after adjusting for the impact of CPI linker valuation change based on the revised October to October CPI estimation of 32.5%. It is worth to note that our weekly NIM trend towards the end of the quarter indicates ongoing progress in margin improvement for the fourth quarter. Our unwavering focus on profitable growth and effective funding strategies will remain key drivers supporting NIM evolution. On the other hand, the disinflationary phase and the magnitude of the upcoming rate cuts will continue to influence the extent of the quarterly NIM improvement. As a reference, the underlying year-end policy rate assumption of our revised guidance in July was at 36%, whereas the current expectations actually point to a tighter environment. Moving on to the fee slide. Our net fees advanced by 67% year-on-year, reflecting innovation, strong customer engagement and diversified offerings. Our diversified fee base remains a key strength with solid contributions from every business line. To name some of them, first, net payment systems fees advanced by 76% year-on-year, reflecting effective customer engagement and targeted campaigns. Second, net bancassurance fees surged by 77% year-on-year, backed by our advanced digital solutions actually, which are covering around 80% of our sales. Third, net money market transfer fees rose by 58% year-on-year, reflecting higher transaction volumes and digital channel migration of transactions. Our strong market positioning in key business lines ensures a diversified and resilient fee base throughout the rate cut cycle, offsetting the cyclical impact of interest rate-driven payment system fees. While the banking sector fees benefited from the rate environment, our market share gain among private banks reflects the bank's inherent strength in fee generation and ongoing focus on sustainable growth. I am very pleased to share that the fee growth once again outpaced OpEx, lifting our fee to OpEx ratio to 104% as of 9 months. Accordingly, our fee to OpEx ratio showed an 18 percentage point increase year-to-date, underlining our continued execution on customer-driven revenue growth and disciplined cost control. On that note, let's move on to the OpEx. The year-on-year increase in operating expenses was limited to 35% in 9 months, underscoring our strong cost control and operational efficiency. This realization is still evolving below our revised guidance of around 40% for the full year. Moving on to asset quality. Retail-led NPL inflows continue to be persistent trend across the sector. During this period, our disciplined risk management framework has enabled us to optimize the loan portfolio while preserving sound asset quality. This was supported by excellence in advanced analytical capabilities across the retail segments, automated and AI-based credit decision models, diligent tracking and individual assessment of our corporate and commercial loan portfolio as well as our prudent provisioning. Our NPL ratio remained at 3.5%, fully in line with our full year guidance. Meanwhile, the share of Stage 2 plus Stage 3 loans representing potentially problematic exposures remains low at 9% of our gross loan portfolio. Please also note that the restructured loans represent only 3.2% of the total loan portfolio. In 9 months, our total provisions reached almost TRY 68 billion, reflecting our continuous provision reserve buildup. Meanwhile, our coverage ratio for Stage 2 and Stage 3 loans stands strong at 34.3%, mirroring disciplined risk management practices. Excluding currency impact, our net cost of credit increased to 230 basis points on a cumulative basis, mainly driven by ongoing retail-led inflows and also further strengthening of our already strong coverage ratios. Hence, our full year cost of credit may slightly exceed the upper end of our guidance range of 150 to 200 basis points by the year-end. Our total capital, Tier 1 and core equity Tier 1 ratios without forbearances remain robust at 17.2%, 13.6% and 12.4%, proof of resilience alongside solid growth. As for the sensitivity, as we share every single quarter, 10% depreciation in TL results around 29 bps decrease in our capital ratios, while the impact diminishes for higher amounts of change. And 100 basis points increase in TL interest rate results in 9 basis point decline in our solvency ratios, again, demonstrating a limited sensitivity and the strength of our capital buffers and also declining as the interest rates go higher. So solid capital strength anchors resilience and long-term profitable growth. This slide highlights the snapshot of our 9 months financial performance. As a final note, across the board, strong loan growth, improving NII performance, along with robust fee income generation led to strengthened core revenue momentum. That said, the ongoing disinflation process and the magnitude of the rate cuts will determine the extent of the NIM improvement. Going forward, customer-centric growth will remain our main engine of sustainable profitability, supported by robust fees, disciplined operations and prudent risk management. Before moving on to the Q&A, I'd like to share a few highlights regarding our nonfinancial performance. As highlighted in our ESG video, we sustained a strong momentum, advancing our 2025 sustainable action plan with measurable results. We are on track with our long-term sustainability goals and notably have reached 74% of our sustainable finance targets as of third quarter. We are proud to pioneer a tailored banking program via Akbank's women platform, offering integrated financial and social benefits to women customers. We strengthened our internal engagement through the climate ambassador program in the third quarter, empowering Akbankers to foster a green future. With our consistent performance in climate strategy, governance and social impact, we maintained our leadership position, sustaining a AA score in MSCI, which was just updated this month. All these efforts reflect our continued commitment to building a low-carbon and inclusive economy in line with our long-term objectives. This concludes our presentation. Kamile Ebru GÜVENIR: And we are now moving on to the Q&A session. Please raise your hand or type your question in the Q&A box. And for those of us joining by telephone please send your questions by email to investor.relations@akbank.com. And as I see, there are a few hands up already. And the first question comes from Mehmet Sevim. Mehmet Sevim: I just had one question on the trajectory of margins. And maybe starting with the 3Q performance, which looks really strong and with the 73 basis point expansion this quarter, I just wanted to understand if this was completely in line with your expectation going into the third quarter? Were there any aspects that surprised you, such as loan or deposit pricing, behavior of households or corporates or anything in this quarter? And then secondly, just going into the fourth quarter, you already indicated the NIM trajectory from here depends on the policy rate understandably. But with what we know today, where do you see the exit NIM? And how should we think about it into the early quarters of 2025 -- 2026, apologies? Türker Tunali: This is Turker. Thank you very much for joining the call. Let me start with the third quarter and then move on to the fourth quarter of '26 to share some thoughts on '26. Actually, as you have rightly mentioned, so there was a strong recovery in our quarter NIM in the third quarter, mainly coming from the deposit cost easing. That was actually in line with our expectations. But having said that, actually, when we dive into deep, as you may recall, by the end of June, we had this like easing on the upper bands of policy of Central Bank funding decrease. So there was an indirect rate cut. And on top of it, we had another rate cut in July. We were successfully able -- like we were able to reflect these rate cuts into our deposit pricing as a result of which our core spread from second quarter into third quarter has improved by roughly 3 percentage points. But after the latest rate cut in September, as you may have followed from like market data, like second half of September, I am referring to. This deposit rate -- deposit cost easing has stopped somehow, maybe due to the ratio requirement of the Central Bank. But at the end of the day, that latest rate cut was not reflected into like deposit pricing. Now we are at the beginning of the fourth quarter. Let's wait and see actually how the -- like the coming weeks will evolve. Also not to forget like a partly a week ago, we had this monthly reporting period, and maybe that was one of the reasons of this pricing behavior in the market. So we will be observing how the upcoming days will evolve also after this -- after today's rate cut. So it will definitely impact our net interest margin in the fourth quarter. But having said that, I can say like the net interest margin starting into the fourth quarter is surely above the third quarter figure, but the magnitude of the improvement will be important since after today's announcement of Central Bank, probably last rate cuts will be also a bit more moderate. Therefore, actually, it puts some pressure on our full year NIM guidance in the range of 3% to 3.5%. So it's very likely that we may like stay behind this. But definitely, this rate cut cycle will further help us to improve our net interest margin also in the upcoming year as well. Maybe in the past, we were talking with some net interest margin peaks in '26. But probably like as of today, what we are like forecasting, this rate cut cycle will be more like gradual in '26. Therefore, we may see a gradual net interest margin improvement throughout the year rather than seeing a peak in the first quarter or in the second quarter. So that's what we are currently observing. But at the same time, so to offset some of this net interest margin maybe gap, our growth has exceeded our expectation. And it's very likely that we will be beating our full year loan growth guidance by the end of the year. So just recall, so mid-single digits for FX and 30% for TL loan growth, we will be probably ending year above this level, which is also currently increasing our Turkish lira LDR. So we are like in a way, operate in a more optimized manner. And also, we are funding roughly 20%, 25% of our TL balance sheet via wholesale funding, where we are fully benefiting from the rate cut cycle, albeit it is a bit maybe more moderate, but that's how it is at the moment. Kamile Ebru GÜVENIR: The next question comes from David Taranto. David Taranto: I have 3 questions, please. The first one is about this year. The 25% ROE target appears quite ambitious considering the 20% ROE achieved in the first 9 months of this year. Could you please elaborate on how you see the full year ROE outlook evolving following the third quarter results? Second question is a follow-up on NIM. In the last quarterly presentation, you mentioned expectations for NIM to reach 5.5% in the fourth quarter of this year and towards 6% in the first half of next year. And given the changes in the macro outlook, do you still see this trajectory as achievable? To my understanding, you now see the peak NIM at a lower level, but you do not expect an immediate normalization. You see it hovering around those levels for some time. Third one is about the fee. The fee income continues to show strong momentum. The year-on-year growth accelerated this quarter despite regulatory changes on the debit cards. When do you anticipate this growth to begin decelerating? And what factors would likely to drive that shift? And perhaps I could squeeze one more. The percentage of Stage 2 loans remain below the sector average, but there has been a large increase in restructured loans in this quarter. Are these driven by unsecured retail loans or business loans? And could you please elaborate a bit on your strategy here? Türker Tunali: David, let me start with the ROE. So definitely, so this gap on the -- potential gap on the net interest margin guidance side may put some limitation to like achieve this 25% ROE guidance. So probably we are going to end the year in between the existing level and 25% guidance. Definitely, the NIM improvements going forward will impact the level of ROE improvements in the fourth quarter. With regard to our like previous talks and the previous earnings call, so definitely, this delay in the rate cut cycle, just recall, when we made this guidance revision, we were anticipating policy rate to come down to 36% by the end of the year. But nowadays, we are more like 38% level. So at this 2% deviation. So will definitely also impact our exit NIM. But surely, exit NIM will be like much higher than the third quarter NIM, but maybe not at this 5%, 5.5% levels. And the improvement trend, as I answered Mehmet's question, probably the NIM improvements will be like more like in a step form like with gradual improvement. But definitely, like next year's NIM will be significantly higher than this year's NIM. That was your second question. And third question, fee income. Yes, our third quarter fee income performance wise was quite strong. That was also driven by our growth trend in the third quarter. It has also positively impacted our fee income growth. And currently, our year-on-year fee income growth is above our guidance, and we are expecting to end the year again at similar levels between the existing level and the full year guidance. And this latest regulatory change on the debit card side will impact fourth quarter, but its magnitude is more moderate. So it's not that significant. Probably into next year and maybe also into fourth quarter and into next year, the Central Bank's decision with regard to interchange commission caps will be important as we -- as you know, it hasn't been touched so far, which was also one of the reasons why this year's fee income growth was also way above the initial guidance of 40%. But assuming with the upcoming rate cut cycle and with some also central banks starting to reflect these rate cuts into interchange commissions, we may expect some moderation, but the aim of Akbank will be again to continue with this enhanced fee income generation capacity also as a result of our customer acquisition efforts. So definitely, we will be aiming to preserve this superior fee to OpEx ratio. We may see some moderation there, but our ambition will be always to stay at this 100% levels. Finally, with regard to stage -- not Stage 2, but yes, Stage 2 was almost the same at the same level, but the ratio of restructured loans increased from 2.6% to 3.2%, so only 0.6% increase. And just recall, by the end of the second quarter at Akbank, we had the lowest restructured loans, not only in nominal terms, but also as a percentage of total loan book. And this slight increase was mainly driven by the restructuring scheme of BRSA. As you may recall, that restructuring scheme was also -- was made available for credit card customers with not -- without overdue status, but having rolling over some of their debt. So we had to respond to them when the customer was coming with some restructuring demand. That's the main reason. But just to recall, 3.2% like probably will be, again, like a quite low figure when we see the sector figures in the coming weeks. And as Ebru has mentioned, we continue to further improve our provisioning charge. Therefore, our cost of risk is currently slightly higher than the full year guidance, and we may end the year slightly higher than the guidance, but it's like bottom line impact is not that material compared to the NIM impact. But I think so, it's a more prudent approach. I hope I was able to answer your questions? David Taranto: Yes, all good. Thank you. Kamile Ebru GÜVENIR: The next question comes from Konstantin Rozantsev. Konstantin, we cannot hear you. Okay. I guess I'm just looking into the written questions. They're mainly regarding NIM and cost of risk, and we've answered both of them. I don't know if there are any further questions. Another -- Konstantin is now again coming in. I guess this is a different Konstantin. Konstantin, please go ahead and ask a question. Konstantin Rozantsev: Could you please confirm, if you can hear me? Kamile Ebru GÜVENIR: Yes, we can hear you now. Konstantin Rozantsev: I had 2 questions, which I wanted to ask. The first one is on the retail FX deposits. So I see in the sector data that in the recent weeks, there has been some increase in the stock of retail FX deposits even on parity adjusted basis. So could you please confirm why is it happening? Well, is it completely explained by the fact that there are these KKMs, which are maturing and which have been moved into FX deposits? Or is there also some elements that regular lira deposits are being moved into FX deposits as well? So that's the first question. Second question, could you please comment if you have done any stress test on the loan quality in different macroeconomic scenarios. And if yes, then what do the results of the stress tests suggest? Do you have some specific examples in mind and some particular scenarios in mind saying that these scenarios lead to the high pressure or like large pressure on the loan quality. So could you please quantify these scenarios if you did this stress test? Türker Tunali: Konstantin, this is Turker. With regard to your first question, this FX deposit increase, as you mentioned, is mainly due to the parity change. Currently, gold deposits make up a significant part of FX deposits in the system. So therefore, actually, the gold price change has -- is impacting the level of FX deposits. But other than that, when I really look at our own portfolio, the strong TL deposit base is there and the shift from TL into FX is not material. Surely, with the phasing out of the KKM scheme, the remaining small part of KKM modelers are switching to FX. But it was in a way, FX indexed deposits. But other than that, there is no behavior change in the customers. With regard to the stress, surely, we are always monitoring our portfolio like in different ways. We are applying different stress scenarios into our capital. But in all these stress tests, we preserve our strong capital. But other than that, there isn't really currently any specific sector or area where we feel concerned. And when you look at our loan portfolio breakdown, there [ isn't ] a sector concentration. And it is really like in every sector, there are like customers with a better asset -- with a stronger financial performance and maybe a weaker financial performance. And according to that, we are continuously changing our lending criteria in terms of collateral version, in terms of duration. So that's how it's. Konstantin Rozantsev: Okay. And sorry, just a third quick question. Do you have any number in mind for cost of risk for next year, 2026 in the base scenario? Türker Tunali: Actually, currently, we are in our budgeting process, and we will be sharing our guidance by the end of -- probably by the end of January. But maybe as a reference point, probably it will evolve at similar levels like in '25. Kamile Ebru GÜVENIR: Okay. At this moment, I do not see any further hands up for questions. So I guess we're coming towards the end. There are no written questions that are different to the questions that have been actually asked. So this concludes our earnings webcast. Thank you all for joining us today. Please do not hesitate to contact our team if you have any further questions, we're always glad to help. And we also look forward to staying in touch in the upcoming conferences. We'll be in Dubai for the Jefferies Conference. We will be in London for the Goldman Sachs Conference, and we'll be actually in Prague for the WOOD's Conference. So if you're attending, we look forward to seeing you there, and bye for now.
Operator: Good day, and welcome to the Community Health Systems Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note this event is being recorded. I would now like to turn the conference over to Anton Hie, Vice President of Investor Relations. Please go ahead. Anton Hie: Thank you, Betsy. Good morning, everyone, and welcome to Community Health Systems' Third Quarter 2025 Conference Call. Joining me today on the call are Kevin Hammons, President and Interim Chief Executive Officer; and Jason Johnson, Senior Vice President, Chief Accounting Officer and Interim Chief Financial Officer. Before we begin, I'll remind everyone this conference call may contain certain forward-looking statements, including all statements that do not relate solely to historical or current facts. These forward-looking statements are subject to a number of known and unknown risks as described in headings such as Risk Factors in our annual report on Form 10-K, and other reports filed with or furnished to the SEC. Actual results may differ significantly from those expressed in any forward-looking statements in today's discussion. We do not intend to update any of these forward-looking statements. Yesterday afternoon, we issued a press release with our financial statements and definitions and calculations of adjusted EBITDA and adjusted EPS. We've also posted a supplemental slide presentation on our website. All calculations we will discuss today exclude gains or losses from early extinguishment of debt, and impairment gains or losses on the sale of businesses. With that said, I'll turn the call over to Kevin Hammons, President and Interim Chief Executive Officer. Kevin? Kevin Hammons: Thank you, Anton. Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining our third quarter 2025 conference call. Before we jump into discussing the quarter, I want to take a moment to thank the team here at CHS for the support they've shown me and others through the recent transition of senior leadership. It is gratifying to see our team's confidence in the work we are doing here at CHS and their commitment to our future success. Over the past 90 days or so, since stepping into my new role as interim CEO, I've had the opportunity to visit several of our markets and speak with many of our hospital leadership teams, including operational, financial, clinical and service line leaders. It is always inspiring to see the folks who are providing high-quality care for our patients, and helps put into perspective how important our hospitals are to the people and communities they serve. At CHS, we will remain focused on supporting our caregivers, physician partners and support teams to help ensure an exceptional health care experience for our patients. Next month, approximately 150 CEOs and CFOs from across the CHS network will gather for a leadership conference where we will discuss our vision for the future of the company and our ongoing commitment to investments in quality, improving both physician and patient experience, improving employee satisfaction, and achieving sustainable positive free cash flow. As I've shared with many on our team already, I'm very optimistic about the future of CHS and our opportunities to continuously improve the health care experience. To continue to improve our operational and financial performance and to create value for our investors through disciplined and proactive management of our business. Now turning to the third quarter operating results. Our operating performance was in line with our updated expectations. And our reported results were further enhanced by the recognition of a $28 million gain from the settlement with some prior litigation, which reimbursed us for previously incurred expenses. Same-store net revenue for the third quarter improved 6% year-over-year. We were encouraged to see some improvement in payer mix on both a sequential and year-over-year basis as well, as realizing the incremental state directed payments from New Mexico and Tennessee when compared to the prior year. As we have done all year, we continue to grow our inpatient volume. However, similar to last quarter, the overall business mix remains more heavily skewed towards medical versus surgical cases. And inpatient admissions were flat ahead of outpatient elective procedures. However, solid expense management across most categories helped drive slight margin expansion year-over-year, even when excluding the benefit from the legal cell. We continue to make targeted investments in advance our competitive position in many key markets during the quarter, including capacity and service line expansions, such as the acquisition of a vascular surgery practice and the relocation of a large OB/GYN practice onto our campus, both in Birmingham, Alabama. The addition of a new urology service line in Las Cruces, New Mexico, the addition of a new neurosurgery and spine program in Laredo, Texas and new robotic surgery programs in two of our New Mexico markets. We are successfully recruiting physicians and advanced practice providers to our markets. At September 30, 2025, we had approximately 160 more employee physicians and APPs in our clinics than in the prior year. With the recent recruits and plan commencements in the fourth quarter and early next year, we should be favorably positioned as we enter 2026. In addition, we continue to improve our capital structure, further reducing our leverage to 6.7x, down from 7.4x at year-end '24. Also as a reminder, during the quarter, we refinanced $1.74 (sic) [$1.743 billion ] of our Senior Secured Notes due 2027, through the offering of $1.79 billion of 2034 notes, thereby pushing out our nearest significant maturity to 2029. At this point, I want to introduce Jason Johnson, our Interim Chief Financial Officer. And I'll turn the call over to Jason to review the financial results in greater detail and discuss our updated guidance. Jason? Jason Johnson: Thank you, Kevin, and good morning, everyone. For the third quarter, CHS delivered results generally consistent with expectations. The overall volume growth was in line with our updated guidance and with continued solid execution on controllable aspects of our business, the company achieved expansion in adjusted EBITDA margins, and remains on track for the full year. Adjusted EBITDA for the third quarter was $376 million, compared with $347 million in the prior year period, with a margin of 12.2%, increasing 100 basis points year-over-year. Results included $28 million from the receipt of a settlement of a legal matter recognized as nonpatient revenue. When excluding this amount, adjusted EBITDA was $348 million (sic) [ $376 million ] and margin was approximately 11.4%, up 20 basis points from the prior year period. Please note that the nonpatient revenue related to legal settlement is excluded from the same-store metrics provided in our earnings release and supplemental materials. Same-store net revenue for the third quarter increased 6.0% year-over-year, again, driven primarily by rate growth as net revenue per adjusted admission was up 5.6% year-over-year. Same-store inpatient admissions increased 1.3% year-over-year, and adjusted admissions were up 0.3%. Same-store surgeries declined 2.2% and ED visits were down 1.3%. We were encouraged by the sequential volume performance coming out of the second quarter, which was better than our typical seasonal experience in the third quarter. However, as Kevin previously noted, we again experienced a divergence in inpatient surgeries, which were flat year-over-year. And outpatient surgeries, which were down, reflecting continued pressure on consumer demand for elective procedure in our markets. Despite this environment, the company continued to perform well on cost controls, including labor costs. The year-over-year increase in average hourly rate was in line with our expectations and contract labor expense was down slightly on a year-over-year basis. We also performed well again on supplies expense, which were down year-over-year, and as a percentage of net revenue fell 20 basis points to 15.0% when excluding the $28 million legal settlement. While we acknowledge ongoing inflationary pressures and potential incremental upward pressure from tariffs on imported products and raw materials in future periods, we believe that opportunities remain as we stabilize and mature workflows under our ERP. Medical specialist fees were $165 million in the third quarter up approximately 4% year-over-year on a same-store basis, and representing 5.4% of net revenue when excluding the legal settlement, which is generally consistent with recent quarters. We expect continued upward pressure on medical specialist fees in the fourth quarter and into next year, especially in radiology, while increased use of emerging or developing technology, including AI tools should eventually help on this front. Cash flows from operations were $70 million for the third quarter, and $277 million for the year-to-date. Cash flows from operations for the year-to-date as reported includes $126 million in outflows for taxes on gains on sales of hospitals, which are paid out of divestiture proceeds that are reported as investing cash flows. When excluding these cash taxes on divestiture gains, our adjusted cash flows from operations were $403 million for the year-to-date, and adjusted free cash flows were slightly negative for the year-to-date. Based on our historical performance, in which the fourth quarter operating cash flows are typically the strongest of the year, we remain confident in our ability to achieve positive free cash flow for the full year of 2025 after adjusting for cash taxes paid on divestiture gain. In August, we refinanced substantially all of our 2027 maturities, using proceeds from an offering of $1.79 billion and 9.75% Senior Secured Notes due 2034, to redeem via a tender offer $1.743 billion, or 99%, of our outstanding 2027 Senior Secured Notes. As Kevin previously noted, leverage at quarter end was 6.7x, down from 7.4x at year-end 2024, and our next significant maturity is in 2029, providing ample runway to continue executing our strategic initiatives. As expected, in October, we received $91 million in contingent cash consideration related to last year's divestiture Tennova Cleveland. We also continue to expect the divestiture of our outreach lab asset to close later this quarter with proceeds of approximately $195 million, which will provide additional liquidity to fund growth investments or further reduce our leverage. Now moving on to our updated 2025 financial guidance. Based on our operating results through the first 9 months, along with the benefit from the legal settlement that was not contemplated in the previous guidance, we are tightening our adjusted EBITDA range for the full year 2025 to $1.50 billion to $1.55 billion. Consistent with our prior approach, this guidance does not contemplate any further divestitures beyond those announced, nor does it assume contribution from any new or pending supplemental payment programs. This concludes our prepared remarks. So at this time, we will turn the call back over to the operator for Q&A. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first question today comes from Brian Tanquilut with Jefferies. Brian Tanquilut: Congrats on the quarter. Maybe, Kevin, as I think about volume performance, obviously, nice to see the positive trend in inpatient. But on the outpatient side, you still saw some weakness in surgeries and ER. Just any thoughts you can share with us in terms of what you're seeing in terms of the recovery of volumes there? Or how are you guys thinking internally in terms of what that trajectory looks like? And maybe also the components of what outpatient is, and what you're seeing in those buckets? Kevin Hammons: Thanks, Brian. Absolutely. So as we called out in the second quarter, and as I believe we still saw in the third quarter, some of the economic headwinds, more the macroeconomics, the climate and consumer confidence seems to be the big headwind. And I think that continued on into the third quarter, particularly in some of our markets are experiencing some heavier or more softness economically than other markets. . And so we still believe that has been the primary driver of some of the softness now. As consumer confidence seems to be stabilizing, it's bounced off its lows in the second quarter a little bit and seems to be improving. We are seeing some recovery, and I think that we experienced that where we saw some improvement in payer mix into the third quarter, and we're certainly experiencing that in some of our markets. So that gives us a little more confidence as the payer mix improves and people are feeling better. They're starting to come back in for more procedures. Our -- although we were still down on an outpatient elective surgery volume year-over-year, it was improved over second quarter. So we did see some improvement there. I'd also point out maybe that the immigration climate probably is affecting some of our markets still if you think about markets in Arizona, across Texas, primarily, there's still probably a little bit of an overhang there where patient behavior, people are staying away from hospitals, at least on an elective basis more than we've seen in the past. Now we're also experiencing, or noticing that, in our ER business. And many of those are uncompensated. So where you're seeing some lower volume and maybe why that hasn't completely been noticed in our EBITDA generation is because some of that volume that we're seeing lots of volume, particularly in the ERs and uncompensated care. And so that has not had an EBITDA -- negative EBITDA impact on it. Brian Tanquilut: That's very helpful, Kevin. And then maybe just a follow-up question for me. How should we be thinking about your divestiture kind of plans or outlook for 2026? Kevin Hammons: Yes, we're still pursuing. Some divestitures were in some early conversations that -- it's too early at this point. We don't know how far those will go. But certainly, we're continuing to get some inbound interest. We are in some more advanced discussions on a couple of deals, which we think could be announced even later this year. But no agreements have been signed at this point. So nothing to report today that we are advancing some discussions... Operator: The next question comes from A.J. Rice with UBS. Albert Rice: First of all, I guess, you're moving towards this year. It sounds like you think you'll be free cash flow positive on a full year 2025 basis, assuming the fourth quarter comes in with a couple of hundred million positive for you. Is that -- as you begin to move to a position where that's ongoing going to be the case. Does that change your thinking on capital deployment, amount of CapEx you're going to spend, other initiatives, maybe tuck-in deals with outpatient or other things? Any thoughts on that? Kevin Hammons: Thanks, A.J. Absolutely, I think that it frees us up a little bit and does allow us to think, and be a little more strategic in terms of how we think about either deploying capital. It gives us some optionality of whether we use incremental free cash flows to further delever the company to -- which in effect would have a virtuous cycle benefit because it reduced future cash flows. We could use it where there are opportunities for some tuck-in deals to spend capital more strategically in areas of things that we think could generate further EBITDA. So it does free stuff and should then again, create a little more of a virtuous cycle for us. Albert Rice: Okay. And then, I mean it's early, I know, but when you look at '26 and you're starting your budgeting process, et cetera. Are there headwinds or tailwinds that you would call out that we should keep in mind as we try to model '26? Kevin Hammons: Yes. I think I could point out a few things. Certainly taking into consideration the divestitures that we've completed this year, Lake Norman and ShorePoint early in the year, Cedar Park divestiture kind of midyear. We did recognize some prior year SVP for Tennessee that's about $15 million to $20 million that we'll have this year towards the settlement gain that we recognized this quarter. As I think about 2026, directionally, some of the things -- Medicare rate increase will be strong for 2026. We potentially there's a couple of other SVP programs out there in Georgia, Florida, Indiana, the rural health fund, which we don't know, can't quantify at this point, but that should be incrementally positive for us. And then we're making -- continue to make some growth investments. And as you just mentioned with positive free cash flow this year continue on into next year may allow us to further invest in incremental growth capital. Jason Johnson: I might add, Kevin, this is Jason, that you might want to include that $28 million legal settlement this quarter. Exclude that from the jump off from the 2025. Operator: The next question comes from Ben Hendrix with RBC Capital Markets. Benjamin Hendrix: Just a quick question for Kevin and Jason in turn. Just a little bit more color on your early observations in your roles. Kevin, you mentioned you've visited some facilities, any surprises or anything out of expectation in your review of the platform? And then any initiatives you guys are looking at? You talked a little bit already about capital deployment. But anything in operations or balance sheet management that could kind of deviate from your prior practice? Kevin Hammons: Thanks, Ben. I appreciate the question. I think the short answer is to say, I'm really excited about the direction of the company, and I'm confident that we have the right strategies and people in place to execute on our opportunities. We've had a -- I believe, a very smooth transition of leadership. And I believe we're already picking up momentum in a number of key areas. As I mentioned in my prepared remarks, we have taken the time to visit several local health systems. We've met with health system leaders and I think substantially all of our major markets already. They're very enthusiastic about the progress we're making. And I just -- and becoming increasingly confident that our investments, our strategic priorities, and the resources that we're appropriately laser-focused on those most important aspects of our business. I think we'll see some of that come to fruition here in the near term with a few areas. I'm highly focused on quality of care. So our quality, ratings, our patient and physician experience, employee satisfaction, and I won't take my CFO hat on, and I'll continue to be laser-focused on free cash flow and making sure we've made such great progress over the last, probably, 9 quarters in a row on free cash flow trending positively, now that we're getting to kind of cross over from being negative to positive free cash flow. I think that's going to give us a lot more opportunity. So as I think though about those kind of 5 priority areas for myself and the progress that we're already making on quality and getting focused on the others. I think that will help really accelerate what we can do in the future. Jason Johnson: Brian, this is Jason. Kevin alluded to as CFO hat so. I'm in the position of following the guy who's still here. And Kevin put into place to focus on adjusted free cash flow in that virtuous cycle, and that's -- we're continuing to make sure that we're laser focused on that. So no change there. I do think about that, we got the ERP fully implemented earlier this year. So continuing to optimize that as a big focus. Evaluation of the most efficient use of proceeds from any divestitures, whether that's investment in capital or deleveraging through debt repurchases. So from my standpoint, it's just -- I've been here with Kevin for a number of years. So I understand what his vision is financially and aligned with it and we're continuing on. Benjamin Hendrix: Great. Appreciate that. Just a quick follow-up to a prior comment. With the sequential surgical trend you saw from 2Q into 3Q, anything changing in the way we should think about typical 4Q elective seasonality? Kevin Hammons: I do feel that with the improvement in payer mix in Q3, it gives me a little more confidence that Q4 could look more like the normal seasonal recovery. There was some concern that if commercial patients did not come back in Q3, and you get late in the year and people have not met their co-pay and deductible yes, they may put it off until early 2026. It's looking less likely that, that will occur. But with the continued kind of headlines around health care and some uncertainty, we did not want to get ahead of ourselves in terms of guidance, or suggesting that it could be better. But I think we're in a pretty good position coming into Q4. There's also potentially an opportunity that people are concerned who have exchange insurance, about losing it. There may be some more of that comes back in Q4. It's a relatively small component of our net revenues, is less than 5% of our net revenues. So I don't think it's a real material needle mover for us, but it potentially could be a slight positive. Operator: The next question comes from Andrew Mok with Barclays. Andrew Mok: I think I want to just follow up on some of those encouraging volume trends. Were those trends you saw exiting 3Q, or at the start of 4Q? And from a category standpoint, what are you seeing? And is the payer mix improvement generally driven more by the employer-based coverage, or the ACA? Kevin Hammons: So we saw the payer mix improvements really beginning early Q3 in July. So the -- we saw that improvement throughout Q3. So I think our expectation would be that, that will likely continue into Q4. Now from a comp perspective, Q4 of 2024 was strong and particularly kind of the post-election period, we saw consumer confidence kind of spike in Q4 of last year. So we will have that to climb over. But all in all, directionally and sequentially, I would say that we should continue -- or we expect that we could continue to see some improvement Q3 to Q4. In terms of where we're seeing improvement in terms of the breakdown? It was primarily in commercially insured business, although we did see improvement in exchange as well. But again, the exchange business is a relatively small component of our overall net revenues. Andrew Mok: Great. And on the government side of things, Indiana is one of your largest states, which I think has the large -- one of the largest declines in state Medicaid enrollment to date. Are you seeing the impact of tighter Medicaid eligibility in states like Indiana impact your Medicaid volume results? Kevin Hammons: We've not. We've not experienced any significant impact, specifically to Indiana from that. Operator: The next question comes from Jason Cassorla with Guggenheim. Jason Cassorla: Can you guys hear me? Kevin Hammons: Yes Jason. Jason Cassorla: Okay. Got it. I just wanted to touch quickly. I think you noted kind of thinking about 2026 and the favorable Medicare IPPS coming in. Obviously, the -- we're waiting on the final outpatient rule. But like as you think about -- if the outpatient were to come in as proposed, like how do you think about the net of those two pieces as it relates to 2026? Were they largely offset each other? Or are there nuances from a Medicare rate perspective if the OPPS comes in as proposed? Kevin Hammons: I would say with the proposed outpatient, but we know an inpatient proposed outpatient, I still think it's a little net positive to 2026 over 2024. Sorry, 2025. Jason Cassorla: Okay. Great. And maybe just more of a high-level question. On the ambulatory front, I know you have new access points opening up, including a few ASCs. But as you step back, can you just discuss your ambulatory strategy or remind us, help frame maybe what inning you're in, in terms of building out those access points and how that's helped your market share position? And anything else along those front would be very helpful. Kevin Hammons: Sure. So we are -- continue to look at access points. We've been investing in those for some time. I think each market -- in our markets, each market is a little bit different. We've taken a little different strategy in those markets where we've had capacity constraints on the inpatient side. We have invested in more inpatient dollars, such as this past year, we opened up new towers in Knoxville, Tennessee, where we added, I believe, 58 beds, and we added a new patient tower in Foley, Alabama. Both of those markets, we had capacity constraints. Currently, we do not have any of those kind of larger construction projects on the inpatient side in flight. And so as we kind of move through '25 into 2026, more of our dollars will be focused on the access points, whether that's urgent care, freestanding EDs, ASCs, and so forth. And so I think those are lower dollar. We can do more of them kind of for the same amount of capital. Now we have been opening 3 to 4 freestanding EDs per year. We have, I believe, 3 ASCs scheduled for opening this quarter here in 2025 -- in the fourth quarter of 2025. We'll probably target kind of 6 to 8 ASCs for next year in 2026 along with some additional freestanding EDs and possibly some urgent care centers. And then we're always also acquiring clinics and hiring new doctors into our existing clinics as well. Operator: The next question comes from Stephen Baxter with Wells Fargo. Unknown Analyst: This is Mitchell on for Steve. Can you please highlight what drove the 5.6% growth in same-store revenue per admission, and kind of what you see as a sustainable rate there? Jason Johnson: Steven, this is Jason. About 1/3 of that 5.6% improvement in same-store net revenue per AA is a result of the Tennessee and New Mexico state-directed payments programs that were approved in the second quarter. And then the rest of the improvement is payer mix related. And there is some offset. We did have a little bit lower acuity. Kevin Hammons: I might -- just to add in terms of kind of what's sustainable. We think a mid-single-digit net revenue growth and net revenue per growth is a sustainable number. And between your Medicare rate increases our commercial rate increases, we expect acuity to recover going forward. Right now, there is some dilutive impact on the net revenue per AA with the softer outpatient surgeries, particularly orthopedic and cardiac surgeries, which have been areas of softness. But as those come back, we should see a lift in the net revenue per AA, just that they're higher acuity services. Operator: The next question comes from Josh Raskin with Nephron. Josh, your line is open. You may now ask your questions. We appear to have lost connection with Josh... Joshua Raskin: I'm sorry, do you guys hear me? Kevin Hammons: We can. Joshua Raskin: Sorry. Can you speak to trends from payers around denials and underpayments, maybe just an update there and more importantly, around maybe the mitigation of those pressures? And I'm curious if you're using any external vendors? Or is it all internal services on the RCM side and maybe any changes that have been there through the year? Kevin Hammons: Sure. So we called out really third quarter last year and in 2024, a big spike in denials. And since that time, it's stabilized. It is not really gotten any worse. But we continue to invest in our physician adviser program. We're investing in some AI tools in terms of how we do denials with our internal revenue recycle team. We are using a combination of third-party vendors as well as internally developed products on that for purposes of our revenue cycle team. Our revenue cycle is managed internally with our own team that they do use a combination of products. So as we get better at it, I would say we've been able to kind of hold things stable, which would indicate that the payers are probably also denying more claims, but we've been more efficient or better at overturning some of those denials in order to kind of keep things status quo. Joshua Raskin: Perfect. Perfect. That's helpful. And maybe just a quick one. Flu season. It seems like off to a little bit of a slow start. I assume that's contemplated in guidance, and I'd be curious if you guys are seeing any updates into October as we kind of move into flu season? Kevin Hammons: Yes. It is contemplated in guidance, and we haven't seen any big pickup yet in our facilities and the heavy flu. So at this point, I'm not sure we'll -- what we'll see yet for the remainder of the quarter, but we have kind of taken that into consideration. Operator: This concludes our question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to Mr. Hammons for any closing remarks. Kevin Hammons: Thank you, everyone, for joining us on the call today. I want to close by reiterating my thanks for our team members at CHS for their commitments and confidence through the leadership transition as we approach the future together. If you have any additional questions, you can always reach us at (615) 465-7000. Have a good day, everyone. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good morning, everyone, and welcome to Grupo Televisa's Third Quarter 2025 Conference Call. Before we begin, I would like to draw your attention to the press release, which explains the use of forward-looking statements and applies to everything discussed in today's call and in the earnings release. Please note, this event is being recorded. I would now like to turn the call over to Mr. Alfonso de Angoitia, Co-Chief Executive Officer of Grupo Televisa. Please go ahead. Alfonso de Angoitia Noriega: Thank you, Elsa. Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us. With me today are Francisco Valim, CEO of Cable and Sky and Carlos Phillips, CFO of Grupo Televisa. Before discussing our third quarter operating and financial performance, let me share with you what we believe are the key milestones achieved this year, both at Grupo Televisa and TelevisaUnivision. At Grupo Televisa, let me touch on 4 major achievements. First, our strategy to focus on attracting and retaining value customers in cable has allowed us to grow our Internet subscriber base in the first 9 months of the year compared to the end of 2024. Second, we keep executing on implementation of OpEx efficiencies and the integration between Izzi and Sky to extract further synergies. This has already contributed to expanding our consolidated operating segment income margin by 100 basis points in the first 9 months of the year to 38.2% driven by year-on-year OpEx reduction of around 7%. Third, we continue to keep a disciplined CapEx deployment approach to focus on free cash flow generation. So far this year, we have invested MXN 7.5 billion in CapEx, which is equivalent to 16.8% of sales. In the fourth quarter, CapEx deployment should remain at similar levels to those of the third quarter. Still, our CapEx budget of $600 million for 2025 implies a reasonable CapEx to sales ratio of less than 20% for the full year. We have been able to achieve this mainly because we have had successful negotiations with suppliers, resulting in more favorable terms. And fourth, during the first 9 months of the year, we have generated around MXN 4.2 billion in free cash flow, allowing us to prepay a bank loan due in 2026 with a principal amount of around MXN 2.7 billion. This debt repayment comes on top of the $220 million principal amount of our senior notes already paid on March 18. Additionally, at the end of the third quarter, Grupo Televisa's leverage ratio of 2.1x EBITDA compared to 2.5x at the end of last year, mainly driven by our free cash flow generation. And at TelevisaUnivision, I will mention 3 key milestones. First, engagement and growth for ViX remains solid with strong momentum across both our free and premium tiers. Moreover, the Gold Cup semifinals and final and the compelling entertainment in sports slate that included the third season of La casa de los famosos, Mexico and our broadcast of Liga MX and the NFL helped drive a high single-digit increase in MAUs and robust demand for advertisers and ViX. Second, the efficiency plan to reduce operating expenses at TelevisaUnivision by over $400 million in 2025 is delivering outstanding results. In the first 9 months of the year, our total operating expenses have declined by around 12% year-on-year for total savings of around $300 million. This shows a disciplined execution of our cost savings initiatives, including lower content, technology and marketing costs and the normalization of our DTC related investments. And third, looking at TelevisaUnivision's leverage and debt profile, the company ended the quarter at 5.5x EBITDA an improvement from 5.9x in the fourth quarter of 2024, driven by growth. Moreover, so far this year, TelevisaUnivision successfully refinanced $2.3 billion of debt. As discussed in our second quarter earnings conference call, the company successfully issued $1.5 billion of new 2032 senior secured notes and refinanced over $760 million of term loan A now due in 2030. In addition, more recently, TelevisaUnivision extended its $500 million revolving credit facility and its $400 million accounts receivable facility. These transactions strengthened TelevisaUnivision's balance sheet, enhanced its liquidity and extended its maturity profile with its nearest maturity now almost 3 years away. Deleveraging remains a core strategic priority for TelevisaUnivision and management remains committed to further strengthening the capital structure of the company over the coming quarters. Having said that, let me turn the call over to Valim as he will discuss the operating and financial performance of our consolidated assets. Francisco Valim Filho: Thank you, Alfonso. Good morning, everyone. As Alfonso mentioned, we had an excellent quarter in this third quarter. First, let me walk you through the operating and financial performance of our cable operations. We ended September with a network of almost 20 million homes after passing around 20,000 new homes during the quarter. Our monthly churn rate has remained below our historical average of 2% for 2 consecutive quarters as we continue to execute our strategy to focus on value customers while working on customers' retention and satisfaction. Our broadband gross adds continues to improve on a sequential basis, allowing us to deliver 22,000 net adds during the third quarter compared to net adds of around 6,000 in the second quarter and disconnections of about 6,000 in the first quarter. In video, we also experienced a strong gross adds than in the first 2 quarters of the year and managed to reduce churn. Therefore, we lost about 43,000 video subscribers during the third quarter compared to 53,000 cancellations in the second quarter and 73,000 disconnections in the first quarter of the year. Moreover, we expect the improving trends to continue going forward, influenced by our recently announced multiyear partnership with Formula 1 to provide live coverage of all Grand Prix via Sky Sports channels available through Izzi and Sky. Beginning in the fourth quarter of this year until 2028 season, Formula 1 is the one of the fastest-growing and most passionate sports events in Mexico and around the world, and we definitely see this as a competitive advantage relative to our peers. Moving to mobile. Our net adds of 94,000 subscribers during the quarter continued to gain momentum, beating the 83,000 net adds of the second quarter and doubling those of the first quarter. Our innovative MVNO service developed by ZTE, offering enhanced user experience is already making our bundles more competitive and allowing us to increase our share of wallet from our existing customers. During the quarter, net revenues from our residential operations of MXN 10.6 billion, which accounted for around 91% of total cable revenue decreased by only 0.7% year-on-year. This marked the best quarter of the last 2 years at our residential operations from the revenue growth performance standpoint and compares well to a decline of 3% in the first half of the year. On a sequential basis, net revenue from our residential operations grew by 0.4%, potentially signaling an ongoing gradual recovery. During the quarter, revenue from our enterprise operations of MXN 1.1 billion, which accounted for around 9% of our cable revenue increased by 7.7% year-on-year. This also marks the best quarter of the last 3 years of our enterprise operations from a revenue growth performance standpoint and compares favorably to growth of 3% in the second quarter and a decline of 4.5% in the first quarter of this year. Moving on to Sky's operating and financial performance. During the third quarter, we lost 329,000 revenue-generating units, mostly coming from prepaid subscribers that have not been recharging their services. In addition, beginning in the second quarter, we started to charge an installation fee of MXN 1,250 to all satellite pay TV subscribers to increase the return on investment for this service. This translated into a slowdown of video gross additions for Sky that has been steady over the last 2 quarters. Sky's second quarter revenue of MXN 3.1 billion declined by 18.2% year-on-year mainly driven by a lower subscriber base. To sum up, segment revenue of MXN 14.7 billion fell by 4.4% year-on-year, while operating segment income of MXN 5.7 billion declined by only 0.7%, making it the best quarter of the year as we appear to be very close to reaching operating segment income stabilization. Our operating segment income margin of 38.5% extended by 140 basis points year-on-year, mainly driven by the efficiency measures that we have been implementing and synergies from the ongoing integration between Izzi and Sky. Regarding CapEx deployment, our total investment of MXN 3.6 billion account for 24.3% of sales during the third quarter. This shows a material sequential increase in CapEx deployment, but it is in line with our updated CapEx budget for 2025 of $600 million. Finally, operating cash flow for Cable and Sky, which is equivalent to EBITDA minus CapEx was MXN 2.1 billion in the third quarter, representing 14.2% of sales. Alfonso de Angoitia Noriega: Thank you, Valim, best quarter of the year indeed. Now let me take you through TelevisaUnivision's third quarter results. The company's third quarter revenue of $1.3 billion declined by 3% year-on-year, while adjusted EBITDA of $460 million increased by 9%. Excluding political advertising, revenue fell by 1% year-on-year, marking a sequential improvement compared to both the first and second quarters of this year. On the other hand, also excluding political advertising, adjusted EBITDA increased by 13% year-on-year, underscoring the scalability of a profitable DTC business and the sustained impact of cost reductions initiatives launched at the end of last year. Moving on to the details of our revenue performance. During the quarter, consolidated advertising revenue decreased by 6% year-on-year or 3% excluding political advertising expenditure. In the U.S., advertising revenue was 11% lower as growth in ViX continued to partially offset linear declines. Within ViX, the Gold Cup, semifinals and finals helped drive a high single-digit increase in MAUs and robust demand from advertisers. In Mexico, advertising revenue increased by 3% year-on-year, primarily driven by private and public sector ad sales that powered ARPU growth for ViX. Results this quarter benefited from a compelling entertainment and sports slate that including the performance of the third season of La casa de los famosos Mexico, dramas such as Monteverde and Amanecer and our broadcast of Liga MX and the NFL. During the quarter, consolidated subscription and licensing revenue increased by 3% year-on-year, driven by ViX's premium tier and higher content licensing revenue. In the U.S., subscription and licensing revenue grew by 11%, supported by ViX and results included a mid-single-digit increase in linear subscription revenue and higher content licensing revenue due to timing of content delivery. In Mexico, subscription and licensing revenue fell by 17%. Excluding the impact of the renewal cycle, subscription and licensing revenue in Mexico grew by 5% driven by ViX. To wrap up, Bernardo and I remain confident that our focus on value customers, efficiencies and ongoing integration between Izzi and Sky at Grupo Televisa and further integration and operational optimization at the TelevisaUnivision now that our DTC business has gained scale and achieved profitability will allow us to create greater value for our shareholders throughout this year. Now we are ready to take your questions. Operator, could you please provide instructions for the Q&A. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from Marcelo dos Santos with JPMorgan. Marcelo Santos: The first question is if you could comment a bit the CapEx outlook for 2026. How do you see this trending? And the second question is regarding the insurance claim you received. Was that related to Hurricane Otis? And is there something left to be received? Alfonso de Angoitia Noriega: Thank you, Marcelo. I'll ask Valim to answer both questions. Francisco Valim Filho: We gave -- Marcelo, we gave a guidance of around $600 million, and we should be within that range. Regarding the insurance claim, I think that's the last portion of the claim on the Otis Acapulco situation. So we shouldn't be seeing anything more from that event. Marcelo Santos: Valim, just one question. The CapEx for 2026, so for next year you're... Francisco Valim Filho: 2026, no 2026 is so far away, Marcelo. No, no, no. Alfonso de Angoitia Noriega: Let's finish 2025, then we can talk about '26. Operator: Our next question comes from Matthew Harrigan with Benchmark. Matthew Harrigan: You've actually reached a point in the U.S. when you look at the entire TV industry, there's more consumption on streaming than on linear. And I know your linear is much more durable than your English language peers. But you've got tremendous local programming positions, particularly in news and some of the largest U.S. EMAs. Are you really taking a lot of our -- hopefully, eventually almost all the news content on local stations and the distinctive content on the local stations and moving that to ViX over time because it feels like it would be a shame to lose the local identity. You have those stations because eventually, linear is going to fall off even for Hispanic audiences. And then secondly, clearly, a very dynamic situation in the U.S. and Mexico right now. Are you doing anything more on the BC side in relation to advertising for investments? And also, I can't help but ask, what's your general perspective on the U.S. and the imaginations with the administration on the tariff side and the prospects for near-shoring and everything going on. I know this is kind of ridiculously open-ended question. But just any thoughts on the stability of the economic relationship with the U.S. Alfonso de Angoitia Noriega: Yes. Thank you, Matthew, for your questions. I think, as to your first one, local news is very important for us. We are very strong in the local places where we produce news and local programming. We are exploring the possibility of including that in our streaming platform. We haven't yet included all of that content, but we're exploring that. The good thing is that, as I was saying, the local content is very strong. So very popular. As to your second question, we have made media for equity deals with great companies with great startups. We have assembled a great portfolio, I would say, and more companies are coming to us as they realize the importance of our platforms. And this is because of the strength of our platforms, we can position and grow their products and especially their brands when they're launching. Companies like Kavak, like Rappi, have become our ambassadors. At the beginning, we had doubts about the strength of linear television and most specifically in Mexico. But now they have become ambassadors of ours. We will continue to do these deals as we generate value with unsold inventory. And these companies become regular clients. So it's basically a funnel for these start-ups to grow, to position their brands, to position their products. And we take equity, which is great at very good valuations, and then they become regular clients and this is basically unsold inventory. So we're very happy with the portfolio we have been able to put together, and we'll continue to do this. As to your last question, I think that the Mexican government President, Sheinbaum has done an extraordinary job in dealing with the negotiations, the trade negotiations. I think that Mexico and the U.S. are key partners. If you look at the border region, it's one of the largest economies in the world by itself. The border, the legal border crossings that happened every day are in the millions. So I mean it's an integrated region. It's an integrated economy. So I believe that eventually, we'll be able to get to the right deal for Mexico and for the U.S. Operator: Our next question comes from Alex Azar with GBM. Alejandro Azar Wabi: Few ones on competition, Valim, on cable. If you can share a little bit of color on short-term and medium-term dynamics, especially when seeing how competitors are adding 1 million, 1.5 million net adds per year. It seems that in 2, 3 years, the market is going to be fully penetrated. So that would be my first question. And the second one is on Sky. With the levels of net disconnections you have year after year, how should we think about the EBITDA contribution in the next couple of years from Sky? Alfonso de Angoitia Noriega: Thank you, Alex. Valim? Francisco Valim Filho: Thank you, Alfonso. Well, I agree 100% with you. With this amount of net adds on a yearly basis, the market is very close to being fully penetrated. That's why our strategy is not going after volume because we know that we will be fighting for prices at the lower end of the pyramid. So our aim is to focus on the higher-end clients. That's why we have -- we are the only company in Mexico increasing ARPU consistently across the board. So I think that's the focus. So we think there's obviously a diminishing returns of this fight for the volumes of subscribers. And that's why our strategy moved away from that, and we have been successful in doing that. Regarding Sky, Alex, the way I see Sky is very straightforward. This is a business that will eventually disappear. Why? The penetration of the fiber networks and the amount of OTTs and the availability of a linear TV through cable and fiber operators is something that will obviously position Sky to only subscribers that are outside of those covered areas. So it will by definition then keep on declining. So how we perceive it, we perceive it as a cash flow from existing subscribers minus the programming cost, minus the technological cost of the satellite and all that is involved in that and then it generates a positive cash flow. That's the business and it has been generating positive cash flow and for the foreseeable future, we'll see positive contribution from Sky as a cash flow perspective. Obviously, it has this negative optics on our revenue, but just the way we see it is we've kind of segregate that from everything else and see that as an inflow of cash flow and everything else is more a stable growing businesses. Alfonso de Angoitia Noriega: Yes. And to add to your first question, to add on what Valim was saying, in Mexico, we have a 4-player market, but it's a pretty rational market, except for Telmex, which has kept its entry price unchanged for, I guess, more than 10 years, while also increasing Internet speeds and offering Netflix now for 3 -- for 6 months. They don't seem to be really interested in the profitability of Telmex as they extract value from the lease of fiber owned by other subsidiaries of theirs. And the other Megacable raised prices by around MXN 30 per month from the beginning of the year. So there, you can see that the industry is raising prices, except for Telmex. Totalplay also announced price hikes from April particularly from broadband customers that are heavy data users. So even though it's a 4-player market, it's a rational market and if you look at the prices and ARPU, we feel comfortable, and we feel confident that this will remain like that. Alejandro Azar Wabi: If I can just add a follow-up on Sky remarks. When you say Sky probably will disappear. I'm just thinking that there must be some part of the population that where fiber is not around, and they -- if Sky becomes the only thing that they can use, especially for video. Do you guys have an approximate of that? I don't know. Alfonso de Angoitia Noriega: No, you're absolutely right. I mean there are rural areas where a satellite provider makes sense. I don't know. Francisco Valim Filho: No, I don't think they will disappear per se. It's obviously a diminishing volume like we have been seeing and we'll keep on seeing. But just to give an example, in Central America, we have close to 100,000 subscribers basically flat because in those areas, there are less competitors offering a fiber network or a cable network. And it is very stable. And like Mexico, where we are all deploying network and expanding our infrastructure. So yes, I don't think it will disappear, not just there will be a day that will be just shut down. I think it will still have -- and I think there are just several hundred thousand people living in areas where there's no other option for entertainment and Sky will keep on being a solution. But that's why we don't see this as a -- I understand some people see this as a problem. We actually see this as an upside given the fact that we're generating positive cash flow. Alfonso de Angoitia Noriega: Yes. I think Valim is absolutely right. We see Sky as a cash flow. And the more we extend, we prolong the life of the subscribers, it's going to be an amazing driver for our cash flow. Operator: Our next question comes from Ernesto Gonzalez with Morgan Stanley. Ernesto Gonzalez: Look, I know it's early but going back to the discussion on broadband penetration in Mexico. Do you have any -- or can you share any expectations for cable growth rates next -- sorry, next year? Do you believe that you can accelerate growth for the unit. And the second question is on the sustainability of margins for Cable Sky but also TelevisaUnivision. They were strong in the third quarter. So I wanted to get a sense of how much more room they have to grow going forward. Francisco Valim Filho: Well, I think that -- back to your point Ernesto, I think that it's key to understand that obviously, as penetrations go higher, the level of net adds will diminish for every player in the market. And you have already saw that. As you see quarter after quarter after quarter, we already see a diminishing number of net adds being added to the different players. So that's a diminishing return in other countries like Brazil, for example, where the penetration is significantly higher even than Mexico. You see there's this dynamic as well and companies find ways by selling more products to the same existing customers to keep revenues growing but obviously, you're not going to be seeing high double-digit numbers because of the dynamic of the market. So like Alfonso just said, this is a very rational market. Nobody is flashing, prep is down. The promotions are very reasonable. And everybody is actually making money in this market like our cash flow generation that we have just presented. This is significantly -- is very significant. So I think that's a dynamic in mature market that you'll see. And what happens is you add more products, better products, more speeds and that's how you keep on increasing ARPU. And that's why we think the strategy of going after the high-end customers, they have more disposable income available as opposed to the other end of the pyramid. And I think regarding margins of cable... Alfonso de Angoitia Noriega: No. I think he asked about TU... Francisco Valim Filho: No, no, no. The answer is not over. Alfonso de Angoitia Noriega: Okay. Go ahead. Francisco Valim Filho: So the idea here is we think that we keep on improving margins. This is an ongoing, never stopping exercise that will go internally. And we find that through many different ways, mostly through technology. Obviously, we still are collecting a few synergies from Sky mostly through technology and improvement in how we provide services and processes. So there is an ongoing effort to increase margins. I'm talking about cable. Alfonso de Angoitia Noriega: Yes. Yes. And about -- I mean, TU amazing margins. I think that was a result of the cost cutting and all that we did in terms of costs and expenses in the fourth quarter of last year, which are being reflected in this year. We believe that we have the highest margins in the industry. And that has to do with that cost cutting, $415 million. And also, it has to do with owning the largest library of content in Spanish in the world, more than 300,000 hours of content. It also has to do with the very efficient way in which we produce content, especially in our studios in Mexico. And that allows us to have these amazing margins. So I think those margins in the mid-30s are sustainable. Operator: This concludes our question and answer session. I Would like to turn the conference back over to Mr. Alfonso de Noriega for any closing remarks. Alfonso de Angoitia Noriega: Well, thank you very much for participating in our call. And if you have any questions, please give us a call. Have a great weekend. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Hello, and welcome to the HCA Healthcare Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. Today's call is being recorded. At this time, for opening remarks and introductions, I would like to turn the call over to Vice President of Investor Relations, Mr. Frank Morgan. Please go ahead, sir. Frank Morgan: Good morning, and welcome to everyone on today's call. With me this morning is our CEO, Sam Hazen; and CFO, Mike Marks. Sam and Mike will provide some prepared remarks, and then we'll take questions. Before I turn the call over to Sam, let me remind everyone that should today's call contain any forward-looking statements, they're based on management's current expectations. Numerous risks, uncertainties and other factors may cause actual results to differ materially from those that might be expressed today. More information on forward-looking statements and these factors are listed in today's press release and in our various SEC filings. On this morning's call, we will reference measures such as adjusted EBITDA, which is a non-GAAP financial measure. A table providing supplemental information on adjusted EBITDA and reconciling net income attributable to HCA Healthcare, Inc. is included in today's release. This morning's call is being recorded, and a replay of the call is available later today. With that, I'll now turn the call over to Sam. Samuel Hazen: All right. Good morning and thank you for joining the call. As reflected in our earnings release for the third quarter, the company produced strong results when compared to last year with 42% growth in diluted earnings per share as adjusted. Revenue increased by 9.6%, which was driven by broad-based volume growth, improved payer mix, more utilization of complex services and additional revenue from Medicaid supplemental programs. We also translated this revenue growth into better margins with disciplined operations. As a result, you will see in this morning's release that we raised our guidance for the year to reflect this performance and our outlook for the fourth quarter. Our teams continue to execute our agenda at a high level across many operational measures, including quality and key stakeholder satisfaction. Outcomes were better year-over-year. I want to thank our 300,000 HCA colleagues who once again demonstrated excellence in what they do. As a team, we remain disciplined in our efforts to improve care for our patients by increasing access, investing in advanced digital tools and training our people. These investments allow us to enhance capacity, improve service offerings and gain efficiency. Making it easier for our -- for us to provide better services to our patients, physicians and the communities we serve. Typically, on our third-quarter earnings call, we provide some preliminary perspectives on the upcoming year. Before I get to these, I want to comment on the enhanced premium tax credits. We continue to advocate strongly for the extension of this program for the 24 million Americans who depend on it for health insurance coverage. Today, we believe there is greater recognition by legislators of the negative impact this issue will have on families, small businesses and individuals than earlier in the year. At this point, however, we still do not know how this policy will play out. Because of the fluid nature of the federal policy environment, we will limit our early thoughts for 2026 to our views on demand and the cost environment. We continue to see solid demand across our markets for health care services and believe volumes will be within our long-term 2% to 3% growth range. As it pertains to operating costs, we expect mostly stable trends consistent with the past couple of years. As usual, there are some pressures in certain areas, but we believe our resiliency plan should provide some relief. It is important to note that we are still early in next year's planning process, and these preliminary views may change before our fourth quarter's earnings call when we will provide you with our guidance for 2026. So let me close with this. As we work to complete another successful year for HCA Healthcare, we believe the company is well-positioned to sustain high levels of performance in the years to come. Organizationally, we have strengthened enterprise capabilities to execute at a higher level through our previously restructured management team and improved management systems. Competitively, our networks have enhanced service offerings for patients with more outpatient facilities, greater inpatient capacity and improved operations. And financially, because of the increased cash flow and stronger balance sheet, we have the resources to invest more in our strategic agenda. With that, I will turn the call over to Mike for more information on the quarter and our updated guidance. Mike Marks: Thank you, Sam, and good morning. The company produced solid results during the third quarter. The demand for health care services was strong in the third quarter with same facility equivalent admissions increasing 2.4% over the prior year. Our surgical volume growth also improved with the same-facility inpatient surgical volume of 1.4% and outpatient surgical volume up 1.1% in the third quarter over the prior year. Same facility ER visits increased 1.3% in the quarter over the prior year. Commercial and Medicare ER visits combined increased 4.1% in the third quarter of 2025 to prior year, whereas Medicaid and self-pay ER visits were both down to prior year. We have also seen a slow start to the respiratory season in 2025, which is impacting the year-over-year growth rate in our admissions and ER visits by an estimated 50 and 70 basis points, respectively. Our net revenue per equivalent admission growth in the quarter reflected strong payer mix, improved dispute resolution results, consistent case mix index and increased Medicaid state supplemental payment revenues. Regarding payer mix during the quarter, same-facility total commercial equivalent admissions increased 3.7% over prior year, with exchanges growing 8% and commercial, excluding exchanges, growing 2.4%. Medicare increased 3.4%, Medicaid increased 1.4% and self-pay declined 6%. Regarding Medicaid supplemental payment programs, as we've said in the past, these programs are complex, variable in timing and do not fully cover our cost to treat Medicaid patients. Considering these programs in isolation, the revenue growth from these programs drove about half of the overall increase in net revenue per equivalent admission in the third quarter compared to the prior year. And we saw an approximate $240 million increase in net benefit to adjusted EBITDA from these programs in the third quarter of 2025 over the prior year. This increase was largely driven by Tennessee program payments and the approvals of grandfathered applications in Kansas and Texas. We were pleased with our operating leverage and expense management in the quarter. The improvement in adjusted EBITDA margin was driven primarily by good performance in labor and supplies. As expected, we did see contract labor expenses flat in the prior year. Same-facility contract labor was basically flat in third quarter of 2025 to the prior year and represented 4.2% of total labor costs in the third quarter of 2025. The increase in other operating expenses as a percentage of revenue in the quarter was driven primarily by increased expenses related to Medicaid state supplemental payments and to a lesser extent, professional fees compared to the prior year. Our work progressed to both enhance and accelerate our resiliency program as we prepare for the future. Through these efforts, we continue to identify a robust set of opportunities across revenue and cost to improve efficiencies. The growth in our adjusted EBITDA in the third quarter reflects our strong operating performance and the increase in supplemental payments. We would also note the estimated $50 million impact from the hurricanes in the third quarter of 2024. Moving to capital allocation. We continue to execute our strategy of allocating capital for long-term value creation. Cash flow from operations was $4.4 billion in the quarter with $1.3 billion in capital expenditures, $2.5 billion in share repurchases and $166 million in dividends. Year-to-date, we've been able to defer approximately $1.3 billion in federal income tax payments to the fourth quarter due to the IRS providing relief to Tennessee taxpayers in the aftermath of severe weather in early April. Our debt to adjusted EBITDA leverage remained in the lower half of our stated guidance range, and we believe our balance sheet is strong and well-positioned for the future. So with that, let me speak to our 2025 guidance. As noted in our release this morning, we are updating the full year guidance as follows: we expect revenues to range between $75 billion and $76.5 billion. We expect net income attributable to HCA Healthcare to range between $6.50 billion and $6.72 billion. We expect adjusted EBITDA to range between $15.25 billion and $15.65 billion. We expect diluted earnings per share to range between $27 and $28. We expect capital spending to be approximately $5 billion. We now anticipate our supplemental payment full year net benefit to be $250 million to $350 million favorable comparing full-year 2025 versus 2024. This guidance update does not include any potential impact in 2025 from any additional approvals of grandfathered applications under the Act. And at the midpoint, this guidance assumes a $120 million decline in net benefit from Medicaid state supplemental payments in fourth quarter of 2025 versus the prior year due to onetime payments in the year. Consistent with our comments on the second quarter call, we believe our hurricane-impacted markets will produce approximately $100 million in adjusted EBITDA growth in full-year 2025 over 2024. Year-to-date, adjusted EBITDA in our hurricane markets is modestly below prior year, and we are anticipating all of this growth will occur in the fourth quarter. We are increasing our earnings guidance at the midpoint of adjusted EBITDA by $450 million. This represents an expected $250 million increase in net benefit from the state supplemental payment programs and $200 million increase from operational performance. With that, I will turn the call over to Frank for questions. Frank Morgan: Thank you, Mike. [Operator Instructions] [ Priela ], you may now give instructions to those who would like to ask a question. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Your first question comes from Ann Hynes with Mizuho Securities. Ann Hynes: Great. And thanks for all the detail on the DPP programs. Can you remind us -- I know there's other states that have preprints in for approval for grandfather programs. Can you remind us what states are still pending? And any quantification of what could be incremental would be great. Mike Marks: So as you think about kind of the states, there are several that have applied under the grandfathering programs, we've mentioned Florida before and certainly, that one is under review. There are a few others as well. I might mention Georgia and Virginia as well being in that list. We do not expect that CMS will be approving these additional grandfathering programs during the shutdown. I would say that we have reports that indicate though that the reviews between CMS and these states are active and those reviews continue during the shutdown. I might also mention that we were encouraged, coming up to the shutdown, that several states had approvals coming into the shutdown. So I think we're in a pretty good environment. We are, at this point, not going to size those potential applications until they get approved. But I did note in my comments, and I'll note again that the updated guidance that we gave you just now on this call does not include any potential impact from the applications that are still pending review with CMS. Operator: And your next question comes from the line of A.J. Rice with Credit Suisse. Albert J. Rice: Just to maybe ask on the public exchanges. So there's been some chatter and some of the managed care companies are talking about anticipating a potential step-up in volumes in the fourth quarter, elective procedures, because people are worried that they're going to lose coverage or their co-pays and deductibles will go up dramatically. I wonder if you're seeing an early scheduling for surgeries, for example, elective surgeries or anything else that would indicate that we might see that in the fourth quarter. And then if we do get disruption where people go off during the traditional open enrollment period, but then reset -- are able to reset because after open enrollment, special enrollment period is set up, would you be able -- if people show up in your emergency room, are you basically set up so you could get them re-signed up if that's a possibility under the special enrollment? Provisions if we get an extension, but it comes late. Mike Marks: So if you think about EPTCs and what happens with these exchanges, I would mention a couple of things. I mean, right now, we're really not sizing the potential impact given the fact that it's so fluid. There's going to be an enrollment period, as you know, that opens up here in a couple of weeks. When we get to the fourth quarter call, A.J., we'll have a lot more information. First about what is the deal potentially that comes out of this work in the government? Do they get extended? If they do get extended, what is the form of that extension? And then third, to your point, is timing. Do they -- do we end up with a special enrollment period at the end -- and so it's really difficult to size the potential impact of that until we get a little bit closer to the fourth quarter call, and that's when we'll intend to do that. We do have our financial counseling teams through our Parallon revenue cycle that helps our patients, both with things like Medicaid and with exchanges. It's the idea of them being able to do that on-site is not something that we can do, but we certainly can connect them to the appropriate resources to help them navigate that. And I think we've mentioned this in previous calls. We have structured our efforts here as we've gone through the balance of this year into next year to really beef up our resources with Parallon and broadly as a company to help patients navigate coverage, both on Medicaid and on the exchanges. And we feel really good about our preparation in that area, and we're going to try to help our patients navigate this season is very best that we can. Operator: And your next question comes from the line of Pito Chickering with Deutsche Bank. Pito Chickering: The quarter was a pretty strong beat even if we exclude the supplemental payments in the 3Q, but guidance didn't go up a whole lot past the beat you guys did this quarter, at least at the midpoint of the range. Can you give us any color on how we should think about the range of guidance implied on the fourth quarter, if we just steer towards one or the other? And also, if you can help provide a bridge from 3Q into 4Q as we think about the moving parts between hurricanes and supplemental payments. Mike Marks: When I think about fourth quarter growth rate, there's really 2 main considerations that I would think about and then the third being just operations. But the first would be the hurricane impact for sure. And then the second would be the decline in state supplemental payments that I noted in my comments when you compare fourth quarter of '25 to prior year. When we take those 2 factors into consideration, we believe the implied growth rate is still solid for fourth quarter in the kind of high single digits range, maybe 7% roughly. And then the other note I would give you, when you take those same considerations into account, our sequential growth from third quarter to fourth quarter is in line with our past trends. And so we feel that our guidance for fourth quarter is solid. I might also just note that our range in our guidance is intended to really cover a range of outcomes and including at the higher end of the range, even stronger performance as well. So that's how we're viewing the fourth quarter. Operator: And your next question comes from the line of Ben Hendrix with RBC Capital Markets. Benjamin Hendrix: Just a quick follow-up on the SDP guidance. How much in there did you recognize in the fourth -- or in the third quarter and is included in guidance for Tennessee specifically? And did you include -- recognize anything in the quarter and in guidance related to Texas? I know that got approved later in the quarter. I just want to see if you're including anything in there. Mike Marks: Thanks, Ben. So Tennessee was the largest driver of our net benefit in third quarter. We did receive cash in the third quarter of 2025, and we began accruing this program. So that's the update on Tennessee. Texas, as you know, we did receive approval of the grandfathered application. As this approval was really an enhancement to an existing program, this was really accrued just in our normal manner for third quarter of 2025. I might note being, though, that this grandfathered application really only had 1 month of impact for third quarter. The third one that we mentioned on call is Kansas, where we also received approval of the grandfathered application, we received caps for this program in third quarter of 2025 as well. This is a calendar year program, so 9 months of impact recorded in third quarter of '25. And Ben, let me just mention, like always with these programs, we always talk about that they're complex and variable. There were another number of pluses and minuses that you see across our portfolio of programs. So these 3 states with those pluses and minuses of all the other programs really led to the aggregate of the $240 million net benefit. It's always important to keep that in mind. Operator: And your next question comes from the line of Brian Tanquilut with Jefferies. Brian Tanquilut: Congrats on the quarter. Mike, I appreciate you highlighting how you guys have done really well with expense management, labor and supplies. So just curious, as I think of supplies cost, you guys have done a great job over the last few years keeping that fairly steady. At what point do those contracts reset? And then maybe the follow-up question for me on cost too is, as we think about your efforts to mitigate Medicaid cuts from '28 forward, when do we start seeing those efforts come through the P&L? I mean I'm guessing a lot of that -- those initiatives will start way before '28. Mike Marks: On supplies, Brian, we have a robust ongoing effort with supplies that we've communicated multiple times in the past. I mean, certainly, to HealthTrust, a lot of effort in flight on our contract renewal cycles. We tend to run 2-year cycles, some contracts as many as 3. And so those renewals flow as follows. And we spend a lot of effort in those contract negotiations, and that's certainly one component of our supply expense annual trends. The second component would be mix of technology. And so as you're aware, every year, there's new technology coming in. And then there's management of technologies that goes through its maturation cycle that's a big part of our overall management routines. The third part of our resiliency plan is our efforts to manage utilization. And so we have a very active resiliency plan. Supplies is one of those areas that we are continuing to both enhance and accelerate our resiliency plans focused on appropriate management of supplies and the utilization of supplies throughout the platform. As I think about bridging into the future, the other component that we're keeping a close watch on our tariffs, where our HealthTrust team continues to work through a very diligent effort to manage the tariff risk. Both in terms of sourcing, the way that we negotiate with contracts, our vendor partners on contracts and then also in terms of moving products and moving choices of products across countries of origins. So a lot of work in flight with supplies that I think you've seen not only help us manage supplies over the last several years, but we believe will continue to give us a very strong platform moving forward and our ability to manage supplies. You asked about resiliency. And really, we've had a long-standing resiliency effort in the company. As we've noted on the last couple of calls and noted again today, our work to both enhance and accelerate our resiliency plans continue as we prepare for the future. These are widespread across both our corporate platforms and our field platforms. really proud of the entire team at HCA, helping us to find additional opportunities to drive efficiencies. We're doing this through benchmarking. We're doing this through a robust focus on digital tools. Sam talks often about digital transformation, and it certainly applies to our resiliency and efficiency efforts. It's a big part of what we're doing. And then third, we're focused on our shared service platforms and the strength that they give us and the ability to expand their influence across the company is helpful as we continue to move forward. So a lot of good work going on with resiliency. And as we get into our fourth quarter call, we will intend to provide additional comments about our resiliency effort when we give 2026 full year guidance as well. Samuel Hazen: And Mike, let me add to resiliency. I mean we think about resiliency holistically. There -- it's clearly a financial resiliency culture within HCA that Mike's alluded to, and it's not event-driven. It's really a part of our culture. It's embedded within the disciplined thinking, the disciplined resource allocation and the disciplined execution. But holistically, we also think about other aspects of resiliency across the organization. First is what we call organizational resiliency, and I alluded to this in the fact that we had restructured. We're now embarking upon a more aggressive effort to develop our people, enhance the capabilities of our C-suites across our facilities and so forth, prepare for succession planning, all these things that go into having a very durable organization. And we have great people in HCA. We want to make them greater through our development programs. And we've asked our human resources department to invest even more in ramping up capabilities there. The second aspect of resiliency that's beyond financial, it's something I'll call network resiliency. Our organization within sort of the marketplace is also advancing resiliency with respect to adding more outpatient facilities, improving throughput within our facilities, investing in very targeted ways to improve our overall competitive positioning and then just operating at an even more excellent level when it comes to quality, engagement, efficiency, patient satisfaction, all these important fundamentals that help us endure through whatever cycles we have. And so our resiliency agenda is broad. It's across these 3 dimensions, and it puts us in a very strong position, we believe, to navigate tailwinds, push through headwinds, compete on the ground and produce solid outcomes. And we've got a pattern of doing that, and we're enhancing that now with technology. We're enhancing it with new capabilities within our shared service platform, as Mike alluded to, and we're further enhancing it with development of our people. Operator: And your next question comes from the line of Whit Mayo with Leerink Partners. Benjamin Mayo: I was wondering how you guys are thinking about capital deployment for next year. Obviously, you have the capacity to increase buybacks or the dividend or whatnot. But I know you evaluate every year. So I just wanted to take your temperature on preliminary thoughts. And then I think what I mean is like where do you think you will be spending differently versus prior years? Samuel Hazen: So, this is Sam. We're not ready to give you our financial plan for 2026 yet. I think it's a reasonable assumption to assume that our plan is going to be somewhat consistent with the methodologies we've used in the past. And so we need to get through the planning process that we're in now, see how some of the federal policies land. And from there, we will refine and define our capital allocation plan for 2026. But just as much as the culture of HCA is around resiliency and cost discipline and so forth, we have the same culture around capital allocation and finding the most productive ways to allocate it to benefit our networks and benefit our patients, but also benefit our shareholders. And that thinking will permeate our plan in 2026, just as it's done this year and in past years. Operator: And your next question comes from the line of Justin Lake with Wolfe Research. Justin Lake: A couple of things here. First, I think you mentioned payment dispute resolution is one of the drivers of revenue growth, pricing growth in the quarter. How much of a benefit there? And then another question on DPP. It sounds like your DPP number for 2025 benefit will be somewhere in the -- if I'm right, the $2.3 billion, $2.4 billion range billion this year. Is that the right number? And before any of these additional state approvals come through, what's the right run rate that we should think about going into 2026 when we normalize for stuff that might have been out of period? Mike Marks: So let me walk through NRA real quick, and then we'll talk a little bit about supplementals. When I think about our net revenue per equivalent admission growth, in the third quarter to prior year, first thing, and I mentioned this in them comments, Justin, but the first thing is about half of the growth was related to state supplemental payment increases in revenue. And so that's a piece. I also mentioned and it's the next biggest driver is payer mix. I mean, as we noted, with very strong payer mix in the quarter, and that's the next biggest driver for sure in our overall growth in net revenue per unit. Case mix index was pretty consistent. It was just up a tick, about 30 basis points to prior year. And then we're -- as we've noted in past calls, we continue to work on our dispute resolution activities, and they did provide some support in the quarter. And so those combined really drove the net revenue per unit growth I think on -- as I think about for the year and the state supplemental payments at this point, just keep in mind that we noted that we expect -- and part of what drove the earnings guidance is the net benefit from state supplemental payment programs, we're going to be about $250 million better for the quarter. And so you would just apply that now if you just think about kind of the walk up on state supplemental payment programs and you apply that to our full-year guidance, I think that gives you a sense that now we're expecting it to be $250 million to $350 million, favorable full-year '25 to full-year '24. And that gives you a sense of our kind of our early thinking as we kind of finish guidance right here, this is where we think the year will come in at this point. I did note, and there's a lot of volatility here, that guidance update does not include any additional impact from any other state supplemental payment programs that may get approved by CMS in 2025 once the government reopens. So just keep that in mind as well. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Andrew Mok with Barclays. Andrew Mok: Last quarter, you called out a few underperforming regions outside the hurricane markets. Can you give us an update on those markets and how addressable those issues are near term? Samuel Hazen: So we did mention that we had 2 of our 16 geographic divisions that had some challenges in the second quarter. One of those, I'm happy to say, has recovered. But within our portfolio, we're fortunate that we have a very diversified geographical base and a very diversified service base. And we've seen, again, very strong portfolio performance across the company in the third quarter. So one of the divisions recovered. The second one is still working its way through some of the challenges, and we're confident that we'll be where we need to be as we push into 2026. I think an important point here is the third quarter over the second quarter is always a challenging period. You got summer dynamics with vacations, physician movement during the summer months and so forth. And in this particular third quarter, we performed sequentially really well. And our core operations were managed very effectively from a cost standpoint. We saw a good mix of volume from the second quarter to the third quarter. So that's an encouraging seasonality aspect to this particular year versus some of the other years that we've seen. And I'm really proud of our teams and how they push through that. And again, with a large portfolio, you always have movements inside of it. But for the most part, none of them are material in and of themselves individually because we have other divisions that are outperforming our expectations and tend to provide cover for those that may have a struggle in the short term or what have you. Operator: And your next question comes from the line of Matthew Gillmor with KeyBanc. Matthew Gillmor: I thought I might ask about the growth in surgeries. There was a little bit of an improvement this quarter versus last quarter. Sam just mentioned some of the seasonal dynamics. Can you give us a sense for some of the service lines that are maybe doing a little bit better? Just anything to highlight there? Samuel Hazen: Well, when we look at our outpatient surgery, we had strong general surgery activity. Our urological service line was very strong on the outpatient side. On the inpatient side, our neurosciences surgical capabilities, our orthopedic surgical capabilities, cardiac, all of these were up and had very good performance on a year-over-year basis. So again, diversification is a powerful element for us. diversification amongst these service lines, different mills use for delivering care to our patients, all of it sort of works as a system to create again the enterprise performance that we're able to produce. But those are some of the categories that moved favorably. We had a couple that weren't as positive. Again, that's par for the course from one quarter to the other and not really indicative of anything structural. Our gynecology business on an outpatient in the third quarter was slightly down. So that's one item that was down, but it was covered by some of these other areas. And then within the inpatient side, our neurosurgery business was down modestly, and that impacted the inpatient business, but it was overcome by some of these other areas. Mike Marks: Matthew, I might also mention on outpatient surgery, that payer mix continues to be solid. Actually, Medicaid and self-pay volumes continue to be below prior year, which obviously implies that our commercial and Medicare business continues to be really strong. So we're seeing that in really good growth in overall net revenue in outpatient surgery and the translation to earnings. Samuel Hazen: One of the things we talked about at our investor conference back in November of '23 was what I term the staying power of HCA Healthcare. And that staying power is really connected to 3 points. One, the relevance of our systems within the communities that they serve. The second thing is the scale across the company when it comes to just the sheer size of HCA Healthcare. The third aspect to that is the diversification. And so you're hearing about how the diversification provides what I call staying power for our organization, allowing us to push forward with our agenda, produce solid returns on our capital and create better outcomes for our stakeholders. Operator: And your next question comes from the line of Scott Fidel with Goldman Sachs. Scott Fidel: I was hoping if you could maybe drill a bit more into the Medicare volumes in the quarter and break those down for us between Medicare Advantage and then fee-for-service, year-over-year and sequentially? And then just observations on case mix or acuity that you're seeing in the volume trends within those 2 categories of Medicare. Mike Marks: So Medicare Advantage was up 4.8% in the quarter over prior year. And then I think look what was traditional over there. [indiscernible] 90 bps, yes. Traditional was up 90 bps. Case Mix Index, the traditional Medicare case mix index was actually up a bit and Medicare Advantage was pretty flat to prior year. So those would be the 2 components of Medicare in the quarter. I think one of the things that we noted, and I'll go kind of more of a macro statement here is the improvement in our volume trends in third quarter to prior year versus second quarter to prior year. We saw that in Medicare. Medicare combined was up 3.4% on adjusted admissions. Medicaid was up 1.4% after being down for several quarters. And then as we noted, we saw good movement in our overall commercial business as well with self-pay being down 6%. So overall, really good operational growth, good demand growth across our payer categories, really with the one exception of being self-pay. Operator: And your next question comes from the line of Ryan Langston with TD Cowen. Ryan Langston: We've heard a lot of news on the pickup of hospital usage in AI, particularly in revenue cycle. Can you give us a sense on how your initiatives there are progressing and how much runway you see with the advances of technology in the future? Mike Marks: So you're right. I mean there's been a lot of commentary around this idea of utilization intensity and maybe coding intensity and the like. And I think it's important to note, we can't speak to all of the dynamics that the payers see across their various geographies and line of insurance. We've already noted from a pure volume perspective, what we're seeing volume-wise. I do think that both Medicare Advantage, the exchanges, you are seeing pretty good volumes this year, at least from HCA, and that's really the extent that we can speak to. As it relates to coding intensity, we think about that as case mix index. And from a case mix index perspective, it's pretty consistent with prior year and with trends. I think it was up 30 basis points in third quarter of '25 versus third quarter of '24 and actually down a little bit sequentially from second quarter. As we look at the individual lines of insurance, whether it's Medicare Advantage, Medicaid, exchanges and commercial, we're really not seeing any material changes in case mix index compared to the prior year at the detailed line level as well. It's always important to note, our coding practices remain consistent and accurate as verified by multiple layers of audits. Specifically related to AI, we do -- as Sam mentioned, we're deep into our efforts around digital transformation across our company, including in our revenue cycle. Our focus in terms of AI automation and our revenue cycle right now is really specifically focused on working to respond to the growing denial and underpayment activities from the payers. We have noted before, we are also both piloting and rolling out ambient AI documentation tools designed to help our physicians be more complete, more accurate and more timely in completing their clinical documentation. So that's a quick update of what we're seeing in the utilization space. Operator: And your next question comes from the line of Raj Kumar with Stephens Inc. Raj Kumar: Just kind of maybe focusing on the expense side and pro fees. Just maybe kind of any color on how that trended year-over-year? And as a sense, if we kind of bridge towards '26 and think about Valesco and how that's historically been a drag of $40 million to $50 million in the past for EBITDA on a quarterly basis, kind of how do you expect that to trend in 4Q and 2026? And what kind of opportunity is still there to maybe potentially achieve breakeven in '26? Mike Marks: So our same-facility professional fees increased 11% over the prior year in third quarter '25 versus third quarter '24. I'll note it's about a 1% sequential increase to second quarter of 2025. So professional fees continue to run hotter than just average inflationary levels across the rest of -- if you think about our cost structure, I might note that this is a bit more related to anesthesia and radiology this year. And so that's a bit of an update on pro fees. Professional fees on an as-reported basis still represent about 24% of total other operating expenses. Remember, Valesco was an acquisition. It's in part of our employee base. And so we don't really call that out separately other than just to say generally, and Sam might note additional commentary here, but we're pleased with our work around integrating Valesco and really making Valesco a strategic asset for the company as we're thinking about not only the ability to manage the cost structure of emergency physician management and hospital medicine. It also really helps us with our strategic work around things like case management, to improve our length of stay and the ability to manage our emergency rooms and drive really good emergency room efficiency. So the work around Valesco continues to mature and really proud of our operating and our physician management teams for the really good work around Valesco. Sam... Samuel Hazen: Yes. The only thing I would add there, Mike, is I would say, generally, we do expect continued financial improvement as we carry forward into 2026. We haven't finalized their budgets yet either. And so we don't have a number specific to that, but we are seeing progression -- favorable progression in the financial performance of Valesco. And beyond even operational improvements, as Mike was alluding to, we expect clinical improvement, patient engagement improvement and other clinical efficacy, if you will, from the opportunity that we have with Valesco being part of our organization now. So we're excited about what the prospects are. Operator: And your next question comes from the line of Ben Rossi with JPMorgan. Benjamin Rossi: Regarding maybe the capacity for incremental volumes, I appreciate your commentary regarding the stable operational backdrop and some of your existing efforts and patient throughput. I guess as we think about 4Q and the typical seasonal uptick in utilization, how would you characterize the incremental cost to manage additional throughput or free up additional capacity? And then are you seeing any variance across your markets and being able to ramp up this capacity in a cost-effective manner? Samuel Hazen: Well, the short answer is we don't see any significant capacity constraints at this particular point in time. If you recall from a couple of years ago, we had capacity constraints that were driven mostly by staffing and not having the workforce that we needed to take care of the patients who desired service in our facilities. We don't have that issue today. We've improved the net headcount of the company, and we believe we have good programmatic efforts in place today to put us in a position to carry forward the workforce necessary to meet the demand that we expect in the fourth quarter. And really on into next year, we're excited about some of the other operational initiatives that are being put forward with our emergency rooms. We have very specific surge planning that we're preparing for and learning from past years to improve our preparation and anticipation of demand surges in whatever periods we have. So we feel much better about our capacity on the labor side. We're also encouraged about the fact that we have more capital coming online in 2026 than we had this year. And that will add physical capacity and align with the workforce capacity that we're creating and put the company in an even better position to accommodate the demand that we anticipate. Mike Marks: I might add as well that the work that we've been putting forth to manage length of stay has also been very helpful. Third quarter showed really good performance around length of stay management. Those efforts continue not only into the fourth quarter, but into 2026. That also gives us the ability to make additional room for volume growth as we head into the future. So I really want to call out to our operating teams and our case management teams for really good work this year to help us prepare for volume growth in the future. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Jason Cassorla with Guggenheim. Jason Cassorla: Just wanted to ask about the hurricane-impacted facilities. I know you left that the same in guidance. There's a big step-up in the fourth quarter. But how should we think about the ability to recover the remaining $150 million or so headwind versus the $250 million total headwind back in 2024? Would you expect to recover the majority of that remaining headwind next year? Or how do we think about growth off that? Mike Marks: Yes. So let me walk back to just quickly the way the hurricane markets has kind of transversed this year. As you may recall, as we started the year, we actually thought that our 2025 full-year EBITDA would be about flat with 2024. And '24 had this $250 million hit from the hurricanes. And really, that $250 million hit was a hit to our pre-storm run rate of earnings. So think about to '23. As we're now updating guidance, we're -- we believe that we'll recapture, call it, $100 million of that in 2025. The real impact here now is just the continued and lingering effects of that storm and mostly in our North Carolina markets. While volumes have recovered in North Carolina, the payer mix has deteriorated, and we're having to use a significant amount of premium labor to staff those facilities. And so that's the driver there. It's too early to give 2026 guidance. But just to give you a sense of kind of how it's moved through the first 3 quarters of the year, first quarter of 2025 was about flat to prior year. Second quarter was a bit negative, modestly negative in third quarter '25 to '24 combined for our hurricane markets on EBITDA was again about flat. So that's why we said in fourth quarter, we do expect that all plus of that $100 million improvement in year-over-year EBITDA will happen in the fourth quarter. We will give more guidance on our fourth quarter call when we give full-year 2026 guidance about the hurricane markets. But hopefully, that helps as it relates to the movement through the year. Operator: And your next question comes from the line of Stephen Baxter with Wells Fargo. Stephen Baxter: I appreciate the early commentary on 2026. I'm wondering if there's something that you can speak to that gives you confidence in achieving the long-term volume range at this point. I guess the question would really just be without exchange growth, you'd be below the range this year. So I'm sure you thought about that even with an extension, exchange volumes could potentially be flat to down next year. But wondering how you're thinking about what the other moving parts are, whether that could be more level -- more normal levels of Medicaid or self-pay growth in there, too. Samuel Hazen: I realize the past is not prologue here, but we've had 18 consecutive quarters of volume growth. So that gives us a pretty confident foundation that we can continue to navigate through different dynamics within our markets. As I mentioned, we have more capital coming online next year. We have more outpatient facilities. So our ambulatory outreach is growing. We're building new relationships with physicians. All of that's woven into our thinking around 2026 volume. We continue to believe that population is growing in many of our markets, as it has, and there's going to be this consistent level of demand. The exchange piece of it is a small component of the overall, again, diversification that we have as a company. And so when you add all that up, we feel pretty confident that the range will accommodate some of the movement within our overall demand equation. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Craig Hettenbach with Morgan Stanley. Craig Hettenbach: On the $600 million to $800 million resiliency program you laid out a few years ago, can you just give us a sense on kind of how you're tracking to that? And then how you think about any additional levers to extend that further over time, whether that's technology or increased AI adoption? Mike Marks: Yes. So at our Investor Day back in 2023, we highlighted our resiliency plan, including that target of $600 million to $800 million. We've been working hard on that. And -- but the other thing that we highlighted, so yes, some of those dollars helped us in '24 and in '25 -- but as we've gone through really the last 12 to 18 months, we've been focused at both enhancing and accelerating our development of our resiliency program and our execution of our resiliency program. And that development piece is key. We think about this as a program. In other words, as we have work streams that we identify, we work those through, we pilot them, we execute on them and then we roll them out to scale. And then literally, every day, we're hunting for new ideas. And our teams are really attuned to this idea of the pipeline of resiliency and identifying new ideas. And as new ideas come into our resiliency work stream efforts, those ideas, again, are piloted. They are verified within our markets, and then we try to roll them out at scale. And so think about the resiliency program with all of our benchmarking work with all of our digital technology and development. We have a robust series of use cases that are in flight for AI, machine learning and automation. And then lastly, as I mentioned earlier, this notion of continuing to expand the impact of our shared service platforms, all of those combined really give us encouragement that we are preparing for the future and that this resiliency program is not a static, onetime event. It is a program that allows us to develop financial resiliency well into the future as well. Samuel Hazen: I think, Mike, some of that's reflected. I mean if you just look back in 2023, when we gave the update on the resiliency program and you look at the core operating margin of the company at that particular point in time versus what it is now, it's improved. And so we're experiencing some of that in the margin advancement that you're seeing in the results of the company. And we are continuing to, as Mike said, with technology, with best practices, with benchmarking, with finding other ways to deliver more efficient services. We see this as a growing agenda, not one that's static. Frank Morgan: Priela, let's take one more question. We're running up close to the end of the hour. Operator: Yes. Your last question comes from Joshua Raskin with Nephron Research. Joshua Raskin: I appreciate that. So I wanted to ask about cash flow conversion. We've seen the ratio of EBITDA that converts to free cash flow sort of move from the 30% range into the 40s. And I think this year, you're on track to almost 50%. So maybe talk about the factors that are driving that? Is that a shift to outpatient? Is there an impact from the strong pricing, including the sub payments? And I guess, most importantly, do you think that's sustainable over the next couple of years? Mike Marks: There's 3 or 4 things I would note that are driving our strong cash flow from operations as we think about it. One certainly is just we've had really solid adjusted EBITDA growth. And that strong operational performance that we continue to highlight as we think about the strength of our revenue cycle operations with Parallon, we turn that revenue into cash. And so that's a piece of that. And you're seeing that in kind of our working capital management plans. We have a pretty robust working capital management strategic plan that includes not only net days in ARR, but includes things like inventory levels, prepaid levels. And that work around working capital continues to assist us as we think about growing our cash flow. The other point, and I made this on the call, but it's important to note is that year-to-date, we have been able to defer $1.3 billion of estimated federal income tax payments to the fourth quarter. And so keep that in mind as well. But when I think about the long term, this idea of clearing out your revenue with cash and the strength of Parallon and our revenue cycle operations and the strength of the working capital management plans of the company, I think, puts us in good stead for continued strong management and performance around cash flow into the future. Operator: And that is all the time we have for questions. I would like to turn it back to Mr. Frank Morgan for some closing remarks. Frank Morgan: Priela, thank you for your help today, and certainly, good luck for the rest of the earnings season. If anybody has any questions, we're around today. Give us a call. Thank you. Operator: Thank you, presenters. Ladies and gentlemen, this concludes today's conference call. Thank you all for joining. You may now disconnect.
Anders Edholm: Good morning, and welcome to this presentation of SCA's 2025 Third Quarter Results. With me here today, I have President and CEO, Ulf Larsson; and CFO, Andreas Ewertz, to go through the results and take your questions. Over to you, Ulf. Ulf Larsson: Thank you, Anders. And also from my side, a good morning. Happy to present results for the third quarter '25. So -- and when I summarize the quarter, we can state that SCA continued to deliver a solid result in a rather challenging environment. Our high degree of self-sufficiency in strategic areas continued to be an important factor to mitigate higher costs, not the least related to wood raw materials. Our EBITDA reached SEK 1.64 billion and by that, an EBITDA margin of 33% for the third quarter. In Q3 '25, we had substantially lower prices in the Pulp segment in comparison with the same period last year. Our planned maintenance stops in pulp and containerboard were also considerably more extensive compared to the same quarter last year. Delivery volumes in the Containerboard segment increased this year compared with the same quarter last year, driven by the continued ramp-up of our Obbola containerboard mill. The uncertain market situation, mainly dominated by changing tariffs continues to affect market conditions. The forest industry in general is momentarily challenged by a weaker -- with a market with soft underlying demand in many product areas. Turning over to some financial KPIs for the third quarter '25. As already mentioned, our EBITDA reached SEK 1.64 billion in the quarter, which corresponds to a 33% EBITDA margin and a 22% EBIT margin. Our industrial return on capital employed came out just over 6%, counted for the last 12 months. And the leverage was at 1.7x with our -- while our net debt to equity reached 11.2%. I will now make some comments for each segment, starting with Forest. Higher harvesting levels from our own forest have not the least contributed to stable supply of wood raw materials to our industries during this period. We have seen a continuous long-term trend of increasing prices for both pulpwood and sawlogs as can be seen in the graph on the bottom left. Regarding pulpwood, we have now passed the peak, I guess, and the prices have started to come down during this quarter. Demand for sawlogs continues to be high, especially for spruce logs. When one compares Q3 '25 with Q3 '24, sales were up 14%, while EBITDA was up 17%, mainly due to higher prices for wood raw materials. Turning over to Wood. In general, we still have a slow underlying market for solid wood products. As said before, we have noted signs of improvement in the repair and remodeling segment this year in comparison with the last year, but the uncertainty in general economic development continues to affect the market recovery negatively. Stock levels remain on the high side among producers for pine, but are on normal levels for spruce. Stock levels at customers continue to be on the low side. The volumes in both production and deliveries were good for SCA during the quarter, resulting in a close to unchanged stock level of sawn goods. The price for solid wood products decreased by 5% in the third quarter of '25 in comparison with the second quarter of '25. This development is in line with what I said when I presented the report for the second quarter. As expected, the cost for sawlogs has increased from the second to the third quarter, and we also expect them to continue to increase going into the fourth quarter. Sales were in line with the same quarter last year. EBITDA margin decreased from 19% to 15% due to higher raw material costs and a negative currency effect. Today's stock level of solid wood products in Sweden and Finland is described at the top left on this slide and is shown in relation to the average for the last 5 years. As mentioned earlier, we note that the inventory level is on the high side, especially for pine, while the SCA level is rather normal. As can be seen in the diagram to the bottom left, the Swedish and Finnish sawmills production has been on a normal level during the first 8 months of '25. In the diagram to the top right, we can note that the price decreased during the third quarter. The decrease in pine has been larger in comparison with the spruce products. Going into the next quarter, I estimate that prices on average again will decrease by up to 5%, somewhat more for pine and somewhat less for spruce. And this is driven by the momentarily high availability of pine products. In the construction sector, we can conclude that start of new buildings continues to be low. As said before, uncertainties are still present, but we see improved consumption in the repair and remodeling sector. The level of duties now put in place on wood products from Canada delivered to U.S., about 45% in comparison to the level for wood products from European Union, delivered to the U.S. about 10% has strengthened the competitiveness for EU producers in comparison with Canadian producers. And I guess it's likely that the price level in U.S. will increase when stock levels are coming down from today's high levels. So over to pulp. When comparing Q3 '25 with Q3 '24, sales were down 21%, mainly due to lower prices, a lower delivery volume and a negative currency effect. EBITDA was down 57%, compared to last year, mainly due to lower prices, a negative currency effect and higher cost for wood raw materials. The cost for the planned maintenance stop was SEK 83 million this quarter compared to SEK 35 million in Q3 '24. Global demand for pulp was at a healthy level during the first quarter of '25. During the second quarter, the market changed with reduced demand and prices came under pressure, much due to uncertainty related to U.S. tariffs. During the third quarter, prices on NBSK pulp were stable at low levels. On the demand side, we saw increased activity in China during the quarter. The weakening of the U.S. dollar in relation to the Swedish krona, which started already in Q1, continued to have a negative impact on the pricing in SEK also in Q3. Tariffs on NBSK pulp from the European Union to the U.S. were removed during the third quarter, and this allows us to maintain a competitive offering in the U.S. Looking at CTMP, prices have been unchanged in Asia at low levels and have decreased slowly in Europe during the third quarter. Inventories of softwood and CTMP have been increasing in July and August, as you can see in the diagram and are now on the high level. Hardwood inventories on the contrary were stable during the third quarter. Moving over to Containerboard. Sales were up 10% in Q3 in comparison with the same period last year, driven by higher delivery volumes and higher prices, somewhat mitigated by a negative currency effect. EBITDA was down by 39%, very much driven by long planned maintenance stop with a cost of SEK 204 million versus SEK 87 million in Q3 2024. Higher costs for wood raw materials and a negative currency effect also had an impact. We have seen a softer box demand during the last quarter, but still with a positive development on a year-to-date basis. The retail business remains on a positive driver. On the other side, we continue to see a weak European manufacturing industry, which, for the moment, drives the demand in a negative direction. After a stable first half of the year of European demand of containerboard has started to decrease in Q3, due to the current turbulent macro environment, it's difficult to have a view on the long-term demand. In Q3, we have seen additional supply coming on stream with the vast majority coming in testliner. We do not expect further capacity increases in Q4, except from the ramp-up effect of newly started machines. Kraftliner inventories remain above average level in Q3, as you can see in the graph. During Q3, the availability of OCC has been good, driven by the lower demand in the quarter, which in its turn has led to decreasing prices of OCC. Moving into Q4, we see the availability of OCC to be stable and expect prices to be more or less unchanged. Prices for brown kraftliner in Central Europe has during Q3 decreased with EUR 20 per tonne, driven mainly by slow demand and reduced prices of OCC. White kraftliner has remained stable. Finally, I will say some words about renewable energy. In this area, we have had a weaker quarter compared to the same period last year, mainly due to lower prices in wind power and solid biofuels. Continued improvements in ramping up Gothenburg biorefinery are partly compensating for this. The market for solid biofuels in Northern Sweden continues to be weak due to warm weather and low electricity prices. This factor increases our export share and by that, reduced margin. For liquid biofuels, we have seen higher margins compared to previous quarters. The main reasons are tighter supply due to maintenance stops in biorefineries, European countries implementing RED III and better control mechanism within the EU regarding imported feedstock. We expect market volatility in renewable fuels to remain high as Europe ramps up the blending mandates both from -- both in HVO and SAF. Electricity prices were low during the quarter, which impacted on our wind business negatively, but it is good, of course, for SCA as a net buyer of electricity. SCA's land lease business is stable at 9.7 terawatt hours, which is equal to 20% of installed capacity of wind power in Sweden. Installed capacity on our land is expected to reach 10.5 terawatt hours by the end of the year. And by that, I hand over to you, Andreas. Andreas Ewertz: Thank you, Ulf, and good morning, everybody. I'll start off with the income statement for the third quarter. Net sales decreased 5% to SEK 5 billion, driven by negative currency effects and lower prices, which was partly offset by higher delivery volumes. EBITDA decreased 18% to SEK 1.6 billion, driven by negative currency effects, lower prices and higher costs for planned maintenance stops. EBIT decreased to SEK 1.1 billion and financial items totaled minus SEK 103 million. With an effective tax rate of just below 20%, bringing net profit to SEK 0.8 billion or SEK 1.19 per share. On the next slide, we have the financial development by segment and starting with the Forest segment to the left. Net sales decreased to SEK 2.4 billion, driven by lower delivery volumes compared to the previous quarter due to several planned maintenance stop at SCA's industries. EBITDA decreased to SEK 912 million due to seasonally lower harvest from SCA's own forest. In wood, prices decreased compared to previous quarter, while the cost for sawlogs continued to increase. Net sales decreased to SEK 1.5 billion, driven by lower delivery volumes and lower prices compared to the previous quarter. EBITDA decreased to SEK 232 million, corresponding to a margin of 15%. In pulp, net sales decreased to SEK 1.65 billion, driven by lower delivery volumes and lower prices. EBITDA decreased to SEK 242 million, corresponding to a margin of 15%. Higher costs for planned maintenance stops and lower prices were offset by lower costs. We had lower energy and raw material costs in the quarter, and Q3 is also a low-cost quarter for indirect costs in all segments, which had a positive impact. In Containerboard, net sales decreased to SEK 1.8 billion and EBITDA decreased to SEK 194 million, corresponding to a margin of 11%. Result was negatively impacted by planned maintenance stops in both Munksund and Obbola of SEK 204 million. The market for renewable energy continued to be weak. EBITDA decreased compared to previous quarter and amounted to SEK 79 million, corresponding to a margin of 21%. The decrease was mainly driven by lower deliveries of solid biofuels. On the next slide, we have the sales bridge between Q3 last year and Q3 this year. Prices decreased 2%, driven by lower pulp prices. Volumes increased 1%, driven by higher volumes in containerboard, which was also offset by lower volumes in pulp. And lastly, currency had a negative impact of 4%, bringing net sales to SEK 5 billion. Moving on to EBITDA bridge and starting to the left. Price/mix had a negative impact of SEK 99 million and higher volumes had a positive impact of SEK 14 million. Higher costs for mainly wood raw materials had a negative impact of SEK 57 million, which was mitigated by our highest degree of self-sufficiency. We had a positive impact from energy of SEK 37 million and a negative impact of currency of SEK 169 million. This was impacted by higher costs for planned maintenance stops. And in total, EBITDA decreased to SEK 1.6 billion, corresponding to a margin of 33%. Looking at the cash flow. Operating cash flow increased to SEK 1.1 billion for the quarter, and SEK 2.5 billion for the first 9 months. And as you know, other operating cash flow relates mostly to working capital currency hedges and should be seen together with changes in working capital. Looking at the balance sheet. The value of the forest asset totaled SEK 108 billion. Working capital decreased compared to previous quarter and totaled SEK 5.6 billion. Capital employed totaled SEK 160 billion and net debt decreased compared to the previous quarter to SEK 11.7 billion. And we have now almost finalized our large ongoing investment projects. Equity totaled SEK 104 billion and net debt to equity was 11%. Thank you. With that, I'll hand back to you, Ulf. Ulf Larsson: So thank you, Andreas. And well, just to summarize, I mean, as I said, we have continued to deliver a solid result in a rather challenging environment. . I guess the market has bottomed in more or less all areas except from solid wood products. On the other side, we will see a cost pressure coming in our solid wood business, wider price for pulpwood has now stabilized and are on its way down, I would say. In pulp and kraftliner, I guess, the market is going sideways now, and we are 100% focused on what we can have an impact on ourselves, which is meaning that we are focusing on the ramp-up of our big projects. And they are going very well -- did go very well during the third quarter. So by that, I think that we open up for some questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And we will now take our first question from Ioannis Masvoulas of Morgan Stanley. Ioannis Masvoulas: I've got 3 questions, if I may. I'll take them one at a time. First on pulpwood costs. Given the small decline that you show in your slide deck for Q3 and the typical lag in your business, what should we expect for cost development in your industries in Q4 this year and also Q1 2026? Ulf Larsson: You asked about pulpwood. And as I said, I mean, we see that now that prices for pulpwood is coming down in the market. But as you say, we have a lagging effect. And I could say that we have -- it's around 6 months or less. Andreas? Andreas Ewertz: Yes. So in the fourth quarter, I mean, fairly flat, maybe we're talking about 1% decline in pulpwood prices. So fairly flat, while the cost for sawlogs will continue to increase a bit into Q4. Ulf Larsson: And in the beginning of next year? Andreas Ewertz: Then I think that pulpwood will slowly continue to decrease. But as I said, I would say, it's around 6 months of lag effect in the terms of sawlogs. I think they will start to peak also around maybe Q1, Q1 next year. Ioannis Masvoulas: And then going back to pulp, looking at NBSK inventories on days of supply were pretty much at the top of the historical range, do you see the recent temporary curtailments among your peers to help rebalance the market in the short term? Or do we need to see more aggressive supply response? Ulf Larsson: It's hard to say, I mean, maybe I didn't say that, but I mean we are still at a very high operating rate in NBSK, and we should because we have a very low cash cost, of course. But on the other hand, we see announcements now from many areas where they have started to take curtailments. I guess also in the statistics that you see now, we haven't included the typical longer maintenance stops that we have had now during the autumn. So I guess that the inventory will come down. And as always, it's a question, it's a supply-demand issue. And I guess we will see a better balance, but I mean, underlying, we have to wait for an increase in consumption before we can say that we have a stronger market. Ioannis Masvoulas: Understood. And then just last question for me on the FX hedging. Looking at your disclosure, you seem to have brought down your USD hedge ratios for the next 4 quarters. Is that a conscious decision to avoid locking in an unfavorable FX rate? And could these ratios come down further in the coming quarters if spot FX rates persist? Andreas Ewertz: We use statistical model for our hedge strategy. So we have -- for the next 6 months, we hedge around 50% to 85% of our net exposure and then it goes down. But then it depends on statistically how favorable the currency is. So we use model and for the U.S. dollar currently in the low range of that while for euro, we are on the normal range. Operator: And we'll now take our next question from Linus Larsson of SEB. Linus Larsson: Couple of questions on use of funds. It seems to me that you have a very strong balance sheet. Cash flow is robust through the cycle. You're running at high operating rates, like you say, your competitiveness is strong. How do you look at buybacks in this context, given where your share price is trading and given your investment plans for the time being? Ulf Larsson: If we start with the investment plan, as I said, we are just now 100% focused on ramping up what we have started, and we feel that we are doing that in a good way. As I've also said, I mean, just now, we sit on our hands. We will not start up new big projects. And I guess, as all other companies, we also try to -- yes, not do too many current investments because we have an uncertain market coming going forward, I mean, that's the position we have just now. And the question about buybacks, I mean, that is more question for the Board, honestly. So let's see. We are now focused on ramping up what we have started. And by that, as you said, we expect that we will increase our cash flow capacity substantially. Linus Larsson: Yes. Yes. No, that's great. But I mean, principally, how does the Board look at buybacks? Is there like a principal view on whether or not buybacks is part of the toolbox? Ulf Larsson: Again, that's a question for the Board. But as far as I understand, we have no principles in this matter. I think we have done since the split 2017, I mean, we have invested 20% of the net sales in the company every year. For us, that's a lot of money. For all companies, it's a lot of money. So we are more focused just now to realize the cash flow that we suppose -- that we will have from these ongoing investments, so that's our focus now. Linus Larsson: Yes. No, that's clear. And just to finish off that, what's your CapEx guidance for 2025 and 2026, respectively? Andreas Ewertz: If you look at CapEx for '25, I think that current CapEx will be around SEK 1.5 billion. We might have some spillover to next year, so SEK 1.4 billion, SEK 1.5 billion. And then in terms of strategic CapEx, also depending on timing of some payment, but around SEK 1.3 billion, SEK 1.4 billion. So maybe SEK 2.8 billion in total for current and strategic, but it depends on certain timing of certain payments. For next year, strategic CapEx will go down. We have some payments left in the ramp-ups, but strategic CapEx will come down. And then I would guess that current will be slightly higher than this year since we have some spillover from this year to next year. Linus Larsson: But how much will the strategic CapEx go down? Is it SEK 0.5 billion or SEK 1 billion or around the backlog? Andreas Ewertz: It depends on some timing, but I would guess we have a couple of hundred millions left on our current projects. Operator: And we'll now take our next question from Charlie Muir-Sands of BNP Paribas. Charlie Muir-Sands: I wanted to start on the round wood market. So you mentioned obviously log prices are high and if anything, still slightly moving up due to high demand. But equally, it sounds like the wood products market in general is still quite soft. So I'm just trying to understand, is this a demand that's for other uses? Or are you basically saying this is more of a supply issue for the market? And if so, is this just of a hangover from the spark beetle delivery from prior years? Or is there any other reason why we could expect some better balance coming back on the supply side soon? And then just on the pulpwood cost side, very helpful the detail you've given so far. But just in terms of the timing effects, the changes in pricing of pulpwood hit the forestry and then the industrial segment at the same time? Or is there a phasing effect whereby the P&L benefit on forest is reduced before the cost tailwind on the industrial segments come through or anything like that to be aware of. Andreas Ewertz: Yes. So if you look at the pricing, I mean we base our internal prices of what the Forest division pays for its sourcing and a lot to buy on stumpage. So you buy the right to harvest. And then, I mean, you optimize the harvesting to try to have some larger areas to have efficient harvesting. So it can be vary. I mean, some of these -- what the harvest is couple of months. You bought it for some might be 3 months ago or 6 months ago. And then that average price is what the industry gets to pay. But the pricing is -- when the prices goes down, the industry will get a lower price, but then, of course, our Forest division will earn less money on their own harvest. But one day, what they source externally that they get paid for. And then the second question -- the first question was around the demand for sawlogs. Ulf Larsson: The coming demand. I mean, as we see just now, we have, as you saw on the graph in Sweden and Finland, the production is still on a normal level, even if we know that the price -- log prices are very, very high. And profitability in the business is, in general, rather low. We feel rather confident with the profitability we have in our own Wood division. But I mean we -- up until today, we haven't seen any signs of decreasing log prices actually. Andreas Ewertz: And also -- it's also difference between pine and spruce sawlog. On spruce sawlog, you have much lower supply compared to pine sawlog, sort of pricing and demand difference there. Charlie Muir-Sands: And then just on the wood products side, you mentioned the relative competitive advantage for EU exporters to the U.S. now versus Canadian. Can you just talk about the relative profitability of your U.S. business compared with your European business today? How big an opportunity might this be? Ulf Larsson: Yes. First, if we take the tariffs, I mean, as I said, the tariff just now going from Europe over to U.S. is 10%, and coming from Canada over to U.S., then the tariff is 45%. As it is just now, in U.S., the stock level is on the very high side. So, so far, we haven't seen any impact on the, let's say, the local price in U.S. But I guess when the inventory level is coming down, then, of course, customers, they have to start to buy and then they can buy some volume from Europe and they have to buy some volume from Canada. But then I guess that prices can in a short while, increased quite dramatically. We don't have a big volume for U.S. We do, let's say, 80,000 cubic meter per year. But again, it's a global market. So if we start to see better trade in U.S., I mean, that will, of course, have also an impact on the European market and also the Asian market and so on and so on. So we have to wait and see. But I mean, as it is just now, I guess, it's more a question of time. We will have a slow fourth quarter, as we always have. And I guess it will be rather slow also in the first quarter. But then I guess, in the beginning of the second quarter next year, then we might start to see something. Charlie Muir-Sands: But Canadian volumes can't get displaced into other parts of the world or even coming into Europe to offset that benefit? Ulf Larsson: Yes, not really. I mean, of course, you will see some Canadian volumes in China and you might -- I don't think you will see too much of it in Europe. Again, it's -- you have the distribution cost and many of those sawmills, they are located inland. And so it's also a question of distribution, inland distribution cost within in Canada so I guess if this remains, which you never know, I mean, then you probably will see further closures and capacity reductions. And honestly, I don't know really how the U.S. -- I mean, we know that U.S., they need a lot of solid wood products coming into U.S. So I guess it might be so that we see some further changes going forward now. Also when it comes to tariffs and things like that. So I mean, it's -- but all these -- I think we had a question before. But I mean, tariffs, we are not directly too much impacted by tariffs. We can handle that in a good way. But I guess that this discussion has created uncertainty globally. And that's the reason also why we have a rather slow demand in Asia in more or less all product areas. And so I mean that is the -- I guess the worst thing with tariffs is it is creating some kind of uncertainty in all areas and globally. Operator: We'll now take our next question from Robin Santavirta of DNB. Robin Santavirta: Thank you very much. Firstly, I have a question related to the Containerboard business. Looking at the delivery volumes now this year, they have been quite steady, but it seems still Obbola is not running at full capacity. And now you had the log maintenance shut. So could you give some guidelines on volume outlook for that segment in Q4 and early 2026? Should we expect a bit of a step change or more of a slow gradual ramp-up during the end of the year and next year? Ulf Larsson: When it comes to Obbola, we have said that Obbola will produce 600,000 tonnes this year, and they will do so if nothing expected will happen in the fourth quarter. Then it is a tough market in kraftliner. So we have seen during the third quarter, increasing inventories in kraftliner. And so that's the case. And as you said, we also had a rather long maintenance stop in Q3. So that also had an impact on deliveries. But production-wise, Obbola will reach 600,000 tonnes next -- this year. And then the plan is to reach 700,000 tonnes next year. Robin Santavirta: Okay. Okay. Can I ask about this EU deforestation regulation? How do you view that? Will that have any kind of impact for your businesses in Europe either way, what is your view? Ulf Larsson: I mean, it has also created a lot of uncertainty. But I guess for us, we can manage EUDR, but of course, it would be an administrative burden, which we don't like. But we can handle it. Robin Santavirta: But what about your competitors? Could it be a setup where some pulp had been imported from some countries or some paperboard that has been imported from Asia or Americas, they could end up in a bit of difficulty to do so in the future? Or will this impact trade flow at all in your view? Ulf Larsson: Yes, it's very hard to predict. I mean, we have been working quite hard to find out a system which will not create a lot of administration. And I mean, typically, we are for free trade. I think that's good. And I think that EU in the long run, they will benefit from a free trade. We don't know what -- how this will be implemented in the trade up till today. So again, this is also another thing that really creates uncertainty. But the honest answer is we don't know how that will -- this will play out. The only thing we can do is to focus on our own ability to meet the requirements that might come. Robin Santavirta: Yes, for sure, for sure. Follow-up question related to the pulp market. What is going on in the softwood pulp market? There's a lot of curtailments now during early autumn. Certainly, Finland, some in Sweden as well, I understand some in Canada as well. And historically, when you do that, you tighten up the market quite quickly. Now we're not seeing that. Is this a bit of a substitution into hardwood pulp? Is it some Chinese volumes that -- I mean, historically, they do not produce a lot of softwood pulp. Now I understand there is some production going on in China as well. So why is not the market tightening despite the quite significant production curtailments in the Northern Hemisphere? Ulf Larsson: I guess the first thing is that the underlying demand is weak. So that's the first explanation. The second thing is substitution. I don't think that we will see more of substitution today than we did last year. I mean, it's not as easy as that. And we have always had a delta between hardwood and softwood prices. So I mean, if possible, I guess, it would have already been done. So I haven't heard anything -- no structural changes in that area. What we know is that a lot of capacity in pulp is -- will be built up in China. And that, of course, sooner or later, that will -- might have an impact. As it is just now, we are more considered about the CTMP volumes. And as we have understood, I mean, the board market is very weak. And while companies in Asia while they closed down the converting and stop producing boards, I mean, they still produce CTMP, and that will, of course, give a surplus in the market. Then also, I guess, that the statistics that we also saw on our side was from August, Andreas, and I guess we will see some other figures now coming into September, October and so on. We also have had a lot of big maintenance stops in pulp. But you're right. I mean, we also hear that companies, they are taking curtailments now. So far, no big changes. But I mean -- and the prices maybe -- I guess that the price has already bottomed because at this level, we see that curtailments are taken instead of continuing to produce and of course, creating a negative cash flow. So we have reached the bottom. I guess we will see some result of actions taken now later this year. But again, the fundamental challenge is the underlying demand that must come back. Robin Santavirta: Thank you very much. Operator: And we'll now move on to our next question from Oskar Lindstrom of Danske Bank. Oskar Lindström: Three questions for me, if I may. The first one is just on the lower wood cost. You mentioned this in the Pulp division sequentially, but not in containerboard, sorry, not lower pulp costs, lower wood costs, having a positive impact on pulp, but it didn't seem to have it on Containerboard. What's the reason for that? Should I go on with the other questions? Andreas Ewertz: No, we take 1 at a time. So I mean, we have maybe 1% lower pulpwood prices in both Containerboard and in Pulp. In Pulp, we had a better yield in the quarters, we had lower consumption of both energy and wood and they generally have low cost quarter. But I would say it's more on the consumption side that we have lower cost on pulp in this quarter. Oskar Lindström: And in Containerboard, was it just the maintenance stop that sort of... Andreas Ewertz: The Containerboard, we had large maintenance stop both in Munksund and Obbola, the cost around SEK 20 million. So that quarter was impacted by that stop. Oskar Lindström: Right. Moving on to cash flow. You say that you will increase your cash flow significantly in 2026, and I presume beyond as well, while CapEx looks as if it's going to come down quite a bit. If we only look at the ramp-up of Obbola, can you say anything about what kind of contribution you expect from that 2026 versus 2025? If you reach the 100,000 tonnes, could you put a monetary value on that? Andreas Ewertz: Currently, I would say it's hard to put the money on the excess volume because you said that currently have a weaker market, and that means that the extra volumes you would place on -- you have a worst customer mix and country mix on those extra volumes that will, of course, depend on how the market develops. If you have a stronger market, I mean, those volumes would be placed in customers in Europe and places nearby. And that will have a larger impact. But if you have a weak market, of course, then we'll have to put it further away. So it depends on how the market develops. Ulf Larsson: And also to add, I mean, if you have -- yes, maybe that was exactly what you said. I mean, if you have an additional volume already this year, if you go from a little bit over 400 up to 600, I mean that puts a pressure in a tough market that puts a pressure on the market side, of course. So I mean you also have a -- you have ramp-up production-wise, but you also have a ramp-up in the market. So of course, we have to find markets overseas not at least as it is just now. Oskar Lindström: Of course. And my third question is, I mean, we've seen other companies in your sector announcing cost savings and even structural changes as a consequence of the tough market, which both they and you seem to feel is not about to change anytime soon. I mean, do you see any need for you to take actions if demand does not improve, either cost-saving actions or structural changes? Ulf Larsson: I mean, if we go back to 2017, as I said, we have been invested 20% of the net sales more or less every year. And by that, we have also top-class sites as it is just now. We have also, during this period, closed down our publication paper business. and we are focused on pulp, containerboard and also solid wood products and to some extent, also renewable energy. And step by step, I mean, as soon as we see that we can reduce the manning or if we can do something else to improve our cost position, we will do that. So for me, it's -- I don't like those programs because that means that you haven't done your work -- your ongoing work, so to say. Andreas Ewertz: For the last one and half year we had a program to reduce our personnel at our pulp division with around 80 people and has gradually begun to give an effect. Ulf Larsson: And we reduced the manning by 800 people when we closed down the publication paper business. So I mean, if you have structural changes, then, of course, you have to follow up with personnel reductions, but otherwise, that is something that you have to do. That's the everyday work. Oskar Lindström: My final question is on CapEx, which you talked a little bit about here. You say that you expect next year for current CapEx to be -- I can't remember the exact wording, but slightly higher. And then how much higher is that? And then you said the strategic CapEx will be a couple of hundred million. How many couples of hundreds of millions are we talking about? Is it possible for you to be a little bit more precise? I'm just wondering. Andreas Ewertz: It depends, of course, on what overspill we have to next year, and then it depends. I mean, we have our base CapEx for next year. And then we have some potential projects, and it depends on which of them we go through with which timing, but if we go around 1.5 this year, then you're talking maybe SEK 100 million, SEK 200 million more next year on current CapEx. But again, it depends on what projects we do. And also on the strategic side, it will -- I mean, it will be between 0 and SEK 1 billion but it depends on the timing of our strategic CapEx. For example, we have 1 payment that would either go at the end of this year or the early next year, which is around SEK 150 million, and we have a couple of hundred millions next year. So it depends. But just to give a rough figure. Ulf Larsson: But CapEx will come down. Andreas Ewertz: Yes, CapEx will come down, yes. Oskar Lindström: Thank you very much. Those are my questions. Operator: And we'll now take our next question from Martin Melbye of ABG. Martin Melbye: Given tariffs and new volumes to place, could you give some hints on prices for Pulp and Containerboard at volumes heading into Q4 quarter-over-quarter? Ulf Larsson: I mean, we don't know. That's the honest answer. But as I said, we -- I guess, we are in Pulp at the bottom level just now. I mean, as we -- as I said before, I mean, we have seen substantial curtailments taken now. And so I guess, Pulp prices will -- if they -- the only way from this point, I guess, is upwards. When will that come? Well, remains to see, I guess. I think for Containerboard, we have more capacity has come on stream during the third quarter. No additional capacity will come on stream, but we will see some ramp-ups. I guess we will see some closures in testliner going forward. The balance for kraftliner is much better, of course. I mean, the only additional volume coming in now is our own from the ramp-up in Obbola. On the other side, the inventory level is on the high side coming down a little bit now when we had the new statistics. So it's always -- it's a question of supply-demand balance, of course. But my best guess is sideways, maybe we will start to see upward trend in Pulp and maybe sideways in Containerboard. And as I already said, I guess, we will see somewhat decrease in prices in solid wood products, I guess, another 5% in the fourth quarter and then the first quarter is always -- it's tricky to increase prices in the first quarter. If something is happening now in U.S., that might have a faster impact on the pricing for solid wood products. But otherwise, I think we have to wait for the second quarter next year. Andreas Ewertz: And in terms of volumes, forest, you harvest a bit more from our own forest in the fourth quarter. In solid wood products, I sort of mentioned, you seasonally weaker quarter compared to the summer months so they have lower delivery volumes. In Containerboard, it will be slightly higher since we had a big maintenance stop in the third quarter, which we won't have in the fourth. And in Pulp, I would say it's slightly up or flat. Operator: Thank you. And we'll now take our next question from Cole Hathorn of Jefferies. Please go ahead. Cole Hathorn: I'd just like to ask what do you see would be the positive catalyst for each of your segments and like to take it in turn. But maybe starting on Pulp. What do you think is truly needed exit the demand? Do you think it's going to be capacity closure potentially something out of Canada considering they've got elevated wood costs and you see a sawmill go down and then pulpwood closure that tightens the market. Wood product, is it ultimately just a demand that's needed rather than any form of supply response? And Containerboard, I'm just wondering what are you looking for in the market for kraftliner. Is it -- do we need to rely on the recycled closures and to follow that? Or are you seeing the ability to kind of keep this premium versus recycled considering the less imports from the U.S. and much better supply-demand balance in... Ulf Larsson: If we start with pulp, I guess, it's again, it's about demand. The tissue business is rather slow, of course, it might be impacted by closures also, again, it's a supply-demand issue. And it might be so that just my speculation, but I mean, if we will have a tough -- if tariffs will remain in Canada for solid wood products that will have a negative impact on the raw material supply to the pulp mills that might have an impact over time, of course. Otherwise, it's demand and mainly then in the tissue segment. In wood, as already said, I mean, we are in the slower season just now in Q4 and Q1. I guess that sooner or later, Americans, they have -- they must start to buy solid wood products. And if the tariff level from Canada over to U.S. will remain of 45%, that definitely will mean that we will see increasing prices in solid wood products even if you're not a big supplier to U.S., which we are not, but still, that will have an impact on the global trade rather immediately, I would say. And then we know that it can start to move quite fast. But I guess if you look at the inventory level in U.S., we have to wait for at least a quarter before we can see something. In Containerboard, I mean, we look at the box consumption, and we feel that we have a slow demand from the industry while I mean, in other businesses for food and yes, maybe trade and that part -- that is going quite in a normal pace. So -- but the industry for us, I mean, heavy-duty spare parts and things like that where we typically can find a premium for kraftliner. My -- I don't know, but my guess is also that we will see closures in testliner, I guess that the main part of testliner produces just now, they don't make money. And I guess we have a chicken race on the testliner side as this just now. The balance both for Containerboard, kraftliner and also for NBSK, it's much, much better than for recycled-based production. Cole Hathorn: And then maybe just following up on capital allocation. You were clear that you're ramping up your projects, your past peak CapEx. And beyond that, you've got flexibility for consider capital returns via dividends and buybacks. But you didn't mention anything on M&A, and I'm just wondering how you think about that? And what are your criteria there? Would you consider anything in Central Eastern Europe if a very low-cost asset came available? Are you staying with your production base in Sweden? Just like your thoughts. Ulf Larsson: I mean, typically, we are a company based on organic growth. And typically, we are a company focused on Sweden where we have our own forest. We don't like to stay in countries where we can see a higher risk really. So I guess we are -- but on the other hand, you shall never say no. But typically, we are based on -- and focused on organic growth as it is. Andreas Ewertz: And as Ulf mentioned before, currently, I mean, we're focusing on our ramp-up of our current project before we add some too much complexity. Operator: And we will now move on to our next question from Andrew Jones of UBS. Andrew Jones: Can you hear me okay? Andreas Ewertz: Now, we hear you. Andrew Jones: Sorry, apologies, I missed the start of the call. So if you've mentioned this, my apologies. But on the actual solid wood products, what usually give a bit of the sort of guidance range in terms of pricing? I mean, how do you look at pricing going into the fourth quarter on -- in the Wood division? And then also, I think on the last quarter, you sort of gave us like a percentage changes you expect in the Forest division in both logs and then pulp. What sort of percentage changes are you sort of thinking about in the Forest for those 2 categories? Ulf Larsson: The first one, yes, we did mention that one. And as I said, I mean, we lost 5% in terms of price from -- in the third quarter in comparison with the second quarter. And I guess that we will lose another 5% in the fourth quarter. And that is mainly a seasonal effect as the demand always -- we always have a slower demand in the fourth quarter and in the first quarter. Forest, Andreas, you can... Andreas Ewertz: Yes. So Forest, pulpwood, I mean, they have peaked. We saw a very slight decrease here in the third quarter, maybe 1%, and we expect fairly flat, maybe 1% down in Q4 because of this lag effect. In terms of sawlogs, they will continue to increase a bit in the fourth quarter, maybe 5% compared to Q3, but that's also because you saw that the logs were quite flat within Q2 and Q3. But that's more of a mix effect. We had lower dimension on the logs, which have a lower prices. So we didn't get that so underlying, the prices increased also in Q2 to Q3. But since we had that mix, we didn't see that increase. But now we'll get that in Q4 so maybe 5% up. Andrew Jones: So it sounds like a pretty tough quarter, fourth quarter if you're sort of saying price is 5% down, log import prices 5% up. And you're probably seeing some seasonal volume weakness, I guess, maybe and it's about 5% last year. So anything to mitigate or offset those moving parts? Andreas Ewertz: Yes. So but on the solid wood products, I mean, as Ulf said, the prices will go down 5% and also the log will continue to increase a bit, but of course, continuing to focus on cost and what we can affect. Andrew Jones: Okay. And just 1 question just about the structural change. On kraftliner, I mean, you've kind of talked about the market being more balanced in kraftliner, obviously compared to testliner, but I mean, how -- why can the actual premium kraftliner and testliner fee in the medium term given the sort of substitution potential, I'm curious like to see whether that premium can be maintained in the near-ish term. Ulf Larsson: It's hard to say. I mean, the delta just now is EUR 280 or something like that. So that is a rather wide gap. And I guess if customers -- if they can substitute, they will substitute. And we see the same trend in -- we have the same question always in softwood and hardwood pulp. But the same answer, I mean, if customers, if they can substitute, they will do it because if something is cheaper, of course, they will use that instead. So I guess my perspective is more that I think we will at least remain on rather high delta between testliner and test recycled products and base products and virgin-based products as virgin fiber will be a scare resource going forward. So strategically, I guess, we will widen this gap, which we have also seen in the past years. So I think that will remain, honestly. And also, when you look at the capacity increase. I mean, the absolute main part capacity is coming in the recycled business. But in order to get raw material to the recycled business, you must have some virgin-based production. Operator: And we'll now take our next question from Pallav Mittal of Barclays. Pallav Mittal: Pallav Mittal on behalf of Gaurav Jain. So a few questions. Firstly, you and your peers have all highlighted good availability of pulpwood because of which we are now seeing this decline in pricing. And now given demand is weak and there are a number of production curtailments, how do you think these pulpwood costs could change if you start seeing some sort of improvement in demand? Ulf Larsson: Then, of course, it might be so that you have bottleneck again in raw material supply. So again, to have a stable long-term increase in the market, then the consumption must come up, the demand must come up. So that's the simple answer. And I mean, then it might be so that if -- when sawlog prices, if they come down, but pulpwood prices, when they come down, then it might be so that you see additional capacity coming on stream. And by that, of course, the supply will increase for a while. And if then the demand is not picking up, then, of course, you will have a pressure in the market again. So it is as easy as that. It's always a question about supply-demand. Andreas Ewertz: And your question on -- I mean, of course, if demand for the finished product goes up and the production goes up, that will, of course, increase the demand for wood raw material, which is already has been tight. Pallav Mittal: Sure. And then if I can ask something on CTMP. So you did mention that CTMP prices have declined in Europe, and now we are seeing new capacity in China as well. But does that impact your CTMP ramp-up? Ulf Larsson: I mean, as it is just now, we have a rather profitable business within Europe in CTMP. But as you say, I mean, we have very -- the margin is not too big in Asia. So yes, in that perspective, we are maybe in -- it's always a marginal calculation. So if we have days with high electricity price or if not now, but before when we saw that we had scarce situation when it comes to pulpwood. I mean then we -- of course, the first production site, we took containers in was in Ortviken and CTMP. So as it is just now, we are a little bit more focused on fine-tuning, I mean, also try to validate products for the European market and so on. So it is very small or from time to time, negative market going from Sweden over to Asia in CTMP as it is just now. Operator: Thank you. That was our last question. I will now hand it back to the host for closing remarks. Ulf Larsson: Thank you, and that concludes our presentation of the third quarter results. We'll come back in January for our full year report. Thank you for watching, and thank you for listening.
Operator: Thank you for standing by, and welcome to the First Hawaiian, Inc. Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] As a reminder, today's program is being recorded. And now I'd like to introduce your host for today's program, Kevin Haseyama, Investor Relations Manager. Please go ahead, sir. Kevin Haseyama: Thank you, Jonathan, and thank you, everyone, for joining us as we review our financial results for the third quarter of 2025. With me today are Bob Harrison, Chairman, President and CEO; Jamie Moses, CFO; and Lee Nakamura, Chief Risk Officer. We have prepared a slide presentation that we will refer to in our remarks today. The presentation is available for downloading and viewing on our website at fhb.com in the Investor Relations section. During today's call, we will be making forward-looking statements, so please refer to our Slide 1 for our safe harbor statement. We may also discuss certain non-GAAP financial measures. The appendix to this presentation contains reconciliations of these non-GAAP financial measurements to the most directly comparable GAAP measurements. And now I'll turn the call over to Bob. Robert Harrison: Hello, everyone. Thank you, and thanks for joining us today, and I'll start by giving a quick overview of the local economy. The state unemployment rate continued to drift lower and was at 2.7% in August compared to the national unemployment rate of 4.3%. Through August, total visitor arrivals were up 0.7% compared to last year as strength in the U.S. Mainland arrivals more than offset weaknesses in Japanese and Canadian arrivals. Year-to-date, visitor spending was $4.6 billion, up 4.5% compared to the same period of last year. The housing market remains stable. The median single-family sales price on Oahu was $1.2 million in September, up 3.8% from last year. The median condo sales price on Oahu for September was $509,000, down 1.7% from the prior year. Before we move on, I wanted to discuss the federal government shutdown, and it's too early to measure the full impact on the Hawaii economy, but with a large civilian federal workforce, we expect that many families will begin to face financial hardship. Through the Hawaii Bankers Association, all the local banks have asked affected families to contact their local bank to discuss available relief measures. Turning to Slide 2. We had another strong quarter as net income increased compared to the second quarter. The improvement relative to the prior quarter was driven by higher net interest and noninterest income, partially offset by a higher effective tax rate. As you might recall, our second quarter results included the impact from a change in California tax law, which resulted in a net benefit of $5.1 million last quarter. The effective tax rate in the third quarter returned to a more normalized 23.2%. Turning to Slide 3. The balance sheet remains solid as we continue to be well capitalized with ample liquidity. We held the investment portfolio relatively flat and loans declined by $223 million. Average deposits were higher during the quarter, and we saw a surge at the end of the quarter due to inflows in public operating accounts, and Jamie will cover this in more detail in a little bit. We also repaid the $250 million FHLB advance that matured in September. And during the quarter, we repurchased about 965,000 shares at a total cost of $24 million. We have $26 million of remaining authorization under the approved 2025 stock repurchase plan. Turning to Slide 4. Total loans declined by about $223 million in the quarter. The decline was primarily in C&I. Dealer flooring balances fell by $146 million and paydown on lines of credit by several Hawaii corporate borrowers added about $130 million to the decline in the C&I balances. We're seeing strong originations so far in the fourth quarter and expect to end the year about flat to year-end 2024. Now I'll turn it over to Jamie. James Moses: Thanks, Bob. Turning to Slide 5. Total deposits increased about $500 million in the third quarter. Commercial deposits increased $135 million and were partially offset by a $43 million decline in retail deposits in the quarter. The decline in retail deposits seems to be largely due to seasonality, where we have seen a pattern of declining balances in the third quarter, followed by growth in the fourth quarter. Total public deposits increased by $406 million, and all of that growth was in operating accounts. There was no change in the balance of public time deposits. In the fourth quarter, we expect seasonal increases in both retail and commercial deposits, while seeing outflows in public deposits. The total cost of deposits fell by 1 basis point and the ratio of noninterest-bearing deposits to total deposits was a strong 33%. On Slide 6, net interest income was $169.3 million, $5.7 million higher than the prior quarter. The NIM in the second -- third quarter was 3.19%, up 8 basis points compared to the prior quarter. The increase in the margin was primarily driven by higher asset yields as well as some nonrecurring items such as loan fees. The run rate NIM for the month of September was 3.16%, and we continue to expect positive NIM momentum in the fourth quarter, and our current thinking is that the margin will advance a few basis points from the September NIM. This guidance reflects the impact of our fourth quarter loan and deposit outlook and additional 25 basis point rate cuts in both October and December. Turning to Slide 7. Noninterest income was $57.1 million in the quarter. Noninterest income benefited from higher BOLI income due to favorable market movements and swap income. We continue to expect the normalized run rate of noninterest income will be about $54 million per quarter. There were no unusual expense items in the third quarter. And based on our year-to-date expenses, we now expect that full year expenses will come in below our most recent outlook of $506 million. And now I'll turn it over to Lee. Lea Nakamura: Thank you, Jamie. Moving to Slide 8. The bank continued to maintain its strong credit performance and healthy credit metrics in the third quarter. Credit risk remains low, stable and well within our expectations. We are not observing any broad signs of weakness across either the consumer or commercial books. Classified assets increased $30.1 million due primarily to a single borrower, who is a long-time customer that we know well and are continuing to work closely with. Quarter-to-date net charge-offs were $4.2 million or 12 basis points of total loans and leases. Year-to-date net charge-offs were $11.3 million. Our annualized year-to-date net charge-off rate was 11 basis points or 1 basis point higher than in the second quarter. NPAs and 90-day past due loans were 26 basis points at the end of the third quarter, up 3 basis points from the prior quarter, resulting from a slight increase in nonaccruals. Moving to Slide 9. We show our third quarter allowance for credit losses broken out by disclosure segment. The bank recorded a $4.5 million provision in the third quarter. The asset ACL decreased by $2.6 million to $165.30 million with coverage remaining at 117 basis points of total loans and leases. We believe that we continue to be conservatively reserved and prepared for a wide range of outcomes. And now we would be very happy to take your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of David Feaster from Raymond James. David Feaster: I wanted to talk on just kind of the growth outlook. I mean, obviously, we've had some dealer floor plan with a headwind, some just natural declines in C&I. I was hoping you could first maybe touch on kind of how the pipeline is shaping up, demand that you're seeing and other opportunities that you'd be interested in helping accelerate organic growth, whether it's -- is there any appetite for full purchases or C&Is? Just kind of curious kind of your thoughts on, again, what are you seeing now in the pipeline and demand and organic growth and other opportunities to accelerate that? Robert Harrison: David, this is Bob. I'll maybe start off, hand off to Jamie. So yes, the third quarter was a little unusual in that we saw some pretty significant paydowns in dealer floor plan. Part of that was one of our customers sold several franchises. So that impacted that negatively. But overall, we're still very bullish in that business. We're seeing very strong production in the pipeline. There are some of that's already closed for the fourth quarter. Some of that's C&I, a lot of that is CRE. So we think we're going to have a very strong fourth quarter. And as we look to the future, we have considered pool purchases, but maybe I'll ask Jamie to just comment on that. James Moses: Yes. Thanks, Bob. I think we're looking at just in totality, as Bob said, I think we're looking at being able to get back to flat at the end of '25, roughly to where we were at the end of '24, which speaks to the strength of the pipeline that we see today. But to the broader question of pools and purchases, I think we always look at things. And to the extent that we feel like we have some level of expertise or knowledge in particular areas, we look maybe to carve out things that we have expertise in. So for example, maybe like a residential pool of Hawaii loans, right, might be something where we would think the long and hard about purchasing or if there are opportunities around properties in Hawaii that we might look at as well. So for the most part, we see where that we want to grow loans, but we're really looking for areas where we have some sort of expertise or niche knowledge around in order to be able to do that. David Feaster: Okay. That's helpful. And then maybe just -- I mean, the core deposit growth was tremendous. I was hoping you could maybe touch on a bit. You talked on some continued growth in core deposits. Obviously, there's some seasonality that you alluded to. But could you talk about where you're having success driving core deposit growth? And then just, again, the good and the bad of that is we built liquidity. Like how do you think about deploying some of that liquidity in the coming months? James Moses: Yes. Thanks, Dave. So I guess we're going to expect that our deposit total balance is probably going to be like roughly flat at the end of the year to where we are today. And that mix is going to shift a little bit from -- we expect to see some of our public deposits kind of run out here in the fourth quarter, but sort of replaced by retail and commercial deposits. So where we're having success really is our retail teams and our commercial teams are really out there and really talking to our customers and doing a really good job of maintaining, strengthening relationships in the community. And I think we're really trying to focus on that relationship activity. And so we've had a lot of success with that, and that's due to the efforts of our retail and commercial teams primarily out here on the ground. Robert Harrison: And to add to Jamie's answer, as far as the liquidity that we have, we have been -- we are no longer letting the investment portfolio run down. So we're holding that flat. So we have kind of restarted some purchases after a number of years of letting it run down. So we're keeping that relatively flat with similar duration and very similar categories of securities that we're looking at to purchase. David Feaster: Okay. That's helpful. And then maybe just last 1 for me. I appreciate the margin commentary I mean, look, you're naturally rate sensitive just given the strength of your core deposit base and the floating rate nature of some of your loans. Just kind of curious I mean there's a lot of moving parts in here, right? You got liquidity deployment and all -- there's a lot of moving parts. But I'm just kind of curious, first, how do you think about managing deposit costs as the Fed cuts? And then just given the tailwinds from back book repricing, remixing and some of the liquidity deployment that we're talking about, do you think that we can see the margin continue to expand even with Fed cuts next year? James Moses: I think Dave, that depends kind of on the timing and the magnitude of those cuts. I think that would -- that is ultimately by the end of the year, it could be a challenge to see NIM expansion at the end of the year. But for now, I think, for now... Robert Harrison: End of the year and then 2026. James Moses: That's right. Yes. But for now, what we see is that we have sufficient loan growth and sufficient loan growth just sort of cover this, right? So we're still -- we're looking at -- we're looking at $1 billion of cash flows over the next 12 months. At like -- we'll call that like a 125 basis point spread right now to loans that we're putting back on the books. And we have a 200 to 250 basis point spread on the investment portfolio, right now that we're sort of -- that we're keeping flat. So there are a lot of underlying dynamics. And of course, those spreads will decrease, right, the more the Fed decreases as well. But I think the trajectory for now looks like we can still support increasing expansion of the margin. But of course, there will be a natural spot. I think that's maybe like 1% or so from now. So 4 to 5 rate cuts, something like that. There'll be a natural floor to our ability to drive out further decreases in the deposit book. So good and bad news, right? We got a great deposit base, but it can only go so low, right? There's a floor on that. And so I think there is opportunity to continue to expand the NIM. And again, I think that is going to be largely dependent on our ability to generate loans. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Charlie Driscoll from KBW. Charles Driscoll: This is Charlie on for Kelly Motta, if you could remind us of your capital priorities, how you're viewing the buyback? And from an a perspective, the environment is obviously heating up. Just remind us of your strategy on that front? Robert Harrison: Yes. Thanks, Charlie. So the capital priorities continue to be the same. We'd love to -- we're doing all the loans that fit our credit box and profile. We want to do all those that we can -- and we have a share buyback authority of $100 million. You see that we've done $74 million so far, and the rest of that is going to depend on, I'll call it, market conditions for sure. And I think the dividend is pretty good yields kind of a place. And also just in terms of the ratio of earnings that we pay out is relatively high. So probably not going to see an increase in the dividend or anything like that as part of that at the moment. Charles Driscoll: That's helpful. And then I guess, like circling back to the deposit rate conversation. The pricing has been rational and anticipating some cuts, like we've been hearing some changes in expectations from bank. Maybe just put some numbers around how you're thinking about betas on the way down? Robert Harrison: Yes. So Charlie, we tend to talk about it as beta on our rate-sensitive portfolio. So we continue to have roughly $4.5 billion rate-sensitive deposit portfolio. We've been very successful in -- with past rate cuts. We're talking maybe 90%, 95% betas on that portfolio relative to a Fed rate cut. We think that we're -- that drives a little bit lower and it gets successively lower for each rate cut that we have, but I think right now, I think about maybe like a 90% beta on the next rate cut, 88% on the next 1 after that, 85%, something like that. So we -- we still think we have a range there where we can drive deposit costs lower of course, when the Fed cuts rates as well. So it's a decreasing ability to do that for sure, but still relatively high at the moment. Charles Driscoll: Great. And then I guess, just like a little bit of detail with the margin expansion and the 50 bps of additional costs, are you assuming any loan purchases in that or... James Moses: No loan purchases in that. That's just what we're looking at in terms of looking at our pipelines and talking with the teams over the past month or so, we just expect to have really strong loan growth here in the fourth quarter. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Anthony Elian from JPMorgan. Anthony Elian: Jamie, just a follow-up on NIM. Just a follow-up on NIM. Slide 5 to 6, you saw a really nice tailwind from loan repricing and looks like every 1 of your loan yields increased from the prior quarter. I'm just wondering how much of a tailwind is left from loan repricing, maybe in 4Q and beyond, just given the outlook for rate cuts on the forward curve? James Moses: Yes. So I think there's still a tailwind there. I guess I'll start with that. But then as we look out, we have $1 billion of fixed rate cash flows coming off of the portfolio over the next 12 months. And right now, we think that, that's repricing higher at like a 125 basis point spread at the moment. So there's still a pretty significant tailwind there. Now the 125 basis points, that's an average. And more the Fed cuts, the tighter that spread gets for sure. But there is still an ability to reprice those cash flows higher. On the investment portfolio, where we're seeing $500 million to $600 million of runoff over the next 12 months, we're getting like a 225 to 250 basis point spread on those purchases. So there's still a really significant sort of balance sheet role impact that we're seeing. That should be a tailwind not only in the fourth quarter, but into the first and second quarters as well. Now again, all of this is dependent upon being able to replace those cash flows with loan growth. And we think we can do that. but it will be dependent upon that sort of loan growth trajectory. And to the extent that we don't get the loan growth, we would consider other things we would consider maybe increasing the size of the investment portfolio. It's not our preferred option. But there are things that we would do to manage the balance sheet and to try to manage that NIM to continued expansion or at least sort of trying to keep it flat as we get those third and fourth and fifth anticipated rate cuts. Anthony Elian: Okay. And then my follow-up, I think you pointed to $54 million of fee income in 4Q. Just what are the areas or headwinds you expect to decline this quarter? Is it just the 2 items you call out on Slide 7. James Moses: Yes. I think that's right, Tony. Yes. It's not really headwinds. It's just we kind of got some good positive surprises here in the third quarter and wouldn't necessarily expect that to continue into the fourth. Robert Harrison: Yes. And to add to that, we have been kind of messaging more in the 51% to 52% range. And now just given the strength of the overall fee business, we're moving that up to 54% as kind of our expected run rate. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Matthew Clark from Piper Sandler. Matthew Clark: Just to close out the NIM discussion, do you have the spot rate on deposits at the end of September? James Moses: That was 136 basis points end of September. Matthew Clark: Okay. And then the negative migration you saw in substandard this quarter. Can you just speak to what drove that increase? Lea Nakamura: So it's primarily that single loan to our long-time customers. And we're not really worried about loss or anything like that. We work closely with the customer. We just feel it's prudent to continue to update the ratings as we see the financials. Matthew Clark: Okay. I may have missed it, but the type of customer and the situation there? Robert Harrison: We didn't share that one, Matt. So we'd rather not. It's a small town. Matthew Clark: Understood. And then just on the capital question. I don't think you finished up on the M&A piece. But -- and again, I may have missed it, but just any updated comment on M&A discussions you might be having, whether or not things have changed materially since last quarter. Robert Harrison: No, unchanged. We're still open to talking to people and we certainly consider the right opportunity, but no change from previous guidance and discussion. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our next question comes from the line of Timur Braziler from Wells Fargo. Timur Braziler: Jamie, your comment on total deposits, I want to make sure I heard that right. Is it flat for 4Q or flat for the year? James Moses: It's flat third quarter to fourth quarter. So we expect public to run out in the fourth quarter a little bit, while we increased retail and commercial. Timur Braziler: And then maybe back to Matt's last question. Just more specifically, Mainland M&A. It sounds like that's been something that's at least on the table more recently? Just is that still the case? And maybe just remind us if that is the case, kind of what you'd be looking at as far as criteria goes? Robert Harrison: No change to what I said. Timur, I think the only thing would be it would only be mainland M&A for us because with our HHI market share here, there's nothing we'd be able to do in Hawaii. So but no change. We're certainly open to talking to people and would consider the right opportunity. Timur Braziler: Okay. That's a good point. And then, Bob, your starting comment on expecting many families will face potentially some real hard ships here from a prolonged government shutdown. I guess that comment and then looking at the last few UHERO report, which is calling for a mild recession over the course of the next year. I mean is that any different really from kind of the operating trends on the island over these last couple of years? Does that change the way that you guys are thinking about the local economy and, I guess, more pointed just how much of that is already factored in, in the reserving that you have, particularly on the consumer side. Robert Harrison: Yes. Maybe I'll start and ask Lee, if she has any additional comments. Really no change. We think that the local economy is resilient. I mean people are not the first time this has happened. It's been a little while since there's been a shutdown that's affected salaries and all that. But we just want to make sure, and that's why we want to do it with all the banks here. I want to make sure we're open and people know they can approach us if there's a need. But we've had just very few inquiries, Lee, maybe if you have any additional comments. Lea Nakamura: Not really. We haven't really seen any effects in the credit metrics yet. And -- but we're always cautious and we always take it into consideration, when we try to figure out what the right valuation is for the ACL. Robert Harrison: And on that, I mean, to speak to consumer credit metrics. Lee did mentioned it earlier, but the 2 that tend to pop up soonest is credit cards and indirect and they're doing quite well. So really no -- nothing observable at this point, Timur. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Jared Shaw from Barclays. Jared David Shaw: Everybody. Following up on that, when you look at the impact of federal spending apart from military in Hawaii. Do you -- are you concerned at all that it could be impacted by reshifting of federal priorities? Or is it still pretty heavily defense focused. So while we're dealing with the shutdown now, you still feel that's not going to change the long-term contribution of federal government spending into Hawaii? Robert Harrison: Yes, Jared, this is Bob. Totally agree. The long-term trend is defense focused, and it's going to be very strong. I'm heading down to Guam for next week, and the spend there is phenomenal and the projects on deck here are very, very strong. So we're not expecting that our core federal employee workforce is pretty stable. The largest employer being the Pearl Harbor and naval shipyard, which is -- and has been identified as a key resource in the Navy. So really stable to improving, I guess, would be the long-term view. Jared David Shaw: Okay. And then in conversations with your floor plan dealers, what's their expectation for sort of auto sale volume going into the next year? Are they -- are they thinking that there's going to be a slowdown in purchase activity? And is that incrementally, I guess, better for you with floor plans if inventories stay around longer? Robert Harrison: Certainly, we have really great customers with strong credit, so we'd love to see higher balances with those same customers. The discussions haven't been as much around next year. It's really been more topical about tariffs and the impacts of tariffs and different manufacturers are picking up some of the impacts of those additional costs. Others, I think we'll start based on the conversations we're having, we'll start to soon start passing those through to customers. And so there's a fair amount of uncertainty still on the end impact of the tariffs that started at the beginning of this year and what consumers will do with potentially higher price points and how that will affect demand. If it slows down demand, maybe not in the next year, but even into the fourth quarter first and second quarters of 2026. That would definitely help us. Jared David Shaw: Okay. And then just finally for me. Have you seen any change in sort of pricing behavior from some of the change in ownership of other Hawaii competitors over the last year. It sounded like earlier in the year, there wasn't really any big change, but are you seeing any change in how they're approaching pricing in the markets? James Moses: Yes. We haven't seen any change in the market as far as competitive dynamics or pricing. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Janet Lee from TD Securities. Sun Young Lee: Hello. Going back to M&A, just quickly, I know you guys touched upon it just a few times on this call. But can you remind us what is your stance -- what is your current stance on that M&A -- potential M&A opportunity if you are looking to -- you're considering opportunities? Like what would be -- what would make sense in the Mainland? Robert Harrison: Really nothing to add to our earlier comments, I guess the only thing would be in the Western states. It's not that we're going to go center or East. But it's just -- we're open to talking to people and we're considering the right opportunity and really nothing more to share than that at this time. Sun Young Lee: Okay. Got it. Fair. I think people are entertaining the idea of resi mortgage coming back if the rate comes down to the 5 handle, is was that something that would be helpful to your market or perhaps not because it's more of a supply issue. How should I think about the positive impact from that point on your resi? James Moses: Yes, Janet, it's a good question. I think that the lower the rates go, just the more activity you will see. You are correct that there is some sort of supply constraints around that for sure. But I think it will be helpful for balances. I think that there's -- that there should be some good opportunities there. So yes, I mean, I think, ultimately, for the mortgage business, in particular, if you -- if the rates go a little bit lower, we could see some increased activity in that area, and that should be constructive. Sun Young Lee: Got it. And apologies if this was already covered, but the paydown on $130 million of paydown on corporate lines, is that -- was that just seasonality that is coming back or just one-off? Or is it really a big quarter for paydowns? Robert Harrison: No, it wasn't necessarily seasonally. These were earlier draws for specific things, and now that that's done, they're getting repaid. It's it was odd in that several happened in the same quarter, but there is nothing unusual about the borrowing and repayment. It's just -- just all kind of lend -- the draws weren't in the same quarter, but the paydowns were. So that's why we didn't call it out on the way up, but we're calling it out when it got repaid. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And this does conclude the question-and-answer session of today's program. I'd like to hand the program back to Kevin Haseyama for any further remarks. Kevin Haseyama: Thank you. We appreciate your interest in First Hawaiian, and please feel free to contact me if you have any additional questions. Thanks again for joining us, and have a good weekend. Operator: Thank you, ladies and gentlemen, for your participation in today's conference. This does conclude the program. You may now disconnect. Good day.
Operator: Greetings, and welcome to the OMA Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Call. [Operator Instructions] As a reminder, this conference is being recorded. I would now like to turn the conference over to your host, Emmanuel Camacho, Investor Relations Officer for OMA. Thank you. You may begin. Emmanuel Camacho: Thank you, Melissa. Hello, everyone, and welcome to OMA's Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. We're delighted to have you join us today as we discuss the company's performance and financial results for the past quarter. Joining us today are CEO, Ricardo Duenas; and CFO, Ruffo Pérez Pliego. Please be reminded that certain statements made during the course of our discussion today may constitute forward-looking statements, which are based on current management expectations and are subject to a number of risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially, including factors that may be beyond our control. And now I'll turn the call over to Ricardo Duenas for his opening remarks. Ricardo Duenas: Thank you, Emmanuel. Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us today. This morning, Ruffo and I will review our operational performance and financial results. And finally, we will be pleased to answer your questions. In the third quarter of this year, OMA's passenger traffic totaled 7.6 million passengers, an 8% increase year-over-year. Seat capacity increased by 11% during the quarter. On the domestic front, passenger traffic grew by 7%, driven primarily by the Monterrey Airport, which saw increases on routes to the metropolitan area of Mexico City, mainly to Toluca Airport, Bajio, Puerto Vallarta, Mérida and Querétaro. These routes collectively added over 300,000 passengers during the quarter, representing 68% of the total domestic passenger growth. International passenger traffic increased by 11%, mainly driven by Monterrey on the route to San Francisco, San Luis Potosi with higher traffic on the routes to Atlanta and Dallas and Tampico on the route to Dallas. Together, these routes added more than 47,000 passengers during the quarter, accounting for 46% of the total international passenger growth. Moving on to OMA's third quarter financial highlights. Aeronautical revenues increased 11% with aeronautical revenue per passenger rising 3% in the quarter. Commercial revenues grew by 7% compared to the third quarter of '24 and commercial revenue per passenger stood at MXN 60. Commercial revenue growth was mainly driven by parking, restaurants, VIP lounges and retail, mainly as a result of higher penetration and an increase in passenger traffic. Occupancy rate for commercial space stood at 96% at the end of the quarter. On the diversification front, revenues increased 8%, with Industrial Services contributing most of this growth, mainly because of additional square meters leased in our industrial park as compared to the third quarter of '24 and contractual increases to rents. OMA's third quarter adjusted EBITDA increased by 9% to MXN 2.7 billion with a margin of 74.8%. On the capital expenditures front, total investments in the quarter, including MDP investments, major maintenance and strategic investments were MXN 472 million. Finally, in relation to the negotiation process of our next Master Development Program discussion with the AFAC remain underway. We submitted our proposed Master Development Program for the '26-'30 period at the end of June, and the process remains on track. During the quarter, we continued addressing AFAC's technical observations and advancing the validation of investment projects in accordance with the schedule agreed with the authority. We continue to expect the final resolution and publication of results during December. Our expectations regarding the overall investment level remain at committed levels of MDP investment similar in real terms to the level of the previous '21-'25 MDP and maximum tariff increase in the low single digits. I would now like to turn the call over to Ruffo Pérez Pliego, who will discuss our financial highlights for the quarter. Ruffo Pérez del Castillo: Thank you, Ricardo, and good morning, everyone. I will briefly go over our financial results for the quarter, and then we will open the call for your questions. Aeronautical revenues increased 10.6% relative to 3Q '24, mainly due to the increase in passenger traffic as well as higher aeronautical yields. Non-aeronautical revenues increased 7.3%. Commercial revenues increased 7.0%. The line items with the highest growth were parking, restaurants, VIP lounges and retail. Parking grew by 9.4%, mainly as a result of higher passenger traffic. Restaurants and retail increased 9.8% and 8.2%, respectively, both driven by higher passenger traffic as well as the previously opened or replaced outlets. VIP lounges rose 9.9%, mainly due to higher market penetration, primarily in Monterrey as well as the increase in passenger traffic. Diversification activities increased 8.2%. Industrial Services, which relates to the operation of the industrial park contributed most to the growth in the quarter, increasing by 53%, resulting from higher square meters leased as compared to third quarter of '24 as well as contractual rent increases. Total aeronautical and non-aeronautical revenues grew 9.8% to MXN 3.5 billion in the quarter. Construction revenues amounted to MXN 382 million in the third quarter. The cost of airport services and G&A expense increased 14.4% versus 3Q '24, primarily due to the following line items: Payroll grew by 10.7%, mainly as a result of annual wage increases as well as higher headcount as compared to the third quarter of '24. Other costs and expenses increased by 22% due primarily to higher IT-related requirements and transportation services. Contracted services expense rose 16.4%, mainly due to higher cost of security and cleaning services following contract renewals in prior quarters, reflecting the inflationary pressures and tight labor market conditions in Mexico. Minor maintenance increased 19.8%, primarily due to timing effect of the works performed. Concession tax increased by 10.4% to MXN 290 million, in line with revenue growth. Major maintenance provision was MXN 28 million as compared to MXN 75 million in the same quarter of last year. OMA's third quarter adjusted EBITDA grew 9.0% to MXN 2.7 billion and adjusted EBITDA margin reached 74.8%. Our financing expense increased by 9.8% to MXN 299 million, mainly driven by higher interest expense as a result of higher average debt levels. Consolidated net income was MXN 1.5 billion in the quarter, an increase of 9.1% versus the same quarter of last year. Turning to our cash position. Cash generated from operating activities in the third quarter amounted to MXN 1.9 billion and investing and financing activities used cash for MXN 480 million and MXN 365 million, respectively. As a result, our cash position at the end of the quarter stood at MXN 4.4 billion. At the end of September, total debt amounted to MXN 13.6 billion, and we maintained a solid financial position, ending the quarter with a net debt to adjusted EBITDA ratio of 0.9x. This concludes our prepared remarks. Melissa, please open the call for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Pablo Ricalde with Itaú. Pablo Ricalde Martinez: I have one question regarding your traffic expectations maybe for the fourth quarter and maybe your early thoughts on 2026, taking into account the World Cup. Ricardo Duenas: Yes. Thank you, Pablo. So we're looking for the rest of the year to finish in our traffic overall for the year between 7% and 8% growth. And our expectation at this point in time for next year, it's traffic to be in the low to mid-single digits for next year growth. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our next question comes from the line of Enrique Cantu with GBM. Unknown Analyst: I have a quick question. Commercial revenue per pass declined this quarter, the first contraction since early 2023. Could you elaborate on the main drivers behind this softness? And how do you plan to reaccelerate this [ known ] area of growth? Ruffo Pérez del Castillo: Enrique, so yes, commercial revenue per passenger mainly reflects -- in the quarter reflects the impact of onetime revenues recorded in the previous year. And in the following quarters, we expect commercial revenues per passengers to gradually increase in line with inflation from current levels. Unknown Analyst: Okay. Perfect. And just another one, if I may. SG&A and utility costs rose this quarter, eroding margins despite strong top line growth. Do you view these cost pressures as temporary? Or should we expect a structurally higher cost base heading into 2026? Ricardo Duenas: Sorry, could you repeat that? Maybe you're too close to the microphone. Unknown Analyst: Yes, sorry. So it's regarding SG&A and utility costs. We saw that this quarter they erode margins. Do you view these cost pressures as temporary? Or should we expect this higher cost base heading into 2026? Ruffo Pérez del Castillo: So yes, as we mentioned, there are some specific line items that are facing some pressures like cleaning and security, where the total level of cost in the following quarters should be similar to the level of cost that we are facing right now. However, we do have started to analyze different alternatives to continue maintaining cost at check, and it's part of the history of the company to be very cost conscious, and we expect pressures not to be permanent. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Gabriel Himelfarb with Scotiabank. Gabriel Himelfarb Mustri: A quick question on capital allocation. First, for the next MDP, I think you have mentioned that almost all the capital will go to Monterrey. It will be focused on, perhaps, increasing the capacity of the airport or developing more the commercial spaces, the commercial portion of the business? And my second question, are you seeking or have you considered expanding gap -- sorry, OMA's portfolio towards outside Mexico? Ricardo Duenas: Yes. Thank you, Gabriel. Regarding the last part, we're always looking for opportunities to expand internationally. At this point in time, we don't have a concrete transaction that we could share. In terms of the MDP, it's around half of the MDP will be allocated to Monterrey, given that half of the traffic is allocated in Monterrey. We're looking to expand in most of -- in capacity that will generate commercial opportunities as well. There's pavement, there's technology, there's environmental and sustainability projects as well. Operator: Thank you. There are no questions at this time. I'll turn the floor back to Mr. Duenas for any final comments. Ricardo Duenas: We would like to thank you, everyone, for participating in today's call. We appreciate your insightful questions, engagement and continued support. Ruffo, Emmanuel and I remain available should you have any further questions or require additional information. Thank you once again, and have a great day. Operator: Thank you. This concludes today's teleconference. You may disconnect your lines at this time. Thank you for your participation.